micom voltage&frequency relay p92x technical guide

MiCOM P921/P922/P923

Voltage and Frequency Relays

Technical guide

P92x/EN T/E11

Technical Guide P92x/EN T00/E11ContentMiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 1/2

VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RELAYSMiCOM P921-P922-P923

CONTENT

Safety Section Px2xxEN SSA11

Getting Started P92x/EN GS/E11

Connection diagrams P92x/EN CO/E11

Technical Data P92x/EN TD/E11

User Guide P92x/EN FT/E11

Communications P92x/EN CT/E11

Installation Guide P92x/EN IN/E11

Commissioning Guide P92x/EN CM/E11

Test Report P92x/EN RS/E11

P92x/EN T00/E11 Technical GuideContent

Page 2/2 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide Px2xx/EN SS/A11SAFETY SECTION

SAFETY SECTION


Page 1/6

CONTENT

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 3

2. INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE 4

3. OPERATING CONDITIONS OF THE MiCOM RELAY 4

3.1 Replacement of the batteries 4

3.2 Current transformer circuits 4

3.3 Dielectric withstand test 4

4. REMOVAL AND DESTRUCTION OF THE MiCOM RELAY 5

5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 5

Px2xx/EN SS/A11 Technical GuideSAFETY SECTION

Page 2/6

BLANK PAGE


Page 3/6

1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

For your safety, please read these instructions before doing any work on theMiCOM relay.

Health and safety

The safety instructions described in this document are intended to guarantee correctinstallation and use of the MiCOM relay and to avoid any damage. All personsdirectly or indirectly concerned with the use of these devices must be familiar withthese safety instructions.

The meaning of the symbols

The meaning of the symbols which may be used on the equipment or in the productdocumentation is as indicated below:

!Important: Important:

refer to the product documentation risk of electrocution

Protective/safety earth * Functional earth *

NOTE: This symbol can also be used for aprotective/safety earth on a terminalstrip or in a subassembly, for examplefor the electrical power supply.

NOTE: the term "earth" used in the product documentation is the directequivalent of the term "exposed conductive parts" which is alsoused.


Page 4/6

2. INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE

Connection of the MiCOM relay

The personnel in charge of the installation, commissioning and maintenance of aMiCOM relay must apply adequate procedures to guarantee safety when using theequipment. Before installation, commissioning or maintenance on the equipment,consult the relevant chapters in the technical documentation of the relay.

The terminal blocks of the relays may have a dangerously high voltage duringinstallation, commissioning or maintenance, if electrical isolation is not carried out.

Access to the connectors at the rear of the relays can present risks of electrocutionand thermal shock.

Before you consider energisation, the MiCOM relay must be connected to earth viathe terminal provided for this purpose.

Unless otherwise indicated in the technical data chapter of the productdocumentation, the minimum size recommended for the earth wire is 2.5 mm2.

Before energising your MiCOM relay, please check the following points:

Rated voltage and polarity of the auxiliary power supply

Current value of the current transformer circuit and integrity of the connections

Integrity of the earth connection.

3. OPERATING CONDITIONS OF THE MiCOM RELAY

The operation of the MiCOM relay must comply with the electrical and environmentalrequirements described in this document.

3.1 Replacement of the batteries

The internal batteries, if used, must be replaced by batteries corresponding to thetype recommended. They must be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid any riskof damage to the equipment.

3.2 Current transformer circuits

Never open the auxiliary circuit of a live current transformer. The high voltageproduced may cause serious physical injury and damage the insulation of theequipment.

3.3 Dielectric withstand test

Following an insulation test, the capacitors may still be charged with a potentiallydangerous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage must beprogressively brought down to zero to discharge the capacitors before disconnectingthe test wiring.

!

!

!

!


Page 5/6

4. REMOVAL AND DESTRUCTION OF THE MiCOM RELAY

Removal: The auxiliary power supply circuit of the relay can include capacitorsfor the power supply or for earthing. To avoid any risk ofelectrocution or thermal shock, it is appropriate to isolate the relaycompletely (the two direct current poles) from any power supply,then to discharge the capacitors in complete safety via the externalterminals, before taking the device out of service.

Destruction: It is recommended that the relay should not be incinerated northrown into a river. MiCOM relays and their components should bedisposed of and recycled strictly in compliance with regulations onsafety and the environment. Before destruction, remove thebatteries, taking the necessary precautions to avoid any risk ofelectrocution.

5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Insulation level: IEC 1010-1: 1990/A2: 1995class IEN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995class I

This device must beconnected to earth toguarantee the safety of theuser.

Environment: IEC 1010-1: 1990/A2: 1995pollution level 2EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995pollution level 2

Conformity is established byreference to the genericsafety standards.

Product safety: 73/23/EEC Conformity with theEuropean Commissiondirective relating to lowvoltages.

CE EN 61010-1: 1993/A2: 1995EN 60905: 1992/A3: 1995

Conformity is established byreference to the genericsafety standards.

!


Page 6/6

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P92x/EN GS/E11

MiCOM P921-P922-P923

��

Getting Started

Technical Guide P92x/EN GS/E11Getting StartedMiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 1/18

��

CONTENT

1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 3

1.1 Receipt of relays 3

1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 3

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3

3. RELAY MOUNTING 4

4. UNPACKING 4

5. STORAGE 4

6. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P921-P922-P923 RELAYS 5

7. RELAY FRONT DESCRIPTION 6

7.1 Front view 6

8. RELAY REAR DESCRIPTION 8

9. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION 9

10. ENERGISING THE RELAY 10

10.1 System connections 10

10.2 Power supply connections 10

11. ACCESS TO THE MENU 11

11.1 Password protection 11

11.1.1 Password entry 11

11.2 System Frequency 11

11.3 VT Ratios 12

11.4 Connection mode 12

12. QUICK MEASUREMENT CHECK 13

12.1 Voltage 13

13. PC CONNECTION � LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS 14

13.1 Configuration of the connection 14

13.2 Configuration of the relay and of the laptop 14

14. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 15

15. COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 16

P92x/EN GS/E11 Technical GuideGetting Started


��

BLANK PAGE


��

1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

1.1 Receipt of relays

Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatmentprior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately toensure no damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustainedduring transit a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVAshould be promptly notified.

Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installationshould be returned to their protective polythene bags.

1.2 Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

The relays use components that are sensitive to electrostatic discharges.

The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal case and the internal moduleshould not be withdrawn unnecessarily. When handling the module outside its case,care should be taken to avoid contact with components and electrical connections. Ifremoved from the case for storage, the module should be placed in an electricallyconducting antistatic bag.

There are no setting adjustments within the module and it is advised that it is notunnecessarily disassembled. Although the printed circuit boards are pluggedtogether, the connectors are a manufacturing aid and not intended for frequentdismantling; in fact considerable effort may be required to separate them. Touchingthe printed circuit board should be avoided, since complementary metal oxidesemiconductors (CMOS) are used, which can be damaged by static electricitydischarged from the body.

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person�s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of severalthousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices whenhandling electronic circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not beimmediately apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.

The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housedin the case. Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing modulesunnecessarily.

Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductordevices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the followingprecautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which theequipment has been designed and manufactured.

1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostaticpotential as the equipment by touching the case.

2. Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuitboard. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track orconnectors.

3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both atthe same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which isat the same potential as yourself.

5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.



��

If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipmentin service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wriststrap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k� � 10M�.

If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case toprevent a build-up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for makingmeasurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible.

More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can befound in BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. It is strongly recommended that detailedinvestigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in aspecial handling area such as described in the above-mentioned BS and IECdocuments.

3. RELAY MOUNTING

Relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.

If an MMLG test block is to be included it should be positioned at the right-hand sideof the assembly (viewed from the front). Modules should remain protected by theirmetal case during assembly into a panel or rack.

For individually mounted relays an outline diagram is supplied in chapter 2 of thisTechnical Guide showing the panel cut-outs and hole centres.

4. UNPACKING

Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of theparts is damaged or the settings altered. Relays must only be handled by skilledpersons. The installation should be clean, dry and reasonably free from dust andexcessive vibration. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays that havebeen removed from their cases should not be left in situations where they areexposed to dust or damp. This particularly applies to installations which are beingcarried out at the same time as construction work.

5. STORAGE

If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt they should be stored in aplace free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bagshave been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag has been exposed to ambientconditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour, prior toreplacing it in the carton.

Dust which collects on a carton may, on subsequent unpacking, find its way into therelay; in damp conditions the carton and packing may become impregnated withmoisture and the de-humifier will lose its efficiency.

Storage temperature : �25°C to +70°C.


��

6. INTRODUCTION TO THE MiCOM P921-P922-P923 RELAYS

The range of MiCOM protection relays follows on from the success of the MIDOS, Kand MODN ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. The relaysMiCOM P921-P92 and P923 are fully compatible and use the same modular boxconcept. The MiCOM P921-P92 and P923 of relays provides more protection forthe most demanding applications.

Each relay has a large number of functions for controlling and collecting data. Thiscan form part of a fully integrated system covering protection, control,instrumentation, data acquisition and the recording of faults, events anddisturbances. The relays are equipped on the front panel with a liquid crystal display(LCD) with 2 x 16 back-lit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 button keypad (togain access to all the parameters, alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs simplydisplaying the state of the MiCOM P921-P922 and P923 relays. In addition, the useof the RS485 communication port makes it possible to read, reinitialise and changethe settings of the relays, if required, from a local or remote PC computer equippedwith appropriate software.

Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allowthe MiCOM P921-P922 and P923 to provide an evolving solution for the problems ofthe protection of electric networks.

The MiCOM P921-P922 and P923 relays provide comprehensive voltage andfrequency protection for phase and ground faults together with measurements,control and recording facilities.

Functions MiCOM P921 MiCOM P922 MiCOM P923Protection functionsUnder voltage (27) X X XOver voltage (59) X X XResidual over voltage (59N) X X XNegative sequence overvoltage (47) X XPositive sequence undervoltage (27D) X XUnder frequency (81U) X XOver frequency (81O) X XRate of change of frequency (81R) XUndervoltage blocking (settable for P923) X XAncillary functionsSettings groups 1 2 2Measurements X X XCircuit Breaker Control X X XCircuit Breaker Supervision X XOutput relay latching X X XBlocking logic X X XProgrammable logic equations X X XPeak demand X XRolling demand X XFault record X XEvents records X XDisturbance recording X XRear communication port X X XFront communication port X X XFrequency disturbance recording X



��

7. RELAY FRONT DESCRIPTION

7.1 Front view

The front panel of the relay is shown in figure 1, with the hinged covers at the topand bottom of the relay shown closed. Extra physical protection for the front panelcan be provided by an optional transparent front cover. This allows read access onlyto the relay�s settings and data but does not affect the relay�s IP rating. When fullaccess to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent covercan be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open.

Note that the MiCOM P921-P922 and P923 have the same size and the same frontpanel.

P0385ENa

FIGURE 1 : RELAY FRONT VIEW

The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1:

� a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).

� a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (�, �, �, �, an enter key �, a clearkey �, and a read key �).

� 8 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs and 4 programmable function LEDs on the lefthand side of the front panel.

� Under the top hinged cover:

� the relay serial number, and the relay�s voltage rating information (seefigure 3 in this chapter).


��

� Under the bottom hinged cover:

� battery compartment to hold the ½AA size battery which is used for memoryback-up for event, fault and disturbance records (P922 and P923 only).

� a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to therelay (up to 15m distance) via a RS232 serial data connection (SK1 port).

The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicatethe following conditions:

LEDS Colour Labels Significance

LED1 Red Trip. LED 1 indicates when a trip order has beenissued by the relay to the cut-off element (circuitbreaker, contactor). This LED recopies the triporder issued to the trip output contact (RL1). Itsnormal state is unlit. It is illuminated as soon asa trip order is issued. It goes out when theassociated alarm is acknowledged (by pushingthe � key).

LED2 Yellow Alarm LED 2 indicates that an alarm has beenregistered by MiCOM P921, P922 or P923relays. The alarms are either thresholdcrossings (instantaneous), or tripping orders(time delayed). The LED will flash until thealarms have been accepted (read), after whichthe LED will change to constant illumination,and will extinguish when the alarms have beencleared.

LED3 Orange Equip Failure LED 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms ofMiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays. When a« non critical » internal alarm (typicallycommunication Fault) is detected, the LEDflashes continuously. When the Fault is classedas « critical », the LED is illuminatedcontinuously. The extinction of this LED is onlypossible by the disappearance of the cause thatcaused its function (repair of the module,disappearance of the Fault).

LED4 Green Aux Supply LED 4 indicates that MiCOM P921, P922 andP923 relays are in correct working order.

LED5 toLED8

Red Aux1 to Aux4 These LEDs can be programmed by the user onthe basis of information on available thresholds(instantaneous and time-delayed). The userselects the information he wishes to seeassociates with each LED from the menuelement (Logic OR). Each LED illuminates whenthe associated information is valid. Theextinction of each LED is linked to theacknowledgement of the associated alarms.



��

8. RELAY REAR DESCRIPTION

P0386XXa

FIGURE 2 : RELAY MiCOM P921, P922 AND P923 REAR VIEW

P922 & P923 only P921, P922 and P923 P921, P922 and P923

Common Output5 1 2 Common Output1 Case earth 29 30 RS485 (resistance)

Output5 3 4 Ouput1 (NC) RS485+ 31 32 RS485�

Common Output6 5 6 Output1 (NO) Vaux (+) 33 34 Vaux (�)

Output6 7 8 Common Output2 Relay faulty 35 36 Common "Watchdog"

Common Output7 9 10 Output2 (NC) Relay healthy 37 38 Not used

Output7 11 12 Output2 (NO) Not used 39 40 Not used

Common Output8 13 14 Common Output3 VA 41 42 Common VA

Output8 15 16 Output3 VB 43 44 Common VB

Input3+ 17 18 Common Output4 VC 45 46 Common VC

Input3� 19 20 Output4 Not used 47 48 Not used

Input4+ 21 22 Input1+ VR 49 50 Common VR

Input4� 23 24 Input1� Not used 51 52 Not used

Input5+ 25 26 Input2+ Not used 53 54 Not used

Input5� 27 28 Input2� Not used 55 56 Not used

NOTA : - By default, the output contact n°1 is associated to the trip command, which is defined in the menu « AUTOMAT. CTRL »,sub-menu « TRIP OUTPUT RLY »

- MiCOM P921 hardware only provides 2 logic inputs and 4 output contacts.


��

9. PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION

Prior to applying power, unclip and lift the top cover and check that the modelnumber of the relay listed on the front panel (top left) corresponds to the modelordered.

P92101SM101

No.4000168 Cde : 44705/002

Un = 57 � 130V Modbus

Ua = 130-250 Vdc (100-250 Vac)

FIGURE 3 : TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The significance of each information is described below :

� P92101SM101 : cortec code. In particular, this code allows the user to knowwhat is the protocol used for remote communications (code 1 meansMODBUS).

� N°4000168 and Cde : 44705/002 : these numbers are the serial number andthe reference of the order : they are necessary in case of problems.

� Un = 57 � 130V : voltage inputs range.

� Modbus : communication protocol available through the rear RS485communication port.

� Ua = 130-250Vdc (100-250Vac) : power supply range. In this example, thepower supply can be either ac or dc voltage.


Page 10/18 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

��

10. ENERGISING THE RELAY

To energise correctly the relay, please follow carefully the following instructions.

10.1 System connections

1. Please check the wiring scheme of your installation,

2. Please check that the output relay N°1 is included in your trip circuit,

10.2 Power supply connections

Connect a DC or AC (according to nominal supply rating) voltage power supply.

CONNECTIONS ARE POSITIVE TO TERMINAL F33 AND NEGATIVE TO TERMINAL F34.DO NOT FORGET TO CONNECT THE EARTH REFERENCE (F29).

Turn on the DC or AC voltage and set to approximately rated voltage as shown onthe front panel of the relay.

Display should show:

Va =0.00 V

LEDs should be in the following configuration :

� Green LED « Vaux » lit

� All the other LEDs should be off


��

11. ACCESS TO THE MENU

Before using your MiCOM P921-P922 and P923, some settings have to be checkedor modified.

Lift top cover and lower down bottom cover in order to remove the transparent frontcover. When the keypad is exposed, it provides full access to the menu options of therelay, with the information displayed on the LCD.

11.1 Password protection

Password protection is applicable to the relay settings, especially to the selection ofthe various thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of inputsand outputs relays.

The password consists of four alphabetical capital characters. When leaving thefactory, the password is AAAA. The user can define his own combination ofcharacters.

Should the password be lost or forgotten, the modification of the stored parametersof the relay is prohibited. It is then necessary to contact the manufacturer or his agentby specifying the serial number of the relay so as to receive a stand-by passwordspecific to the relay concerned.

NOTA : The programming mode is indicated with the "P" letter on theright hand side of the display on each heading menu. The "P"letter remains present as long as the password is active (5minutes if there is no action on the keypad).

11.1.1 Password entry

When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear :

PASSWORD =AAAA

A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed.Press the � and � keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move betweenthe character fields of the password, use � and � keys.

The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key �. The display will indicated ifan incorrect password is entered. If a correct password is entered the followingmessage will appear :

Password OK

Alternatively, the password can be entered using the "Password" cell of the"OP. PARAMETERS" menu.

11.2 System Frequency

Press � 6 times, the default system frequency appears on the LCD.

Change the setting by pressing either the � key or the � key. To validate the newvalue, press the enter key �.


Page 12/18 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

��

11.3 VT Ratios

The default ratios are equal to 1. If other ratios are required, please follow theinstructions below. From the default display, press � once, � once, � once andpress � once to access the « VT RATIO » menu.

Then, press � once and the following prompt will appear :

Main VT Primary110.0 V


Press � once and the following prompt will appear (if the voltage input range is"57-130V") :

Main VT Sec�y110.0 V

If the voltage input range is 220-480V, there is no need to specify the VT secondarylevel.


If the connection scheme includes a residual VT, the ratio of this VT must be set in thismenu. The prompts will be :

E/Gnd VT Primary110.0 V

and

E/Gnd VT Sec'y110.0 V

11.4 Connection mode

From the heading of the menu, press � once to go back to the default display.

From the default display, press � once, � once and � once to access to the menu« CONFIGURATION », sub-menu « GENERAL ». Press � once.

The following connection schemes are supported :

3VPN= 3 phase-neutral VTs3VPN + VR= 3 phase-neutral VTs + residual VT3VPP + VR= 3 phase-phase VTs + residual VT2VPP + VR= 2 phase-phase VTs + residual VT

The default configuration is :

Connection3VPN


��

12. QUICK MEASUREMENT CHECK

12.1 Voltage

Switch off power supply.

Connect a single phase voltage to terminals 41 and 42 (VA voltage) and set to 0 V.

Switch on power supply and set as before. Switch on the AC voltage.

Press � once, � twice, � once to read the magnitude of the voltage on phase A.Raise the voltage to rated volts. The LCD will show the voltage measurement inprimary volts : divide by the set ratios to check accuracy.


Page 14/18 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

��

13. PC CONNECTION � LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS

The MiCOM S1 access software is used to set the relay locally from a laptop.

13.1 Configuration of the connection

The configuration is shown below :

MiCOM P921 relay

Laptop

Serial communication port (COM1 or COM2)

Serial data connector (up to 15 m)

Battery9 pin front port

P0394ENa

Serial data connectorDCEPin 2 TxPin 3 RxPin 5 0V

DTEPin 2 RxPin 3 TxPin 5 0V

P0387ENa

FIGURE 4 : PC CONNECTION SHOWN ASSUMING 9 WAY SERIAL PORT

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector locatedunder the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data communication(asynchronous RS232 connection according the IEC870 requirements) and isintended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown inFigure 4 : this is for one to one connection and this is not suitable for permanentconnection.

13.2 Configuration of the relay and of the laptop

Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PC�scommunication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relay�scommunication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below:

Protocol ModBus

Baud rate 19,200 bits/s

Message format 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity), 1 stop bit

The address of the relay must be set in the "COMMUNICATIONS" menu.


��

14. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

33

34+-

Notes :(1) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay(2) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay(3) 3VTs phase to neutral connection shown

41

4243

4445

4649

50

22

2426

28

19

17

21

23

27

25

WD

373536

RL1

642

RL2

1210

8

29

31

32

-30*

+

_

C B

A

Phase rotation

EL1

Power supplyRelay healthy

WatchdogRelay failed

Output contacts (programmables)

RL31614

RL42018

RL531

RL675

RL79

11

RL81315

4 programmables LEDs

Earth connection

Communication portRS485

*

(* System end resistance. For last relay, connect 30 and 32 together).

MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 case connection diagram

LEDs

See note 2

See note 1See note 3

MiCOM P92*

RL1

RL2

RL3

EL2

EL3

EL4

EL5

RL4

RL5

RL6

RL7

RL8Programmable inputs :

P0388ENa


Page 16/18 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

��

15. COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION

If you need information regarding the operation of the MiCOM product that youhave, please contact your local AREVA agent or the After Sales Service Departmentof AREVA and mention the reference of your MiCOM product.

The MiCOM product references are mentioned under the upper flap of the productfront plate. For more precise information, you may refer to the « Productidentification » paragraph within this chapter.

PLEASE MENTION THE FOLLOWING DATA WHEN YOU CALL US :

� CORTEC code of the MiCOM relay

� Serial number of the MiCOM relay

� AREVA�s order reference

� AREVA�s operator reference

AFTER SALES SERVICE DEPARTMENT ADDRESS AND PHONE/FAX NUMBER:

Service Après Vente/After Sales ServiceAREVA T&D

95 avenue de la Banquière � BP7534975 Lattes Cedex

FRANCE

Phone : 33 (0)4.67.20.55.58 or 33 (0)4.67.20.55.55

Fax : 33 (0)4.67.20.56.00

E-mail : [email protected]


��

REPAIR FORM

Please complete this form and return it to AREVA T&D with the equipment to be repaired.This form may also be used in the case of application queries.

AREVA T&DDpt Ventes et ServicesAvenue de FiguièresB.P. 75F-34975 LATTES CedexFrance

Customer Ref. : __________________ Model N° : ___________________

AREVA Contract Ref.: __________________ Serial N° : ___________________

Date: __________________

1. What parameters were in use at the time the fault occurred ?

AC volts _________________ Main VT/Test set

DC volts _________________ Battery/Power supply

Frequency _________________

2. Which type of test was being used ? _____________________________________________

3. Were all the external components fitted where required ? Yes/No(delete as appropriate)

4. List the relay settings being used

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

5. What did you expect to happen ?

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________


Page 18/18 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

��

6. What did happen ?

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

7. when did the fault occur ?

Instant Yes/No Intermittent Yes/No

Time delayed Yes/No (delete as appropriate)

By how long ? _________________

8. What indications if any did the relay show ?

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

9. Was there any visual damage ?

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

10. Any other remarks which may be useful :

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________ ___________________________________

Signature Title

___________________________________ ___________________________________

Name (in capitals) Company name

Technical Guide P92x/EN CO/E11

MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

Connection Diagrams

Technical Guide P92x/EN CO/E11Connection DiagramsMiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 1/10

��

CONTENT

1. ANALOGUE INPUTS 3

1.1 VT inputs 3

1.1.1 3VTs (phase-neutral) configuration 3

1.1.2 3VTs (phase-neutral) + residual VT configuration 4

1.1.3 3VTs (phase-phase) + residual VT configuration 5

1.1.4 2VTs + residual VT connection 6

1.1.5 LV connection for P92x (220-480V range) 7

2. PORTS CONNECTION 8

2.1 Front port connection (RS232) 8

2.2 RS485 rear port 9

2.2.1 Description 9

2.2.2 Connection 9

2.2.3 Convertors 9

3. CASE DIMENSIONS 10

SCHEMES

FIGURE 1 : 3VTs CONNECTION 3

FIGURE 2 : 3VTs + RESIDUAL VT CONNECTION 4

FIGURE 3 : 3VTs (PHASE-PHASE) + RESIDUAL VT CONNECTION 5

FIGURE 4 : 2VTs + RESIDUAL VT CONNECTION 6

FIGURE 5 : LV CONNECTION FOR P92x (220-480V RANGE) 7

FIGURE 6 : PC<->RELAY SIGNAL CONNECTION 8

FIGURE 7 : RS485 CONNECTION 9

FIGURE 8 : MiCOM P921 AND P922 RELAYS CASE DIMENSIONS 10

P92x/EN CO/E11 Technical GuideConnection Diagrams


��

BLANK PAGE


��

1. ANALOGUE INPUTS

The MiCOM P921-P922 and P923 relays have 4 voltage inputs : one voltage inputfor the residual voltage and 3 phase voltage inputs.

1.1 VT inputs

The following figures present different configurations of VTs.

1.1.1 3VTs (phase-neutral) configuration

Select the « 3VPN » configuration in the « CONFIGURATION » menu and in the« GENERAL » sub-menu.

The 3 phase voltages VA, VB, VC are then measured by the MiCOM relay.

33

34+-

Notes :(1) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay (2) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay Scheme representing MiCOM relay off

41

4243

4445

4649

50

22

2426

28

19

17

21

23

27

25

WD

373536

RL1

642

RL2

1210

8

29

31

32

-30

+

_

C B

A

Phase rotation

Programmable inputs :

See note 1

P0389ENa

Power supply Watchdog

Output contacts programmable

RL31614

RL42018

RL531

RL675

RL79

11

RL81315

4 programmable LEDs

See note 2

Earth connection

Communication port RS485

3VTs CONFIGURATION (Phase-Neutral)

LEDs

(* System end resistance. For last relay, connect 30 and 32 together).

*

RL2

RL1

EL1

EL2

EL3

EL4

EL5

RL3

RL4

RL5

RL6

RL7

RL8

MiCOM P92*

+

_

+_

+_

+_

+_

FIGURE 1 : 3VTs CONNECTION



��

1.1.2 3VTs (phase-neutral) + residual VT configuration

Select the « 3VPN + VR » configuration in the « CONFIGURATION » menu and in the« GENERAL » sub-menu.

The 3 phase voltages VA, VB, VC and the residual voltage VR are then measured bythe MiCOM relay.

33

34+-

Notes :(1) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay(2) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay Scheme representing MiCOM relay off

41

4243

4445

4649

50

22

2426

28

19

17

21

23

27

25

WD

373536

RL1

642

RL2

1210

8

29

31

32

-30*

+

_

C B

A

Phase rotation


RL31614

RL42018

RL531

RL675

RL79

11

RL81315

4 programmable LEDs

Earth connection


3VTs CONFIGURATION (Phase-Neutral) + residual voltage

LEDs

See note 2

(* System end resistance. For last relay, connect 30 and 32 together)

*

See note 1


RL2

RL1

EL1

EL2

EL3

EL4

EL5

RL3

RL4

RL5

RL6

RL7

RL8

Output contacts (programmable) :

+

_

+_

+_

+_

+_

P0390ENa

FIGURE 2 : 3VTs + RESIDUAL VT CONNECTION


��

1.1.3 3VTs (phase-phase) + residual VT configuration

Select the « 3VPP + VR » configuration in the « CONFIGURATION » menu and in the« GENERAL » sub-menu.

The 3 line voltages VAB, VBC, VCA and the residual voltage VR are then measured bythe MiCOM relay.

33

34+-

Notes :(1) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay(2) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay Scheme representing MiCOM relay off

41

4243

4445

4649

50

22

2426

28

19

17

21

23

27

25

WD

373536

RL1

642

RL2

1210

8

29

31

32

-30*

+

_

C B

A

Phase rotation



RL31614

RL42018

RL531

RL675

RL79

11

RL81315

4 programmable LEDs

Earth connection


3VTs CONFIGURATION (Phase-Phase) + residual voltage

LEDs

See note 2


*

See note 1


RL2

RL1

EL1

EL2

EL3

EL4

EL5

RL3

RL4

RL5

RL6

RL7

RL8+

_

+_

+_

+_

+_

P0391ENa

FIGURE 3 : 3VTs (PHASE-PHASE) + RESIDUAL VT CONNECTION



��

1.1.4 2VTs + residual VT connection

Select the « 2VPP +VR » configuration in the « CONFIGURATION » menu and in the« GENERAL » sub-menu.

The 3 line voltages VAB, VBC, VCA and the residual voltage VR are then measured bythe MiCOM relay.

33

34+-C B

A

Notes :(1) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relay(2) Additional hardware for MiCOM P922 and P923 relayScheme representing MiCOM relay off

41

4243

4445

4649

50

22

2426

28

19

17

21

23

27

25

WD

373536

RL1

642

RL2

12108

29

31

32

-30*

+

_

Phase rotation

Power supply

Watchdog


RL31614

RL42018

RL531

RL675

RL79

11

RL81315

4 programmable LEDs

Earth connection


2VTs CONFIGURATION + residual voltage

LEDs

See note 2


*

See note 1


RL2

RL1

EL1

EL2

EL3

EL4

EL5

RL3

RL4

RL5

RL6

RL7

RL8+

_

+_

+_

+_

+_

P0392ENa

FIGURE 4 : 2VTs + RESIDUAL VT CONNECTION


��

1.1.5 LV connection for P92x (220-480V range)

33

34

+

-C B

A


41

4243

4445

4649

50

22

24

26

28

19

17

21

23

27

25

WD

37

35

36

RL1

6

4

2

RL2

12

10

8

29

31

32

-30*

+

_

Phase rotation

Power supply

Watchdog


RL316

14

RL420

18

RL53

1

RL67

5

RL79

11

RL813

15

4 programmable LEDs

Earth connection


LV connection for P92x (220-480V range)

LEDs

See note 2


*

See note 1


RL2

RL1

EL1

EL2

EL3

EL4

EL5

RL3

RL4

RL5

RL6

RL7

RL8

A B C

33

34

+

-C B

A


41

4243

4445

4649

50

22

24

26

28

19

17

21

23

27

25

WD

37

35

36

RL1

6

4

2

RL2

12

10

8

29

31

32

-30*

+

_

Phase rotation

Power supply

Watchdog


RL316

14

RL420

18

RL53

1

RL67

5

RL79

11

RL813

15

4 programmable LEDs

Earth connection


LEDs

See note 2


*

See note 1


RL2

RL1

EL1

EL2

EL3

EL4

EL5

RL3

RL4

RL5

RL6

RL7

RL8

AN B C

+

_

+_

+_

+_

+_

+

_

+_

+_

+_

+_

P0393ENa

FIGURE 5 : LV CONNECTION FOR P92x (220-480V RANGE)



��

2. PORTS CONNECTION

2.1 Front port connection (RS232)

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector locatedunder the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data communication(asynchronous RS232 connection according the IEC870 requirements) and isintended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance).

The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pinconnections of the relay�s 9-pin front port are as follows:

Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data

Pin no. 3 Rx Receive data

Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common

None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected tothe serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally DataTerminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below(if in doubt check your PC manual):

Pin no. 2 Rx Receive data

Pin no. 3 Tx Transmit data

Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common

For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to theRx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on thePC, as shown in figure 5. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pinconnections as given above, a �straight through� serial connector is required, i.e. onethat connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a commoncause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx.This could happen if a �cross-over� serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as therelay.

MiCOM P921 relay

Laptop

Serial communication port (COM1 or COM2)

Serial data connector (up to 15 m)

Battery9 pin front port

P0394ENa

FIGURE 6 : PC<->RELAY SIGNAL CONNECTION


��

2.2 RS485 rear port

2.2.1 Description

The rear RS485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connectionwhichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to31 relays can be �daisy chained� together using a simple twisted pair electricalconnection.

2.2.2 Connection

30323436384042444648505254

56

29313335373941434547495153

55

468

10

1820

13579

1413

1719

222426

28

212325

27

1615

1211

2

Rear terminals

Communicationconnections

P0180ENa

FIGURE 7 : RS485 CONNECTION

The total communication cable from the master unit to the farthest slave device is aspur, and no branches may be made from this spur. The maximum cable length is1000m and the maximum number of devices per spur is 32.

The transmission wires should be terminated using a 150 � resistor at both extremeends of the cable. To do this, connect the terminals 30 and 32 together.

Polarity is not necessary for the 2 twisted wires.

WARNING : TERMINALS F33 AND F34 ARE USED FOR THE POWER SUPPLY. DO NOTCONNECT THE VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY TO TERMINALS F31 AND F32.

2.2.3 Convertors

2.2.3.1 Protocol convertor : RS232 -> K-Bus

KITZ 101,102 and 201 can be used.

Configuration is : 19200 bauds, 11 bits, full duplex.

2.2.3.2 RS232 / RS485 converter

The following RS232/RS485 converters have been tested by AREVA :

RS_CONV1 : convertor suitable for a short length and for up to 4 connected relays

RS_CONV32 : industrial convertor, suitable for up to 31 connected relays.


Page 10/10 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

��

3. CASE DIMENSIONS

MiCOM P921-P922 and P923 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel orflush mounting.

Weight : 1.7 to 2.1 Kg

External size : Height case 152 mmfront panel 177 mm

Width case 97 mmfront panel 103 mm

Depth case 226 mmfront panel + case 252 mm

9739

158168

49.5

Panel cut-out Flush mounting fixing details

Dimensionsin mm.

4 holes Ø 4.4 (M4 screw)

25.1 226

151.2 max.

Flush mountingP0395ENa

MiCOM

103

177

VA = 214.50 A

C

26

4 holes Ø 3.4

3926

Alarme

Trip

Auxiliary supply

Equip. fail

AUX. 1

AUX. 3

AUX. 2

AUX. 4

P921

49.5

FIGURE 8 : MiCOM P921 AND P922 RELAYS CASE DIMENSIONS

Technical Guide P92x/EN TD/E11


Technical Data

Technical Guide P92x/EN TD/E11Technical DataMiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 1/30

CONTENTS

1. RATINGS 6

1.1 Voltages 6

1.2 Auxiliary voltage 6

1.3 Frequency 6

1.4 Logic inputs 7

1.5 Output Relay Contacts 7

2. BURDENS 8

2.1 Voltage circuits 8

2.2 Auxiliary supply 8

2.3 Optically-isolated inputs 8

3. PROTECTION SETTING RANGES 9

3.1 Undervoltage (ANSI code 27) 9

3.1.1 Threshold settings (secondary values) 9

3.1.2 Time delay settings 9

3.1.3 Inverse Time Delay Characteristic 9

3.1.4 Definite time delay characteristics 11

3.1.5 Hysteresis 11

3.2 Overvoltage (ANSI code 59) 11





3.2.5 Hysteresis 14

3.3 Residual overvoltage / neutral displacement (ANSI code 59N) 15





3.3.5 Hysteresis 16

3.4 Negative sequence overvoltage (ANSI code 47) only P922 & P923 16





P92x/EN TD/E11 Technical GuideTechnical Data


3.4.5 Hysteresis 17

3.5 Positive sequence undervoltage (ANSI code 27D) only P922 & P923 17





3.5.5 Hysteresis 18

3.6 Under/overfrequency (ANSI codes 81U/81O) only P922 & P923 19

3.7 Rate of change of frequency (ANSI codes 81R) only P923 19

3.7.1 Threshold settings 19

3.7.2 Integration time 19

3.7.3 Validation number of protection 19

3.7.4 Under voltage blocking 20

4. MEASUREMENT AND RECORDS 21

4.1 Settings 21

4.2 Disturbance record (P922 and P923) 21

4.3 Frequency disturbance record (P923 only) 21

5. COMMUNICATIONS 22

5.1 Front port (RS232) 22

5.2 Rear port (RS485) 22

6. CONTROL FUNCTIONS SETTINGS 23

6.1 Circuit breaker state monitoring 23

6.2 Circuit breaker control 23

6.3 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring 23

7. LOGIC EQUATIONS 23

8. VT RATIOS 23

9. ACCURACY 24

9.1 Reference conditions 24

9.2 Measurements accuracy 24

9.3 Protection Accuracy 24

9.4 High Voltage Withstand IEC60255-5:1977 25

9.4.1 Dielectric Withstand 25

9.4.2 Impulse 25

9.4.3 Insulation Resistance 25


10. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE 26

10.1 Electrical environment 26

10.1.1 DC Supply Interruptions IEC60255-11:1979 26

10.1.2 AC Ripple on DC Supply IEC60255-11:1979 26

10.1.3 Disturbances on AC Supply - EN61000 - 4 - 11 :1994 26

10.1.4 High Frequency Disturbance IEC60255-22-1:1988 26

10.1.5 Fast Transient IEC60255-22-4:1992 & IEC60801-4:1988 26

10.1.6 Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2:1989 & IEC60801-2:1991 26

10.1.7 Conducted Emissions EN 55011:1991 27

10.1.8 Radiated Emissions EN 55011:1991 27

10.1.9 Radiated Immunity IEC60255-22-3:1989 & IEC60801-3:1984 27

10.1.10 Conducted Immunity ENV50141:1993 27

10.1.11 Surge Immunity IEC61000-4-5:1995 27

10.1.12 EMC Compliance 27

10.1.13 Power Frequency Interference - Electricity Association (UK) 28

10.2 Atmospheric Environment 28

10.2.1 Temperature IEC60068-2-1:1990/IEC60068-2-2:1974 28

10.2.2 Humidity IEC60068-2-3:1969 28

10.2.3 Enclosure Protection IEC60529:1989 28

10.3 Mechanical Environment 28

10.3.1 Vibration IEC60255-21-1:1988 28

10.3.2 Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2:1988 28

10.3.3 Seismic IEC60255-21-3:1993 28

11. ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS 29

11.1 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1989 29

11.2 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1 : 1989 29

11.3 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.2 : 1995 29

12. SAFETY 29

12.1 Low Voltage (safety and insulation) Directive 29



BLANK PAGE


Information required with order

MiCOM P 9 2 * 0 * * * 1

Type of relay

Voltage relay 1

Voltage / Frequency relay (only choice for the« G » type of application)

2

Voltage/frequency relay with df/dt 3

Voltage inputs

57 � 130 V A

220 � 480 V B

Type of application

Standard S

EDF / GTE2666 (types 1&2) G

Auxiliary supply voltage

24 � 60Vdc A

48 � 150Vdc F

130 � 250Vdc/100 � 250Vac 50/60 Hz M

Communication protocol

Modbus (only choice for the « G » type of application) 1

K-BUS / Courier 2

IEC 60870-5-103 3

HMI Language (*)

French (only choice for the « G » type of application) 0

English / American 1

Spanish 2

German 3

Italian 4

Russian 5

Polish 6

Portuguese 7

Dutch 8

Czech A

Hungarian B

(*) please contact us in order to know the availabilities



1. RATINGS

1.1 Voltages

Nominal voltage Operating range

57 � 130Vph - ph eff 5 to 260Vph - ph eff

220 � 480Vph - ph eff 20 to 960Vph - ph eff

Duration Thermal withstand(Vn = 57 � 130V)

Thermal withstand(Vn = 220 � 480V)

Continuous 260Vph - ph eff 960Vph - ph eff

10 seconds 300Vph - ph eff 1300Vph - ph eff

1.2 Auxiliary voltage

3 auxiliary voltage ranges are available for the MiCOM P921-P922 and P923 relays,as described below :

Operating rangesNominal ranges

Vdc Vac

24 � 60 Vdc 19 - 72 V -

48 � 150 Vdc 38 � 180 V -

130 � 250 Vdc / 100 - 250 Vac, 50/60 Hz 104 � 300 V 88 - 300 V

1.3 Frequency

The nominal frequency (Fn) is dual rated at 50/60 Hz (selection realised into the« OP.PARAMETERS » menu of the HMI), the operate range is 40Hz to 70Hz.

Nominal value Operating range

50 Hz 40 � 60 Hz

60 Hz 50 � 70 Hz


1.4 Logic inputs

All the logic inputs are optically-isolated and independent : the MiCOM P921 relayhas 2 logic inputs and the MiCOM P922-P923 relays have 5 logic inputs.

Energization of the logic inputs is realised with a DC or AC auxiliary voltage.

Logical « ON »

CORTECcode

Auxiliary voltage :nominal ranges Voltage range Minimum

voltageMinimumcurrent (mA)

A 24-60Vdc 19 � 60 Vdc 15 Vdc 3,35 mA

F 48-150Vdc 32 � 150 Vdc 25 Vdc 3,35 mA

M 130-250Vdc /100-250Vac

48 � 250 Vdc 38 Vdc 2,20 mA

Logic input recognition time = 5 ms

1.5 Output Relay Contacts

The output contacts of the MiCOM P921-P922-P923 relays are AgCdO dry contacts.Their technical characteristics are indicated below :

Make and carry : 30A for 3s

Carry : 5A continuous

Break : DC : 50W resistiveDC : 25W inductive (L/R = 40ms)AC : 1250VAAC : 1250 VA inductive (cos � = 0.5)

Maxima : 5A and 300V

Loaded contact : 10 000 operation minimum

Unloaded contact : 100 000 operation minimum

Operation time < 7 ms



2. BURDENS

2.1 Voltage circuits

Reference voltage (Vn)

Vn = 57 � 130V <0,25 VA

Vn = 220 � 480V <0,36 VA

2.2 Auxiliary supply

Nominal* Maximum**

3W

* Nominal is with 50% of the optos energised and one relay per card energised

2.3 Optically-isolated inputs

Reference voltage* Current (per logic input)

24-60Vdc 10mA

48-125 Vdc 5mA

130 � 250Vdc 2.5mA


3. PROTECTION SETTING RANGES

All the following functions can be activated or deactivated independently.

3.1 Undervoltage (ANSI code 27)

3.1.1 Threshold settings (secondary values)

� Nominal voltage range : 57 � 130V

Setting Range Step size

V<= Voltage Set 5 � 130V 0.1V

V<<= Voltage Set 5 � 130V 0.1V

V<<<= Voltage Set 5 � 130V 0.1V


Setting Range Step size

V<= Voltage Set 20 � 480V 0.5V

V<<= Voltage Set 20 � 480V 0.5V

V<<<= Voltage Set 20 � 480V 0.5V

3.1.2 Time delay settings

Each voltage element is associated to an independent time delay.

Each measuring element time delay can be blocked by the operation of a userdefined logic (optical isolated) input (see �Blocking logic1� or �Blocking logic2�functions).

Element Time delay type

1st stage Definite Time (DT) or IDMT

2nd stage DT

3rd stage DT

3.1.3 Inverse Time Delay Characteristic

The inverse characteristic is defined by the following formula :

��

�

�

��

�

�

�

�

1VsVTMS

t

where :

t = operating time in secondsTMS = time Multiplier SettingV = applied input voltageVs = relay setting voltage

NOTE : this equation is only valid for VsV

ratio< than 0.95


Page 10/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

Setting Range Step Size

TMS 0.5 � 100 0.5


TRESET (only DT) 0 � 100s 0,01s

UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTIC

1

10

100

1000

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1

Applied voltage/relay setting voltageP0396ENa

Ope

ratin

g tim

e (s

ec)

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

FIGURE 1 : IDMT CURVES FOR THE UNDERVOLTAGE ELEMENT �V<�


3.1.4 Definite time delay characteristics


tV< 0 � 599s 0.01s

tV<< 0 � 599s 0.01s

tV<<< 0 � 599s 0.01s

3.1.5 Hysteresis


Hysteresis 1.02 � 1.05 0.01s

NOTE : this range is a percentage value of the pickup value of theundervoltage elements (see paragraph 9.3 Protection accuracy)

3.2 Overvoltage (ANSI code 59)




V>= Voltage Set 5 � 200V 0.1V

V>>= Voltage Set 5 � 260V 0.1V

V>>>= Voltage Set 5 � 260V 0.1V



V>= Voltage Set 20 � 720V 0.5V

V>>= Voltage Set 20 � 960V 0.5V

V>>>= Voltage Set 20 � 960V 0.5V






2nd stage DT

3rd stage DT


Page 12/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923



��

�

�

��

�

�

�

�

1VsVTMS

t

where :

t = operating time in secondsTMS = time Multiplier SettingV = applied input voltageVs = relay setting voltage

NOTE : this equation is only valid for VsV

ratio > than 1.1


TMS 0.5 � 100 0.5


TRESET (only DT) 0 � 100s 0,01s

When the V> is associated with IDMT curve, the recommended maximum settingvalue should be less or equal to max. setting range divided by 20.


OVERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTIC

0,01

0,1

1

10

100

1000

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

Applied voltage input/relay setting voltageP0397ENa

Ope

ratin

g tim

e (s

ec)

TMS = 5

TMS = 2

TMS = 1

FIGURE 2 : IDMT CURVE FOR THE OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENT �V>�


Page 14/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923



tV> 0 � 599s 0.01s

tV>> 0 � 599s 0.01s

tV>>> 0 � 599s 0.01s

3.2.5 Hysteresis


Hysteresis 0.95 � 0.98 0.01s

NOTE : this range is a percentage value of the pickup value of theovervoltage elements (see paragraph 9.3 Protection accuracy)


3.3 Residual overvoltage / neutral displacement (ANSI code 59N)




V0> Voltage set 0.5 � 130V 0.1V

V0>> Voltage set 0.5 � 130V 0.1V

V0>>> Voltage set 0.5 � 130V 0.1V



V0> Voltage set 2 � 480V 0.5V

V0>> Voltage set 2 � 480V 0.5V

V0>>> Voltage set 2 � 480V 0.5V






2nd stage DT

3rd stage DT



��

�

�

��

�

�

�

�

1VVTMS

t

S

0

where :

t = operating time in secondsTMS = time Multiplier SettingV0 = applied input voltageVs = relay setting voltage


TMS 0,5 - 100 0.5


TRESET (only DT) 0 � 100s 0.01s


Page 16/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923



tV0> 0 � 599s 0.01s

tV0>> 0 � 599s 0.01s

tV0>>> 0 � 599s 0.01s

3.3.5 Hysteresis

Hysteresis fixed 95%

(see § 9.3 Protection accuracy)

When the V0> is associated with IDMT curve, the recommended maximum settingvalue should be less or equal to max. withstand voltage of the VT inputs divided by20.

3.4 Negative sequence overvoltage (ANSI code 47) only P922 & P923






� Nominal voltage range: 220 � 480V









2nd stage DT




��

�

�

��

�

�

�

�

1VVTMS

t

S

2

where :



TMS 0,5 - 100 0.5


tRESET (only DT) 0 � 100s 0.01s



tV2> 0 � 599s 0.01s

tV2>> 0 � 599s 0.01s

3.4.5 Hysteresis


When the V2> is associated with IDMT curve, the recommended maximum settingvalue should be less or equal to max. withstand voltage of the VT inputs divided by20.

3.5 Positive sequence undervoltage (ANSI code 27D) only P922 & P923




V1< Voltage set 5 � 130V 0.1V

V1<< Voltage set 5 � 130V 0.1V



V1< Voltage set 20 � 480V 0.5V

V1<< Voltage set 20 � 480V 0.5V


Page 18/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923






2nd stage DT



��

�

�

��

�

�

�

�

1VVTMS

t

S

1

where :



TMS 0,5 - 100 0.5


tRESET (only DT) 0 � 100s 0.01s



tV1< 0 � 599s 0.01s

tV1<< 0 � 599s 0.01s

3.5.5 Hysteresis



3.6 Under/overfrequency (ANSI codes 81U/81O) only P922 & P923


F1 threshold Fn � 10Hz, Fn + 10Hz 0.01 Hz

tF1 (definite time delay) 0 � 599s 0.01s











Where : Fn : nominal frequency

3.7 Rate of change of frequency (ANSI codes 81R) only P923

3.7.1 Threshold settings


df/dt1 threshold �10 Hz/s, +10 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s






3.7.2 Integration time


cycle number 1 � 200 1 cycle

3.7.3 Validation number of protection


Validation 2 or 4 2


Page 20/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

3.7.4 Under voltage blocking

� Nominal voltage range : 57-130V


protection block 5.7 � 130V 0.1

� Nominal voltage range : 220-480V


protection block 20 � 480V 0.1

NOTE : For P922S the under voltage blocking threshold is fixed to 10%of the nominal setting voltage range.


4. MEASUREMENT AND RECORDS

4.1 Settings

The measured values are displayed on the LCD of the relay ; they are true RMSvalues (up to the 10th harmonic) and are primary values.

They can also be read through the communication ports (RS232 or RS485).

4.2 Disturbance record (P922 and P923)

The MiCOM P922-P923 is able to store up to 5 records of 2.5s each.


Pre � time 0.01 � 2.5s 0.01s

Post � time 0.01 � 2.5s 0.01s

Sample rate 32 samples/cycle Fixed

Digital signals Logic inputs and output contacts status

Trigger logic - Power on of the MiCOM relay,

- Any selected protection alarm or trip,

- Dedicated logic input,

- Remote command.

NOTE : if both post- and pre-time are set equal to 2.5s, the pre-time willbe priority and equal to 2.5s. The post-time will then be equal to0s.

4.3 Frequency disturbance record (P923 only)

The MiCOM P923 is able to store one record of 20s.


Pre � time 5s fixed

Post � time 15s fixed

Sample rate 1 sample/cycle fixed

Digital signals Logic inputs and output contacts status

Trigger logic - Instantaneous or time delayed tripping,

- Dedicated logic input,

- Logic equation,

- Remote command.


Page 22/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

5. COMMUNICATIONS

5.1 Front port (RS232)

Front port Communication Parameters (Fixed)

Protocol Modbus RTU

Address To be specified in the « COMMUNICATIONS » menu of therelay

Messages format IEC60870FT1.2

Baud rate 19200 bits/s

Parity Without

Stop bits 1

Data bits 8

5.2 Rear port (RS485)

Rear port settings Setting options Setting available for:

Remote address 0 - 255 (step = 1) IEC / Kbus-Courier /Modbus RTU

Baud rate 9 600 or 19 200 bits/s IEC

Baud rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,9600, 19 200 or 38 400 bits/s

Modbus

Baud rate 64000 bits/s Kbus

Parity �Even�, �Odd� or �Without� Modbus RTU

Stop bits 0 or 1 or 2 Modbus RTU


6. CONTROL FUNCTIONS SETTINGS

6.1 Circuit breaker state monitoring

The MiCOM P921-P922-P923 relays monitor the state of the circuit breaker usingeither 52a and/or 52b signals.

6.2 Circuit breaker control

It is possible to control the circuit breaker via the communication (RS232 or RS485links).


Close pulse time 0.1 to 5 s 0.05 s

Trip pulse time 0.1 to 5 s 0.05 s

6.3 Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring


Nb. Operations Alarm 0 � 50000 1

Open time alarm 0.1 � 5s 0.1s

Close time alarm 0.1 � 5s 0.1s

7. LOGIC EQUATIONS

2 or 4 logic equations are available. The associated timers are :

Time delays Settings Step size

tOPERATE 0 � 3600s 0.1s

tRESET 0 � 3600s 0.1s

8. VT RATIOS

The primary and secondary rating can be independently set for each set of VT inputs,for example the residual VT ratio can be different to that used for the phase voltages.

Voltage ranges Primary Secondary

57 � 130V 0,1 � 100kVstep = 0.01kV

57 � 130Vstep = 0.1V

220 � 480V 220 � 480Vstep = 10V

220 � 480Vstep = 10V


Page 24/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

9. ACCURACY

If no range is specified for the validity of the accuracy, then the specified accuracyshall be valid over the full setting range.

9.1 Reference conditions

Quantity Reference conditions Test tolerance

General

Ambient temperature 20 �C �2�C

Atmospheric pressure 86kPa to 106kPa -

Relative humidity 45 to 75 % -

Input energising quantity

Voltage Vn �5%

Frequency 50 or 60Hz �0.5%

Auxiliary supply DC 48V or 110V

AC 63.5V or 110V

�5%

9.2 Measurements accuracy

Quantity Range Accuracy

Voltage Vn �2%

Frequency 40 - 70Hz �10mHz

9.3 Protection Accuracy

Functions Range Operate Reset Timer Accuracy

Undervoltage protection(V<, V<< and V<<<)

5-130V (range 1)20-480V (range 2)

DT : Vs �2%IDMT : Voperate = 0.95Vs �2%

(1.02-1.05) Voperate �2% Greater of 2% or 20msGreater of 5% or 40ms

Overvoltage protection(V>, V>> and V>>>)

5-260V (range 1)20-960V (range 2)

DT : Vs �2%IDMT : Voperate = 1.1Vs �2%

(0.95-0.98) Voperate �2% Greater of 2% or 20msGreater of 5% or 40ms

Residual voltage protection(V0>, V0>> and V0>>>)

0.5-130V (range 1)2-480V (range 2)

DT : Vs �2%IDMT : Voperate = 1.1Vs �2%(if direct measurement)

0.95 Voperate �2% Greater of 2% or 20msGreater of 5% or 40ms

Under/Over frequency 40 � 70Hz DT : fs �10mHz fs �50mHz Greater of 2% or 20ms

NOTE : For residual voltage protection :� 0.5V � 4V (range 1) : hysteresis = Voperate � 0.2V� 2V � 16V (range 2) : hysteresis = Voperate � 0.8VThe instantaneous operating time for under/over frequency is50 ms (minimum).The instantaneous operating time for under/over voltage is≤30 ms.


No additional errors will be incurred for any of the following influencing quantities.

Environmental Operative range (typical only)

Temperature -25�C to +55�C

Mechanical (Vibration, Shock, Bump,Seismic)

According to :IEC 60255-21-1:1988IEC 60255-21-2:1988IEC 60255-21-3:1995

Electrical Operative range

Frequency 40 Hz to 70 Hz

Harmonics (single) 5% over the range 2nd to 17th

Auxiliary voltage range 0.8 LV to 1.2 HV (dc)

0.8 LV to 1.1 HV (ac)

Aux. supply ripple 12% Vn with a frequency of 2.fn

Power off withstand 50 ms

9.4 High Voltage Withstand IEC60255-5:1977

9.4.1 Dielectric Withstand

2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals and case earth.

2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals of independent circuits,including contact circuits.

1.5kVrms for one minute across dedicated normally open contacts of output relays.

1.0kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of changeover pairs andwatchdog outputs.

9.4.2 Impulse

The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5kV peak, 1.2/50�s, 0.5Jacross:

� Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independentcircuit connected together.

� Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connectedtogether.

� Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts.

9.4.3 Insulation Resistance

The insulation resistance is greater than 100 M�.


Page 26/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

10. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE

The product complies with the following specifications :

10.1 Electrical environment

10.1.1 DC Supply Interruptions IEC60255-11:1979

The product will withstand a 20ms interruption in the auxiliary voltage in its quiescentcondition.

10.1.2 AC Ripple on DC Supply IEC60255-11:1979

The product will operate with 12% AC ripple on the DC auxiliary supply without anyadditional measurement errors.

10.1.3 Disturbances on AC Supply - EN61000 - 4 - 11 :1994

The products satisfies the requirements of EN61000 - 4 - 11 for voltage dips andshort interruptions.

10.1.4 High Frequency Disturbance IEC60255-22-1:1988

The product complies with Class III 2.5kV common mode and 1kV differential modefor 2 seconds at 1MHz with 200� source impedance, without any mal-operations oradditional measurement errors.

10.1.5 Fast Transient IEC60255-22-4:1992 & IEC60801-4:1988

The product complies with all classes up to and including class IV/ Level 4 4kVwithout any mal-operations or additional measurement errors.

Fast transient disturbances on powersupply (common mode only)

4kV, 5ns rise time, 50ns decay time, 5kHzrepetition time, 15ms burst, repeated every300ms for 1min in each polarity, with a 50�source impedance.

Fast transient disturbances on I/Osignal, data and control lines(common mode only)

2kV, 5ns rise time, 50ns decay time, 5kHzrepetition time, 15ms burst, repeated every300ms for 1min in each polarity, with a 50�source impedance.

10.1.6 Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2:1989 & IEC60801-2:1991

The product will withstand application of all discharge levels up to the followingwithout mal-operation:

Class IV� 15kV discharge in air to the user interface, display and exposed metalwork.

Class III� 8kV discharge in air to all communication ports.

Level 3�6kV point contact discharge to any part of the front of the product.

without any mal-operations.


10.1.7 Conducted Emissions EN 55011:1991

Group 1 Class A limits.

0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dB�V (quasi peak) 66dB�V (average).

0.5 - 30MHz, 73dB�V (quasi peak) 60dB�V (average).

10.1.8 Radiated Emissions EN 55011:1991

Group 1 Class A limits.

30 - 230MHz, 40dB�V/m at 10m measurement distance.

230 - 1000MHz, 47dB�V/m at 10m measurement distance.

10.1.9 Radiated Immunity IEC60255-22-3:1989 & IEC60801-3:1984

Class/Level III/3 - 10V/m @ 1kHz 80% am., 20MHz to 1GHz.

10.1.10 Conducted Immunity ENV50141:1993

Class/Level III/3 - 10Vrms @ 1kHz 80% am.- 0.15 to 80MHz.

10.1.11 Surge Immunity IEC61000-4-5:1995

Level 3 - 2kV common mode 1kV differential mode

10.1.12 EMC Compliance

Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC on EMC is claimedvia the Technical Construction File route.

Generic Standards EN 50081-2 :1994 and EN 50082-2 :1995 are used to establishconformity.


Page 28/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

10.1.13 Power Frequency Interference - Electricity Association (UK)

EA PAP Document, Environmental Test Requirements for Protection Relays andSystems Issue I, Draft 4.2.1 1995.

Class Length of commscircuit

UnbalancedComms V rms

Balanced Comms(Unbalance 1%)Vrms

Balanced Comms(Unbalance 0.1%)Vrms

1 1 to 10 metres 0.5 0.005 0.0005

2 10 to 100 metres 5 0.05 0.005

3 100 to 1000 metres 50 0.5 0.05

4 1000 to 10,000m or > 500 5 0.5

10.2 Atmospheric Environment

10.2.1 Temperature IEC60068-2-1:1990/IEC60068-2-2:1974

Storage and transit �40°C to +70°C.

Operating �25°C to +55°C.

10.2.2 Humidity IEC60068-2-3:1969

56 days at 93% relative humidity and 40°C.

10.2.3 Enclosure Protection IEC60529:1989

IP52 - Protected against dust and dripping water .

10.3 Mechanical Environment

10.3.1 Vibration IEC60255-21-1:1988

Vibration Response Class 2 - 1g

Vibration Endurance Class 2 - 2g.

10.3.2 Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2:1988

Shock response Class 2 - 10g

Shock withstand Class 1 - 15g

Bump Class 1 - 10g

10.3.3 Seismic IEC60255-21-3:1993

Class 2.


11. ANSI TEST REQUIREMENTS

The products shall meet the ANSI / IEEE requirements as follows :-

11.1 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1989

Standards for relays and relay systems associated with electric power apparatus.

11.2 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.1 : 1989

Surge withstand capability (SWC) tests for protective relays and relay systems :-

Oscillatory test - 1MHz to 1.5MHz, 2.5kV to 3.0kV,

Fast transient test 4kV to 5kV

11.3 ANSI / IEEE C37.90.2 : 1995

Standard for withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromagneticinterference from transceivers. 35V/m , 25 to 1000Mhz.

12. SAFETY

12.1 Low Voltage (safety and insulation) Directive

The product complies with the low voltage (safety/insulation) directive EN61010-1:1993.


Page 30/30 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P92x/EN FT/E11


User Guide

Technical Guide P92x/EN FT/E11User GuideMiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 1/110

CONTENT

1. PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS 5

2. INTRODUCTION TO THE USER INTERFACES AND SETTINGS OPTIONS 6

2.1 Menu structure 7

2.2 Password protection 7

2.3 Front Panel User Interface (Keypad and LCD) 7

2.3.1 Default Display and Menu Time-Out 8

2.3.2 Menu Navigation and Setting Browsing 8

2.3.3 Password Entry 8

2.3.4 Modification of password 9

2.3.5 Setting Changes 9

3. MENU COLUMNS OF THE MiCOM P921 RELAY 10



5.1 Menu sequence 15

6. MiCOM P921 - P922 AND P923 - GENERAL SETTINGS 16

6.1 �OP.PARAMETERS� menu 16

6.2 Additional menu for MiCOM P922-P923 17

7. RELAY CONFIGURATION 18

7.1 "GENERAL" sub-menu 19

7.1.1 Description 19

7.1.2 HMI description 20

7.2 "VT RATIO" sub-menu 20

7.3 LEDS 5 to 8 configuration 21

7.3.1 Information available for MiCOM P921, MiCOM P922 and MiCOM P923 21

7.3.2 Additional information for the MiCOM P922 - MiCOM P923 23

7.3.3 Additional information for MiCOM P923 25

7.3.4 Example of configuration 25

7.4 "CONFIG SELECT" sub-menu (only for MiCOM P922 and P923) 26

7.5 �ALARM� sub-menu 27


P92x/EN FT/E11 Technical GuideUser Guide

Page 2/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

7.6 �CONFIGURATION INPUTS� sub-menu 28


7.7 "FREQ. and df/dt CONFIG" submenu 29


8. MEASUREMENTS 30

8.1 Configuration 30

8.1.1 "3Vpn" configuration (3VTs "Phase-Neutral") 30

8.1.2 "3Vpp+Vr" configuration (3 "Phase-Phase" VTs + 1 residual VT) 30

8.1.3 "2Vpp+Vr" configuration (2 �Phase-Phase� VTs + 1 residual VT) 31

8.1.4 "3Vpn+Vr" configuration (3 "Phase-Neutral" VTs + 1 residual VT) 31

8.2 MiCOM P921, MiCOM P922 and MiCOM P923 : common measurements 32

8.3 Specific measurements for the MiCOM P922-MiCOM P923 33

8.3.1 Maximum and average values 33


9. COMMUNICATION 35

9.1 Rear communication port description 35

9.2 Rear and front communication management 35

9.2.1 Modification through the front panel 35

9.2.2 Modification through the MiCOM S1 software (front port, RS232) 35

9.2.3 Modification through the rear port (RS485) 35

9.3 HMI description 36

9.3.1 Courier Interface 36

9.3.2 Modbus interface 36

9.3.3 Additional menu for P922 and P923 37

9.3.4 IEC60870-5-103 interface 38

10. PROTECTIONS 39

10.1 Undervoltage protection 40



10.2 Overvoltage protection 41



10.3 Zero sequence overvoltage (neutral displacement) protection 44

10.4 Negative sequence overvoltage protection (MiCOM P922 and P923) 46

10.5 Positive sequence undervoltage protection (MiCOM P922 and P923) 47


10.6 Frequency protection (MiCOM P922 and P923) 48



10.7 Rate of change of frequency (MiCOM P923 only) 50


10.7.2 df/dt functionning 52

11. CONTROL FUNCTIONS 55

11.1 "TRIP OUTPUT RLY" Menu 55

11.1.1 MiCOM P921 - P922 and P923 : common information 56

11.1.2 Additional information for the MiCOM P922 � MiCOM P923 relay 57

11.1.3 Additional information for the MiCOM P923 relay 58

11.2 "LATCH OUTPUTS" Menu 58


11.2.2 MiCOM P921-MiCOM P922 and P923 : common information 59

11.2.3 Additional information for the MiCOM P922 and P923 relay 60

11.2.4 Additional information for the MiCOM P923 61


11.3 "BLOCKING LOG1 t" Menu 62


11.3.2 MiCOM P921-P922 and P923 : common information 62




11.4 "BLOCKING LOG2 t" Menu 64

11.5 "AUX OUTPUT RLY" Menu 65


11.5.2 MiCOM P921, MiCOM P922 and P923: common information 65


11.5.4 Additional information for MiCOM P923 only 69

11.6 "LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS" Menu 70


11.6.2 MiCOM P921, MiCOM P922 and P923 : common information 70

11.7 "AND LOGIC EQUATION" Menu 71


11.7.2 MiCOM P921 and MiCOM P922 : common information 71

11.7.3 Additional information for the MiCOM P922 relay 73

11.7.4 MiCOM P923 74



Page 4/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

11.8 "T DELAY EQUATION" Menu 79




11.9 "INPUTS" Menu 81


11.9.2 MiCOM P921 and MiCOM P922 : common information 82

11.9.3 Additional logic inputs for the MiCOM P922 and P923 relays 82

11.10 "CB SUPERVISION" Menu 83



12. RECORDS FUNCTIONS (ONLY MiCOM P922 AND P923) 85

12.1 "CB MONITORING" Menu 85

12.2 "FAULT RECORD" Menu 86

12.3 "DISTURB RECORDER" Menu 87



12.4 "TIME PEAK VALUE" Menu 88

12.5 "FREQ DISTURB REC" Menu (only MiCOM P923) 88


13. DISPLAY OF ALARMS 89

13.1.1 Electrical system alarms 89

13.1.2 "Relay" ALARMS 92


1. PRELIMINARY DEFINITIONS

In this manual, all the following definitions and notations will be used :

Vr Residual voltage = 3 x zero sequence voltage

V0 Zero sequence voltage

V1, V2 Positive and negative sequence voltages

VA, VB, VC Phase voltages

VAB, VBC, VCA Line voltages

Vn Rated voltage

VT Voltage transformer

DMT Definite minimum time

IDMT Inverse definite minimum time


Page 6/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

2. INTRODUCTION TO THE USER INTERFACES AND SETTINGS OPTIONS

The relay has three user interfaces:

� the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad.

� the front port which supports ModBus communication.

� the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, Modbus orIEC60870-5-103. The protocol for the rear port must be specified when the relayis ordered.

The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from thethree interfaces are summarised in Table 1 below.

Keypad/LCD Courier ModBus IEC60870

Display & modification ofall settings � � �

Digital I/O signal status � � � �

Display/extraction ofmeasurements � � � �

Display/extraction of faultrecords � � �

Display/extraction ofevent & alarm records � � � �

Extraction of disturbancerecords � � �

Programmable logicequations � � �

Reset of fault & alarmrecords � � � �

Clear event & faultrecords � � �

Time synchronisation � � �

Control commands � � �

TABLE 1 : ACCESSIBLE INFORMATION


2.1 Menu structure

Frequency

Date and time

3 phase voltage

Alarm messages

Other default displays

Column 1OP Parameters

Column 2Configuration

Column nProtection G1

Data 1.1Password

Sub-menu"General"

Sub-menu"UNDERVOLTAGE"

Other setting cells in column 1

P0398ENa

Other column headings

CC

Data 1.2Model n˚

Data 2.1Connection

Data n.2-V<=

Data n.n-V<<<

Data 1.nRelays status

Data 2.nDefault display

Other setting cells in column 2

Other setting cells in column n

FIGURE 1 : STRUCTURE MENU

The relay�s menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu isreferred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu is accessed by reference to a row andcolumn address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains relatedsettings. As shown in Figure 1, the top row of each column contains the headingwhich describes the settings contained within that column. Movement between thecolumns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level.

2.2 Password protection

The password is 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default for the passwordis AAAA. The password is user-changeable once it has been correctly entered. Entryof the password is achieved either by a prompt when a setting change is attempted,or by moving to the �Password� cell in the �OP. PARAMETERS� column of the menu. Ifthe password is lost, an emergency password can be supplied � contact AREVA withthe relay�s serial number.

2.3 Front Panel User Interface (Keypad and LCD)

When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay,with the information displayed on the LCD.

The �, �, � and � keys are used for menu navigation and setting value changes.


Page 8/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

2.3.1 Default Display and Menu Time-Out

The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out andreturn to the default display and turn the LCD back-light off after 5 minutes of keypadinactivity.

The default display can be choosen from the following options :

� 3 phase or line voltages,

� zero-sequence voltage,

� positive or negative voltage (P922-P923 only),

� frequency (P922-P923 only).

Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record,protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will be replaced by:

Alarms

Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is notaffected if the display is showing the �Alarms present� message.

2.3.2 Menu Navigation and Setting Browsing

The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown infigure 1. Thus, starting at the default display the � key will display the first columnheading. To select the required column heading use the � and � keys. The settingdata contained in the column can then be viewed by using the � and � keys. It isonly possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to thedefault display press the � key from any of the column headings.

2.3.3 Password Entry

When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear:

Password =

AAAA

A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed.Press the � and � keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move betweenthe character fields of the password, use the � and � keys. The password is confirmedby pressing the enter key �. To escape from this prompt press the clear key �.Alternatively, the password can be entered using the �Password� cell of the�OP.PARAMETERS� column.


If the password is correct, the following message will appear :

Password OK

The �P� letter appears on the right hand side of the display :

[27] Undervoltage

P

After 5 s, the display reverts to the previous display.

2.3.4 Modification of password

To modify the password, select the line �Password� in the �OP PARAMETERS� menu.Enter the previous password and press � key. Enter the new password and press the� key.

2.3.5 Setting Changes

To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell.To change the cell value press the enter key �, which will bring up a flashing cursoron the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if theappropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a passwordwill appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the � or � keys.When the desired new value has been reached it is confirmed as the new settingvalue by pressing �. This new value is immediately taken into account.

If the user wishes not to take into account the new value, then press the � key. Thefollowing message will then appear :

Upgrade Cancel


Page 10/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

3. MENU COLUMNS OF THE MiCOM P921 RELAY

The menu of the MiCOM P921 is divided into columns which are:

HEADINGS OFCOLUMN

SUB � MENUS DESCRIPTION See atPAGE

OP PARAMETERS General settings and data for the relay 16

CONFIGURATION 18

GENERAL Configuration of the default display, of theconnection and of the protection (phase-phase or phase-neutral)

19

VT RATIO Settings of the primary and secondary ratedvoltages of VTs

20

LED LED 5 toLED 8

Configuration of the programmable LEDs 21

ALARMS Configuration of the instantaneous selfreset.

27

CONFIGURATIONINPUTS

Logic input configuration, selection ofvoltage type applied to the logic inputs

28

MEASUREMENTS Directly measured and calculated quantities 30

COMMUNICATION Information on the rear active protocol andchoice of the associated settings

35

PROTECTION Configuration of the protective features 39

[27]UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage settings 40

[59]OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltages settings 41

[59N]RESIDUAL O/V Residual O/V settings 44

AUTOMAT. CTRL 55

TRIP OUTPUT RLY Allocation of the selected information to thetrip output contact (RLI)

55

LATCH OUTPUTS Selection of the latched information 58

BLOCKING LOG1 t Allocation of the selected information to theblocking logic function 1

62

BLOCKING LOG2 t Allocation of the selected information to theblocking logic function 2

64

AUX OUTPUT RLY Allocation of the selected information to theauxiliary output contacts (RL2 to RL4)

65

LATCH OUTPUTRELAYS

Selection of latched output relays 70

AND LOGIC EQUAT Definition of the 2 logic equations (AND) 71

T DELAY EQUATION Definition of the associated timers 79

INPUTS Allocation of the selected information to thelogic inputs

81

CB SUPERVISION Settings of the close and open pulsecommands

83




HEADINGS OFCOLUMN



CONFIGURATION 18


19

VT RATIO Settings of the primary and secondaryrated voltages of VTs

20

LED LED 5 toLED 8


CONFIG SELECT Selection of the active settings group 26

ALARMS Configuration of the instantaneous selfreset, alarm battery.

27

CONFIGURATIONINPUTS


28

MEASUREMENTS Directly measured and calculatedquantities

30


35

PROTECTION G1 Configuration of the protective features �Group 1

39




[47]NEG SEQ O/V Negative sequence overvoltage settings 46

[27D]POS SEQ O/V Positive sequence undervoltage settings 47

[81]FREQUENCY Under/over frequency settings 48

PROTECTION G2 Configuration of the protective features �Group 2 (identical to Group 1)

39

AUTOMAT. CTRL 55

TRIP OUTPUT RLY Allocation of the selected information tothe trip output contact (RLI)

55


BLOCKING LOG1 t Allocation of the selected information tothe blocking logic function 1

62


64

AUX OUTPUT RLY Allocation of the selected information tothe auxiliary output contacts (RL2 to RL8)

65


Page 12/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

HEADINGS OFCOLUMN


LATCH OUTPUTRELAYS


AND LOGIC EQUAT Definition of the 2 logic equations 71


INPUTS Allocation of the selected information tothe logic inputs

81

CB SUPERVISION Settings related to the CB supervision :- open/close pulse commands,- maximum authorised time for the

opening/closing of the CB,- maximum number of operations

83

RECORDS 85

CB MONITORING Records and diagnosis on the CB 85

FAULT RECORD Display of the last 5 faults 86

DISTURB RECORDER Disturbance recorder settings 87

TIME PEAK VALUE Time period for the average and peakdemands

88




HEADINGS OFCOLUMN



CONFIGURATION 18


19

VT RATIO Settings of the primary and secondaryrated voltages of VTs

20

LED LED 5 toLED 8


CONFIG SELECT Selection of the active settings group 26

FREQ. and df/dtCONFIG

Selection of number of cycle, validationnumber for protection operation,configuration of undervoltage blocking

29

ALARMS Configuration of the instantaneous selfreset, alarm battery.

27

CONFIGURATIONINPUTS


28

MEASUREMENTS Directly measured and calculatedquantities

30


35

PROTECTION G1 Configuration of the protective features �Group 1

39




[47]NEG SEQ O/V Negative sequence overvoltage settings 46

[27D]POS SEQ O/V Positive sequence undervoltage settings 47

[81]FREQUENCY Under/over frequency settings 48

[81R] FREQ CHANGEOF RATE

Rate of change of frequency settings 50

PROTECTION G2 Configuration of the protective features �Group 2 (identical to Group 1)

39

AUTOMAT. CTRL 55

TRIP OUTPUT RLY Allocation of the selected information tothe trip output contact (RLI)

55



Page 14/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

HEADINGS OFCOLUMN



62


64

AUX OUTPUT RLY Allocation of the selected information tothe auxiliary output contacts (RL2 to RL8)

65

LATCH OUTPUTRELAYS


AND LOGIC EQUAT Definition of the 4 logic equations 71


INPUTS Allocation of the selected information tothe logic inputs

81

CB SUPERVISION Settings related to the CB supervision :- open/close pulse commands,- maximum authorised time for the

opening/closing of the CB,- maximum number of operations

83

RECORDS 85

CB MONITORING Records and diagnosis on the CB 85

FAULT RECORD Display of the last 5 faults 86

DISTURB RECORDER Disturbance recorder settings 87

TIME PEAK VALUE Time period for the average and peakdemands

88

FREQ. DISTURB REC Frequency disturbance settings 88


5.1 Menu sequence

P922 P921 P923

OP PARAMETERS � OP PARAMETERS � OP PARAMETERS �

CONFIGURATION � � CONFIGURATION � � CONFIGURATION � �

GENERAL � � � GENERAL � � � GENERAL � � �

VT RATIO � � � � VT RATIO � � � � VT RATIO � � � �

LED � � � 2x� LED � � � 2x� LED � � � 2x�

CONFIG SELECT � � � 3x� CONFIG SELECT � � � 3x�


� � � 4x�

ALARMS � � � 4x� ALARMS � � � 3x� ALARMS � � � 5x�

CONFIGURATIONINPUTS

� � � 5x� CONFIGURATIONINPUTS


� � � �

MEASUREMENTS � 2x� MEASUREMENTS � 2x� MEASUREMENTS � 2x�

COMMUNICATION � 3x� COMMUNICATION � 3x� COMMUNICATION � 3x�

PROTECTION G1 � 4x� PROTECTION � 4x� PROTECTION G1 � 4x�

PROTECTION G2 � 5x� PROTECTION G2 � 5x�

AUTOMAT. CTRL � 6x� AUTOMAT. CTRL � 5x� AUTOMAT. CTRL � 6x�

TRIP OUTPUT RLY � 6x� � TRIP OUTPUT RLY � 5x� � TRIP OUTPUT RLY � 6x� �

LATCH OUTPUTS � 6x� � � LATCH OUTPUTS � 5x� � � LATCH OUTPUTS � 6x� � �

BLOCKING LOG1 t � 6x� � 2x� BLOCKING LOG1 t � 5x� � 2x� BLOCKING LOG1 t � 6x� � 2x�


AUX OUTPUT RLY � 6x� � 4x� AUX OUTPUT RLY � 5x� � 4x� AUX OUTPUT RLY � 6x� � 4x�

LATCH OUTPUTRELAYS

� 6x� � 5x� LATCH OUTPUTRELAYS


� 6x� � 5x�

AND LOGICEQUAT

� 6x� � 6x� AND LOGICEQUAT


� 6x� � 6x�

T DELAYEQUATION

� 6x� � 7x� T DELAYEQUATION


� 6x� � 7x�

INPUTS � 6x� � 8x� INPUTS � 5x� � 8x� INPUTS � 6x� � 8x�

CB SUPERVISION � 6x� � 9x� CB SUPERVISION � 5x� � 9x� CB SUPERVISION � 6x� � 9x�

RECORDS � 6x� � � RECORDS � 6x� � �


Page 16/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

6. MiCOM P921 - P922 AND P923 - GENERAL SETTINGS

To gain access to the �OP.PARAMATERS� menu from the default display, press the �key once.

6.1 �OP.PARAMETERS� menu

OP PARAMETERS Heading of the �OP.PARAMETERS� menu

PASSWORD=

****

Description : Enter the password to access the settings menus.Range : 4 characters. See paragraph 2.3.3 and 2.3.4 foradditional information.

DESCRIPTION=

P921- -

Description : Product descriptionRange : no modifications allowed, display only.

REFERENCE=

ALST

Description : Plant reference � User programmable textRange : 4 characters

SOFTWARE VERSION

1.A

Description : Software reference for the productRange : no modifications allowed, display only.

FREQUENCY=

50 Hz

Description : Default sampling frequency � must be set topower system frequency.Range : 50 Hz or 60 Hz

INPUTS : 54321

00000

Description : Indicates the current status of all the logic inputs :from 1 to 2 (MiCOM P921), from 1 to 5 (MiCOM P922 andP923).Range : no modifications allowed, display only.Note : state=0 => input deenergised, state=1 => inputenergised

OUTPUTS : 87654321

00000000

Description : Indicates the current status of all the output relaydrives : from1 to 4 (MiCOM P921), from 1 to 8 (MiCOM P922and P923)Range : no modifications allowed, display only.Note : state=0 => output inactive, state=1 => output active

WARNING ! AS SOON AS THE PASSWORD HAS BEEN ENTERED, NO SETTINGSCHANGES BY USING THE COMMUNICATION LINK (RS485 OR RS232)CAN BE ACCEPTED.


6.2 Additional menu for MiCOM P922-P923

This menu allows the settings of the date and time of the MiCOM P922-P923, so thatall the records (events, faults and disturbance) can be correctly time/date stamped.The internal time clock accuracy is 1ms.

If the relay is integrated into a control-command system, the RS485 serial link can beused to realise the time synchronisation.

Note that this information must be checked and corrected periodically eithermanually or via the remote communication link.

This menu allows also the display of the actual active group (from firmware V4).

DATE

28/03/00

Description : setting of the current dateRange : 1-31 for days, 1-12 for months, 0-99 for yearsNote : default date = 01/01/94

TIME

23:03:10

Description : setting of the current timeRange : 0-23 for hours, 0-59 for minutes and seconds.

ACTIVE GROUP =

1

Description : display of the actual active groupRange : no modification allowed, display only.

NOTE : during the settings, if one of the data exceeds the minimum ormaximum value, then the following message will appear :

INCORRECT

DATA

And the modifications are not taken into account.


Page 18/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

7. RELAY CONFIGURATION

The �CONFIGURATION� menu makes it possible to configure the protection and theconnection which is used, and the VTs ratio. The allocation of the information to the 4programmable LEDS, the alarm configuration and the input configuration are alsodone via this menu.

To gain access to the �CONFIGURATION� menu from the default display, press �once and � once.

The accessible sub-menus are indicated below :

� MiCOM P921 :

CONFIGURATION

� �

GENERAL � VT RATIO � LED � ALARM � CONFIGURATION

� � � � INPUT

� �

LED 5 CONF. � LED 6 CONF. �

V<= NO � V<= NO �

� MiCOM P922 :

CONFIGURATION

� �

GENERAL � VT RATIO � LED � GROUP SELECT �

� � � �

� �


V<= NO � V<= NO �

CONFIGURATION

�

ALARMS � CONFIGURATION

� INPUTS


� MiCOM P923 :

CONFIGURATION

� �

GENERAL � VT RATIO � LED � GROUP SELECT �

� � � �

� �


V<= NO � V<= NO �

CONFIGURATION

�

FREQ. and df/dt � ALARMS � CONFIGURATION

CONFIG � � INPUTS

7.1 "GENERAL" sub-menu

7.1.1 Description

In this menu, the user may select the connection used, the type of voltage protectionand the default display.

� "Phase � Neutral" protection : the analogue input data, which will be comparedto the stages, are then the phase voltages VA, VB and VC. Select �PROT P-N� inthe menu.

� "Phase � Phase" protection : the analogue input data, which will be comparedto the stages, are then the line voltages Vab, Vbc and Vca (calculated ormeasured data according to the connection scheme). Select �PROT P-P� in themenu.


Page 20/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

7.1.2 HMI description

To gain access to the �GENERAL� menu from the default display, press once, once and once.

This sub-menu is common to the MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays :

GENERAL Heading of the �GENERAL� sub-menu

CONNECTION

3 Vpn

Description : Mode of connection for the VTs:Range : 3Vpn = 3 Phase-Neutral VTs connection

3Vpp+Vr = 3 Phase-Phase VTs + Residual VT connection2Vpp+Vr = 2 Phase-Phase VTs + Residual VT connection3Vpn+Vr = 3 Phase-Neutral VTs + Residual VT connection

PROTECTION

PROT P-P

Description : selection of the voltage protection typeRange : PROT P-P / PROT P-NNote : this message only seen if "3Vpn" or "3Vpn+Vr"connection selected

DEFAULT DISPLAY

Rms VA

Description : definition of the default display.Range : VA/VB/VC/V0 if "3Vpn" or

"3Vpn+Vr"connectionVab/Vbc/Vca/V0 if "3Vpp+Vr" connectionVab/Vbc/V0 if "2Vpp+Vr" connection

Note : in the MiCOM P922 and P923, frequency, V1 and V2can also be selected

Please refer to chapter 2 of this Technical Guide for the complete description of theconnection schemes.

7.2 "VT RATIO" sub-menu

To gain access to the �VT RATIO� menu from the default display, press once, once, once and once.

This menu is common to the MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays. It makes itpossible to configure the VT ratios.

VT RATIO Heading of the �VT RATIO� sub-menu

MAIN VT PRIMARY

20.00 kV

Description : Primary of the voltage transformer(s) feeding therelayRange : 0.1-100kV, step =0.01kV (for the �57-130V�

model)220-480V, step=10V (for the �220-480V� model)

MAIN VT SEC�Y

100 V

Description : Secondary of the voltage transformer(s) feedingthe relayRange : 57-130V, step=0,1V (for the �57-130V� model)Note : no VT secondary voltage for the �220-480V� model


E/Gnd VT PRIMARY

20.00 kV

Description : Primary of the residual voltage transformer (ifconfigured)Range : 0.1-100kV, step =0.01kV (for the �57-130V�

model)220-480V, step=10V (for the �220-480V� model)

Note : this message only seen if "3Vpn+Vr", "3Vpp+Vr" or"2Vpp+Vr" connection selected

E/Gnd VT SEC�Y

100 V

Description : Secondary of the residual voltage transformer (ifconfigured)Range : 57-130V, step=0.1V (for the �57-130V� model)Note : this message only seen if "3Vpn+Vr", "3Vpp+Vr" or"2Vpp+Vr" connection selectedNo VT secondary voltage for the �220-480V� model

7.3 LEDS 5 to 8 configuration

In this menu, the programmable LEDs (5 to 8) can be assigned to specificinformation.

The available information is indicated in the table below : for each information, oneof the 4 programmable LED can be selected. The configuration of the LED N°5 only isdescribed in this document, the configuration of the LED 6,7 and 8 is done by thesame way.

To gain access to the �LED� menu from the default display, press once, once, once and twice.

7.3.1 Information available for MiCOM P921, MiCOM P922 and MiCOM P923

LED Heading of the �LED� sub-menu

LED 5 CONF.

V< = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information "V<"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV< = NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information "tV<"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

V<< = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information "V<<"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV<<= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information "tV<<"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

V<<<= NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"V<<<"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV<<<= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information"tV<<<"Range : YES/NO


Page 22/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

LED 5 CONF.

V> = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information "V>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV> = NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information "tV>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

V>> = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information "V>>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV>>= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information "tV>>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

V>>>= NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"V>>>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV>>>= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information"tV>>>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

V0> = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information "V0>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV0>= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information "tV0>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

V0>>= NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"V0>>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV0>>= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information"tV0>>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

V0>>>= NO

Description : selection of the instantaneousinformation"V0>>>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV0>>>= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayedinformation"tV0>>>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tAUX1= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information"tAUX1"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tAUX2= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information"tAUX2"Range : YES/NO


7.3.2 Additional information for the MiCOM P922 - MiCOM P923

LED 5 CONF.

V2> = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"V2>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV2>= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information"tV2>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

V2>>= NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"V2>>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV2>>= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information"tV2>>"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

V1< = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"V1<"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV1<= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information"tV1<"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

V1<<= NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"V1<<"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tV1<<= NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information"tV1<<"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

F1 = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"F1" (1er

frequency stage)Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

tF1 = NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information"tF1"Range : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

F2 = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"F2" (2nd


LED 5 CONF.

tF2 = NO


LED 5 CONF.

F3 = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"F3" (3rd


LED 5 CONF.

tF3 = NO



Page 24/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

LED 5 CONF.

F4 = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"F4" (4th


LED 5 CONF.

tF4 = NO


LED 5 CONF.

F5 = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"F5"(5th


LED 5 CONF.

tF5 = NO


LED 5 CONF.

F6 = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneous information"F6" (6th


LED 5 CONF.

tF6 = NO


LED 5 CONF. F OUT

OF R = NO

Description : selection of the instantaneousinformation"Frequency out of range"Range : YES/NO


7.3.3 Additional information for MiCOM P923

LED 5 CONF.

df/dt1= NO

Description : selection of the 1st rate of change of frequencyelementRange : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

df/dt2= NO

Description : selection of the 2nd rate of change of frequencyelementRange : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

df/dt3= NO

Description : selection of the 3rd rate of change of frequencyelementRange : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

df/dt4= NO

Description : selection of the 4th rate of change of frequencyelementRange : YES/NO

LED 5 CONF.

df/dt5= NO


LED 5 CONF.

df/dt6= NO


7.3.4 Example of configuration

The aim is :

The LED5 shall be on if the auxiliary input AUX1 is energised.

Settings :

� Go into the �AUTOMAT.CTRL� menu, �INPUTS� sub-menu (§ 11.9) and assignthe �AUX1� information to one of the inputs.

� In the �LED5� menu, which is describes above, select �YES� in front of the�tAUX1� information.


Page 26/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

7.4 "CONFIG SELECT" sub-menu (only for MiCOM P922 and P923)

This menu allows the user to select the active setting group (1or 2). By default, theactive setting group is �GROUP 1�.

A digital input configured �CHANG SET� can operate either on edge or on level.When the user chooses the �LEVEL�, then the change of setting group is onlyauthorized by a logic input (no possibility to change the group neither from rear portnor from front panel).With this mode (LEVEL) and when the digital input is configured on high level (see�CONFIGURATION� menu/�CONFIGURATION INPUTS� § 7.6) so we have :

low level = GROUP 1high level = GROUP 2

If the user wants to change the setting group with either remote command or fromfront panel, he must choose to operate with �EDGE� mode.

Starting from firmware Version 4, the Active Group will be displayed (read modeonly) in the "OP PARAMETER" menu.

The change of the active setting group can also be done via a remote commandthrough the communication link (refer to chapter 6 of this Technical Guide).

To gain access to the �CONFIG SELECT� menu from the default display, press �once, � once, � once and � 3 times.

CONFIG SELECT Heading of the �GROUP SELECT� sub-menu

CHANGE GROUP

INPUT EDGE

Description : selection of mode of changing the active groupRange : EDGE/LEVEL

SETTING GROUP

1

Description : selection of the active setting groupRange : 1 or 2Note : this message only seen if �CHANGE GROUP INPUT� isselected with option �EDGE�.


7.5 �ALARM� sub-menu

This menu allows the user to select the reset mode of the instantaneous informationsand to configure the battery alarms.

To gain access to the "ALARMS" menu from the default display, press � once, �once, � once and � 3 times (P921) or 4 times (P922) or 5 times (P923).


ALARMS Heading of "ALARMS" submenu.

INST. SELF-RESET ?

NO

Description : display the RESET mode of the instantaneousalarms.Range : YES/NONote : if choosing YES, the instantaneous alarms will bereset automatically (self-reset).If choosing NO, the reset will be done manually.

ALARMS BATTERY =

NO

Description : displays the ALARM battery messageRange : YES/NONote : the messages are : "RAM ERROR" or "BATTERY FAIL"in case of Ram error and battery failure.


Page 28/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

7.6 �CONFIGURATION INPUTS� sub-menu

This menu allows the user to configure the operation of the logic inputs ; either onfalling edge/low level or on rising edge/high level. When selecting 1, the logic inputbecomes active when it is excited or energized, and inactive when it is de-energized.This menu allows also the selection of the type of the auxiliary voltage signal to beapplied to the logic inputs.

To gain access to the "CONFIGURATION INPUTS" menu from the default display,press � once, � once, � once and � 4 times (P921) or 5 times (P922) or 6 times(P923).


CONFIGURATION

INPUTS

Heading of "CONFIGURATION INPUT

� MiCOM P921

INPUTS : 21

11

Description : configuration of the all logic inputsRange : 0 or 1

� MiCOM P922 P923

INPUTS : 54321

11111

Description : configuration of the all logic inputsRange : 0 or 1

VOLTAGE INPUTS =

DC

Description : selection of the type of the input voltage appliedto the logic inputs.Range : DC or AC

NOTE : with version V4 software and V3 hardware, the setting of theVOLTAGE INPUT should be DC.


7.7 "FREQ. and df/dt CONFIG" submenu

Additional menu for MiCOM P923 only.

This menu allows the user to select the number of cycle to be involved in thecalculation of the rate of change of frequency elements, and the number ofconfirmation of calculation for positionning the protection.

In fact, the instantaneous element is positionned after exceeding the threshold for aprogrammable number of df/dt function calculation.

This number of confirmation is 2 or 4.

In addition, it allows the configuration of the undervoltage blocking element.

When the input voltage value is unsufficient this will lead to irregular behavior and itis imaginable that the frequency elements could mal operate.

This is important during line energization, de-energization or a generatoracceleration where significant distortion can be experienced. To prevent the maloperation, all the frequency elements and related thresholds are blocked by mean ofan adjustable U/V blocking function.

To gain access to this menu from the default display, press � once, � once,� onceand � 4 times.


FREQ. and df/dt

CONFIG

Heading of "FREQ. and df/dt CONFIG" submenu.

df/dt : CYCLE NB =

1

Description : define the total number of fintegration timeinvolved for calculation of the rate of change of frequencyRange : 1 � 200 step of 1

df/dt : VALIDAT.

NB = 4

Description : validation number for protection operationRange : 2 or 4

PROTECTION

BLOCK = 20.0 V

Description : U/V threshold for blocking frequency elementsRange : 5V to 130V, step of 0.1V (for the "57-130V" model)

20V to 240V, step of 0.1V (for the "220-480V" model)

NOTE : This threshold is independent of the undervoltage threshold inthe "PROTECTION MENUS". It uses the analogic input voltagesdelivered for the calculation and measurement of the frequency.It never uses the line to line voltage.


Page 30/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

8. MEASUREMENTS

All measured quantities are displayed in primary values (true RMS values, up to the10th harmonic). They are refreshed once per second.

8.1 Configuration

According to the connection scheme, which is selected, the phase or line voltages willbe measured and then displayed.

8.1.1 "3Vpn" configuration (3VTs "Phase-Neutral")

The 3 phase voltages VA, VB and VC will be measured by the MiCOM relay.

The derived quantities are the symetrical components of the voltage : zero-sequencevoltage (V0), positive and negative sequences voltages (V1 and V2 for MiCOM P922and P923).

)VC²aVBaVA(3/11V �� with a = e j2�/3

)VCaVB²aVA(3/12V ��

)VCVBVA(3/10V ��

If the protection mode is �Phase-Phase�, the line voltages Vab, Vbc and Vca will beused in the protection algorithms. These line voltages are derived from the formulasbelow :

)VAVB(VAB ��

)VBVC(VBC ��

)VCVA(VCA ��

8.1.2 "3Vpp+Vr" configuration (3 "Phase-Phase" VTs + 1 residual VT)

The 3 line voltages Vab, Vbc, Vca and the residual voltage Vr are then measured bythe MiCOM relay.

The derived quantities are : positive and negative sequences voltages (V1 and V2,only for MiCOM P922 and P923) :

)VBC)a21()1a(

UAB(3/11V�

�

�� with a = e j2�/3

)VBC)a21()a2(

UAB(3/12V�

�

��

The only protection mode, which is available in this configuration, is the "Phase-Phase" mode.


8.1.3 "2Vpp+Vr" configuration (2 �Phase-Phase� VTs + 1 residual VT)

The 2 line voltages Vab, Vbc and the residual voltage Vr are then measured by theMiCOM relay.

The derived quantities are : positive and negative sequences voltages (V1 and V2,only for MiCOM P922 and p923), and the Vca line voltage.

)VBC)a21()1a(

VAB(3/11V�

�

�� with a = e j2�/3

)VBC)a21()a2(

VAB(3/12V�

�

��

)VBCVAB(VCA ��

The only protection mode, which is available in this configuration, is the "Phase-Phase" mode.

8.1.4 "3Vpn+Vr" configuration (3 "Phase-Neutral" VTs + 1 residual VT)

The 3 phase voltages VA, VB, VC and the residual voltage Vr will be measured by theMiCOM relay.

The derived quantities are : positive and negative sequences voltages (V1 and V2,only for MiCOM P922 and p923).

)VC²aVBaVA(3/11V �� with a = e j2�/3

)VCaVB²aVA(3/12V ��

If the protection mode is �Phase-Phase�, the line voltages Vab, Vbc and Vca will beused in the protection algorithms. These line voltages are derived from the formulasbelow :

)VAVB(VAB ��

)VBVC(VBC ��

)VCVA(VCA ��

Please refer to the chapter P92x/EN CO of this Technical Guide, in which all theconnection schemes are indicated.


Page 32/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

8.2 MiCOM P921, MiCOM P922 and MiCOM P923 : common measurements

To gain access to the �MEASUREMENTS� menu from the default display, press �once and � twice.

The measured quantities only will be displayed in this menu.

MEASUREMENTS Heading of the �MEASUREMENTS� menu

VA =

0.00 V

Description : True RMS measured phase A voltageNote : this message only seen if "3Vpn+Vr" or "3Vpn"connection selected

VB =

0.00 V

Description : True RMS measured phase B voltageNote : this message only seen if "3Vpn+Vr" or "3Vpn"connection selected

VC =

0.00 V

Description : True RMS measured phase C voltageNote : this message only seen if "3Vpn+Vr" or "3Vpn"connection selected

VAB =

0.00 V

Description : True RMS measured line Vab voltageNote : this message only seen if "3Vpp+Vr" or"2Vpp+Vr"connection

VBC =

0.00 V

Description : True RMS measured line Vbc voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpp+Vr" or"2Vpp+Vr"connection

VCA =

0.00 V

Description : True RMS measured line Vca voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpp+Vr" connection

V0 =

0.00 V

Description : True RMS measured zero-sequence voltage V0.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpp+Vr", "3Vpn+Vr","2Vpp+Vr" connection

FREQUENCY =

XX.XX Hz

Description : value of the network frequencyNote : if the measurement of the frequency is not possible, thedisplay will be XX.XX � The measurement is not possible if theinput voltage is less than 10% of the rated voltage


8.3 Specific measurements for the MiCOM P922-MiCOM P923

In this menu, all the derived quantities are displayed : positive and negative sequencevoltages, peak and rolling demands.

8.3.1 Maximum and average values

The maximum and average values are calculated over a defined period of time : thistime period for the calculation of the average values is defined in the �RECORDS�menu, �TIME PEAK VALUE� (see § 12.4).

These values are updated each 1s : a new calculation will be done as soon as theuser has reseted those values through the HMI (see the menu below), or through thelocal or remote communication.


V1 =

0.00 V

Description : Magnitude of the calculated positive sequencevoltage V1

V2 =

0.00 V

Description : Magnitude of the calculated negative sequencevoltage V2

MAX & AVERAGE V

RST = [C]

Description : reset of the voltages average and maximumvalues (measured and derived quantities).

MAX. VA Rms =

0.00 V

Description : maximum value of the phase A voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpn" or "3Vpn+Vr"connection.

MAX. VB Rms =

0.00 V

Description : maximum value of the phase B voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpn" or "3Vpn+Vr"connection.

MAX. VC Rms =

0.00 V

Description : maximum value of the phase C voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpn" or "3Vpn+Vr"connection.

MAX. VAB Rms =

0.00 V

Description : maximum value of the line Vab voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpp+Vr" or "2Vpp+Vr"connection.

MAX. VBC Rms =

0.00 V

Description : maximum value of the line Vbc voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpp+Vr" or "2Vpp+Vr"connection.

MAX. VCA Rms =

0.00 V

Description : maximum value of the line Vca voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpp+Vr" connection.

AVERAGE VA Rms =

0.00 V

Description : average value of the phase A voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpn" or "3Vpn+Vr"connection.


Page 34/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

AVERAGE VB Rms =

0.00 V

Description : average value of the phase B voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpn" or "3Vpn+Vr"connection.

AVERAGE VC Rms =

0.00 V

Description : average value of the phase C voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpn" or "3Vpn+Vr"connection.

AVERAGE VAB Rms =

0.00 V

Description : average value of the line Vab voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpp+Vr" or "2Vpp+Vr"connection.

AVERAGE VBC Rms =

0.00 V

Description : average value of the line Vbc voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpp+Vr" or "2Vpp+Vr"connection.

AVERAGE VCA Rms =

0.00 V

Description : average value of the line Vca voltage.Note : this message only seen if "3Vpp+Vr" connection.


9. COMMUNICATION

9.1 Rear communication port description

The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector located onthe back of the relay.

The rear port provides RS485 serial data communication and is intended for use witha permanently-wired connection to a remote control centre. Of the three connections,two are for the signal connection which can be connected either way round, and theother is for the earth shield of the cable.

The rear RS485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connectionwhichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to32 relays can be �daisy chained� together using a simple twisted pair electricalconnection.

All the connections are described in details into the Chapter 2 of this TechnicalGuide.

9.2 Rear and front communication management

9.2.1 Modification through the front panel

If there is any modification of the settings done through the front panel, adownloading of a new settings file via the MiCOM S1 software (locally), or via aremote master station will be forbidden.

The change of settings will be possible as soon as the setting mode will elapse (at theend of the 5mn timer or after power off/power on of the relay).

9.2.2 Modification through the MiCOM S1 software (front port, RS232)

If there is any modification of the settings through the MiCOM S1 software, amodification through the front panel will be forbidden and the following message willappear :

Write lockout

9.2.3 Modification through the rear port (RS485)

If the user is trying to access simultaneously to the settings of the relay through theRS232 and RS485 communication ports, there will be no messages on the display ofthe MiCOM relay : the last modifications will be taken into account without anywarning.


Page 36/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

9.3 HMI description

The « COMMUNICATION » menu depends on the rear communication protocolwhich is implemented into the MiCOM relay. This protocol must be selected at theorder among the following protocols : Kbus/Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103.Please refer to the cortec page (Chapter 3 of this Technical Guide).

9.3.1 Courier Interface

Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&Dto allow remote interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier workson a master/slave basis where the slave units contain information in the form of adatabase, and respond with information from the database when it is requested by amaster unit.

The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit suchas MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T, ACCESS or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is aWindows 98 and NT compatible software package which is specifically designed forsetting changes with the relay.

To gain access to the �COMMUNICATION� menu from the default display, press �once and � 3 times. The HMI is described below :

COMMUNICATION Heading of the �COMMUNICATIONS� menu

COMMUNICATION ?

YES

Description : enable/disable the "COMMUNICATION" functionRange : YES/NO

RELAY ADDRESS

1

Description : selection of the Kbus address of the relayRange : 1 to 255.Note : message only seen if the communication has beenenabled

9.3.2 Modbus interface

Modbus is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for networkcontrol. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master deviceinitiating all actions and the slave devices (the relays) responding to the master bysupplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. Modbuscommunication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can beused over a distance of 1000m and up to 32 slave devices.




COMMUNICATION ?

YES

Description : selection of the function "COMMUNICATION"Range : YES/NO

BAUD RATE

19200 Bd

Description : selection of the baud rateRange : 300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400BaudsNote : message only seen if the communication has beenenabled

PARITY

NONE

Description : selection of the parityRange : NONE / EVEN / ODDNote : message only seen if the communication has beenenabled

STOP BITS

1

Description : selection of the stop bits numberRange : 1 or 2Note : message only seen if the communication has beenenabled

RELAY ADDRESS

1

Description : selection of the Modbus address of the relayRange : 1 to 255.Note : message only seen if the communication has beenenabled

9.3.3 Additional menu for P922 and P923

DATE FORMAT =

PRIVATE

Description : selection of the mode of the format of date forsynchronizationRange : PRIVATE or IEC


Page 38/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

9.3.4 IEC60870-5-103 interface

The IEC60870-5-103 interface is also a master/slave interface with the relay as theslave device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relayconforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported.



COMMUNICATION ?

YES

Description : enable/disable the "COMMUNICATION" functionRange : YES/NO

BAUD RATE

19200 Bd

Description : selection of the baud rateRange : 9600 or19200 BaudsNote : message only seen if the communication has beenenabled

RELAY ADDRESS

1

Description : selection of the IEC address of the relayRange : 1 to 255.Note : message only seen if the communication has beenenabled


10. PROTECTIONS

To gain access to the �PROTECTION� menu (or �PROTECTION G1� for MiCOMP922 and P923) from the default display, press once � and 4 times �.

The accessible sub-menus are then indicated below :

� MiCOM P921 :

PROTECTION

� �

[27]UNDERVOLTAGE � [59]OVERVOLTAGE � [59N]RESIDUAL O/V

� �

� MiCOM P922 :

PROTECTION G1

� �

[27]UNDERVOLTAGE � [59]OVERVOLTAGE � [59N]RESIDUAL O/V � [47] NEG SEQ O/V �

� � � �

PROTECTION G1

�

[27D] POS SEQ U/V � [81] FREQUENCY

�

� MiCOM P923 :

PROTECTION G1

� �

[27]UNDERVOLTAGE � [59]OVERVOLTAGE � [59N]RESIDUAL O/V � [47] NEG SEQ O/V �

� � � �

PROTECTION G1

�

[27D] POS SEQ U/V � [81] FREQUENCY � [81R]FREQ CHANGE

� � OF RATE


Page 40/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

10.1 Undervoltage protection

10.1.1 Description

This function can be configured according to the connection scheme of the VTs :phase-phase protection (delta connection) or phase-neutral protection (starconnection).

The configuration of this function can also be done in order to detect an absence ofvoltage for all phases :

� Undervoltage condition for one of the 3 phases (select OR for the consideredstage),

� Undervoltage condition for all 3 phases (select AND for the considered stage).

The settings of the voltage thresholds are done in secondary values.

The relay will trip according to an inverse characteristic or a definite timecharacteristic for the first stage and according to a definite time characteristic for thesecond and third stages.

The inverse characteristic is given by the following formula :

t = K / ( 1-M )

Where, K = Time Multiplier Setting

t = operating time in seconds

M = Applied input voltage / Relay setting voltage (Vs).


To gain access to the �UNDERVOLTAGE� sub-menu from the default display, press� once, � 4 times and � once.

[27] UNDERVOLTAGE Heading of the undervoltage sub-menu.

[27] V<=

NO

Description : configuration of the first undervoltage stageRange : NO / AND / ORNote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until « V<< » message.

[27] V<=

5.0 V

Description : setting of the first undervoltage stageRange : range 57-130V : 5-130V step = 0.1V

range 220-480V : 20-480V step = 0.5V

[27] DELAY TYPE =

DMT

Description : selection of the time delay characteristicRange : definite time (DMT) / inverse definite time (IDMT)

[27] TMS=

1.0

Description : time multiplier setting.Range : 0.5 � 100, step = 0.5Note : this message only seen if �IDMT� time delay selected

[27] tRESET V<=

10 ms

Description : reset time for the first undervoltage stageRange : 0 � 100s, step = 0.01sNote : this message only seen if �IDMT� time delay selected


[27] tV<=

40 ms

Description : time delay setting for a definite time curve.Range : 0 � 599s, step = 0.01sNote : this message only seen if �DMT� time delay selected

[27] V<<=

NO

Description : configuration of the 2nd undervoltage stageRange : NO / AND / ORNote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until « V<<< » message.

[27] V<<=

5.0 V

Description : setting of the 2nd undervoltage stageRange : range 57-130V : 5-130V step = 0.1V

range 220-480V : 20-480V step = 0.5V

[27] tV<<=

10 ms

Description : time delay setting for the definite time curve.Range : 0 � 599s, step = 0.01sNote : definite time delay only for this stage

[27] V<<<=

NO

Description : configuration of the 3rd undervoltage stageRange : NO / AND / ORNote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until the heading of the menu

[27] V<<<=

5.0 V

Description : setting of the 2nd undervoltage stageRange : range 57-130V : 5-130V step = 0.1V

range 220-480V : 20-480V step = 0.5V

[27] tV<<<=

10 ms


[27] HYSTERESIS =

1.02

Description : setting of the HYSTERESIS elementRange : 1.02 � 1.05 step of 0.01

10.2 Overvoltage protection

10.2.1 Description

This function can be configured according to the connection scheme of the VTs :phase-phase (delta connection) or phase-neutral protection (star connection).

For this overvoltage protection, the configuration can also be done in order to have :

� the highest voltage of each phase will be decisive : select OR for the consideredstage,

� each voltage for each phase must be higher than the settable stage : select ANDfor the considered stage.

The settings of the voltage thresholds are done in secondary values.

The relay will trip according to an inverse characteristic or a definite timecharacteristic for the first stage and according to a definite time characteristic for thesecond and third stage.


t = K / (M - 1)

Where, K = Time Multiplier Settingt = operating time in secondsM = Applied input voltage / Relay setting voltage (Vs).


Page 42/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


To gain access to the �OVERVOLTAGE� sub-menu from the default display, press �once, � 4 times, � once and � once.

[59] OVERVOLTAGE Heading of the �OVERVOLTAGE� menu

[59] V>=

NO

Description : configuration of the first overvoltage stageRange : NO / AND / ORNote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until « V>> » message.

[59] V>=

130.0 V

Description : setting of the first overvoltage stageRange : range 57-130V : 5-200V, step =0.1V

range 220-480V : 20-720V, step = 0.5V

[59] DELAY TYPE =

DMT


[59] TMS=

1.0


[59] tRESET V>=

10 ms

Description : reset time for the first overvoltage stageRange : 0 � 100s, step = 0,01sNote : this message only seen if �IDMT� time delay selected

[59] tV>=

40 ms


[59] V>>=

NO

Description : configuration of the 2nd overvoltage stageRange : NO / AND / ORNote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until « V>>> » message.

[59] V>>=

130.0 V

Description : setting of the 2nd overvoltage stageRange : range 57-130V : 5-260V, step =0.1V

range 220-480V : 20-960V, step = 0.5V

[59] tV>>=

40 ms


[59] V>>>=

NO

Description : configuration of the 3rd overvoltage stageRange : NO / AND / ORNote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until the heading of the sub-menu.

[59] V>>>=

130.0 V

Description : setting of the 3rd overvoltage stageRange : range 57-130V : 5-260V, step =0.1V

range 220-480V : 20-960V, step = 0.5V

[59] tV>>>=

40 ms



[59] HYSTERESIS =

0.98

Description : setting of the HYSTERESIS elementRange : 0.98 � 0.95 step of 0.01


Page 44/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

10.3 Zero sequence overvoltage (neutral displacement) protection

The zero sequence overvoltage element functions according to the VT configuration.

� VT configuration = 3Vpn + Vr, then the [59N] will operate based on the residualvoltage (due to the summation of the 3 phase voltages), measured on relayterminals (49-50).

� VT configuration = 3Vpn, then [59N] will operate based on the zero sequence

voltage U0= (Ua + Ub + Uc)

3 calculated internally.

The inverse characteristic (only for the 1st stage) is given by the following formula :

t = K / (1 � M)

Where, K = Time Multiplier Settingt = operating time in secondsM = Applied input voltage / Relay setting voltage (Vs)

To gain access to the �RESIDUAL O/V� sub-menu from the default display, press �once, � 4 times, � once and � twice.

[59N] RESIDUAL O/V Heading of the �RESIDUAL O/V� menu

[59N] V0>=

NO

Description : configuration of the 1st residual overvoltage stageRange : YES/NONote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until « V0>> » message.

[59N] V0>=

5.0 V

Description : setting of the 1st residual overvoltage stageRange : range 57-130V : 0.5-130V, step = 0.1V

range 220-480V : 2-480V, step = 0.5V

[59N] DELAY TYPE =

DMT


[59N] TMS=

1.0


[59N] tRESET V0>=

10 ms

Description : reset time for the first residual overvoltage stageRange : 0 � 100s, step = 0,01sNote : this message only seen if �IDMT� time delay selected

[59N] tV0>=

40 ms


[59N] V0>>=

NO

Description : configuration of the 2nd residual overvoltage stageRange : NO / AND / ORNote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until « V0>>> » message.

[59N] V0>>=

5.0 V

Description : setting of the 2nd residual overvoltage stageRange : range 57-130V : 0.5 � 130V, step =0,1V

range 220-480V : 2 � 480V, step = 0,5V


[59N] tV0>>=

40 ms

Description : time delay setting for a definite time curve.Range : 0 � 599s, step = 0.01sNote : definite time delay only for this stage

[59N] V0>>>=

NO

Description : configuration of the 3rd residual overvoltage stageRange : NO / AND / ORNote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until the heading of the sub-menu.

[59N] V0>>>=

5.0 V

Description : setting of the 2nd residual overvoltage stageRange : range 57-130V : 0.5 � 130V, step =0.1V

range 220-480V : 2 � 480V, step = 0.5V

[59N] tV0>>>=

40 ms

Description : time delay setting for a definite time curve.Range : 0 � 599s, step = 0.01sNote : definite time delay only for this stage


Page 46/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

10.4 Negative sequence overvoltage protection (MiCOM P922 and P923)

The relay will trip according to an inverse characteristic or a definite timecharacteristic for the first stage and according to a definite time characteristic for thesecond stage.


t = K / (M - 1)


To gain access to the �NEG SEQ O/V� sub-menu from the default display, press �once, � 4 times, � once and � 3 times.

[47] NEG SEQ O/V Heading of the �NEG.SEQ O/V� menu

[47] V2>=

NO

Description : configuration of the 1st stage(V2>)Range : YES/NONote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until « V2>> » message.

[47] V2>=

5.0 V

Description : setting of the 1st stageRange : range 57-130V : 5 � 200V, step = 0.1V

range 220-480V : 20 � 720V, step = 0.5V

[47] DELAY TYPE =

DMT


[47] TMS=

1.0


[47] tRESET V2>=

10 ms

Description : reset time for the first negative overvoltage stageRange : 0 � 100s, step = 0.01sNote : this message only seen if �IDMT� time delay selected

[47] tV2>=

40 ms


[47] V2>>=

NO

Description : configuration of the 2nd stage(V2>>)Range : YES/NONote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until the heading of the sub-menu.

[47] V2>>=

5.0 V

Description : setting of the 2nd stageRange : range 57-130V : 5 � 200V, step =0.1V

range 220-480V : 20 � 720V, step = 0.5V

[47] tV2>>=

40 ms



10.5 Positive sequence undervoltage protection (MiCOM P922 and P923)

The relay will trip according to an inverse characteristic or a definite timecharacteristic for the first stage and according to a definite time characteristic for thesecond stage.


t = K / (1 � M)


To gain access to the �POS SEQ U/V� sub-menu from the default display, press �once, � 4 times, � once and � 4 times.

[27D] POS SEQ U/V Heading of the �POS.SEQ U/V� menu

[27D] V1<=

NO

Description : configuration of the 1st stage(V1<«Range : YES/NONote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until « V1< » message.

[27D] V1<=

5.0 V

Description : setting of the 1st stageRange : range 57-130V : 5 � 130V, step = 0.1V

range 220-480V : 20 � 480V, step = 0.5V

[27D] DELAY TYPE =

DMT


[27D] TMS=

1.0


[27D] tRESET V1<=

10 ms

Description : reset time for the first positive undervoltage stageRange : 0 � 100s, step = 0.01sNote : this message only seen if �IDMT� time delay selected

[27D] tV1<=

40 ms


[27D] V1<<=

NO

Description : configuration of the 2nd stage(V1<<«Range : YES/NONote : if disabled (« NO » selected), all the following messagesare invisible, until the heading of the sub-menu.

[27D] V1<<=

5.0 V

Description : setting of the 2nd stageRange : range 57-130V : 5 � 130V, step =0.1V

range 220-480V : 20 � 480V, step = 0.5V

[27D] tV1<<=

40 ms



Page 48/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

10.6 Frequency protection (MiCOM P922 and P923)

10.6.1 Description

The principle of measurement of frequency is based in general on the measurementof time every cycle, thus a new measurement is started at each voltage zero crossing.Numerical filters are used to minimize the harmonics influence.

Precautions have been made to make this mode of calculation insensitive to thevector shifts and phases jumps.

This function will be inhibited if the voltage level for each phase is below the blockingminimum voltage. This voltage is settable (P923) in the CONFIGURATION menu (5to 130V for range 1 and 20 to 480V for range 2).

The information �Freq. Out Of Range� will be generated :

� in the above mentioned application,

� if the frequency is out of the range : fmeasured > fn+20Hz or fmeasured < fn�20Hzwith fn=50Hz or 60Hz according to the settings of the relay.


To gain access to the �FREQUENCY� sub-menu from the default display, press �once, � 4 times, � once and � once (P922) or � twice (P923).

[81] FREQUENCY Heading of the �FREQUENCY� sub-menu

[81] F1=

NO

Description : configuration of the 1er stageRange : NO / 81> / 81<

[81] F1=

50.0 Hz

Description : setting of the 1er stageRange : from "fn � 10Hz" to "fn + 10Hz"

[81] tF1=

0 ms

Description : time delay settingRange : from 0 to 599s, step = 0.01s

[81] F2=

NO

Description : configuration of the 2nd stageRange : NO / 81> / 81<

[81] F2=

50.0 Hz

Description : setting of the 2nd stageRange : from "fn � 10Hz" to "fn + 10Hz"

[81] tF2=

0 ms


[81] F3=

NO

Description : configuration of the 3rd stageRange : NO / 81> / 81<


[81] F3=

50.0 Hz

Description : setting of the 3rd stageRange : from "fn � 10Hz" to "fn + 10Hz"

[81] tF3=

0 ms


[81] F4=

NO

Description : configuration of the 4th stageRange : NO / 81> / 81<

[81] F4=

50.0 Hz

Description : setting of the 4th stageRange : from "fn � 10Hz" to "fn + 10Hz"

[81] tF4=

0 ms


[81] F5=

NO


[81] F5=

50.0 Hz


[81] tF5=

0 ms


[81] F6=

NO


[81] F6=

50.0 Hz


[81] tF6=

0 ms



Page 50/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

10.7 Rate of change of frequency (MiCOM P923 only)

The calculation of the rate of change of frequency is an average measurement of theinstantaneous values over a programmable number of cycles (1 to 200) ; refer to the"CONFIGURATION" menu. The instantaneous values of rate of change of frequencyare measured every cycle. The rate of change of frequency elements are veryimportant to detect any active power loss under severe disturbances : they can beused for load shedding schemes. These elements offer the possibility to detect thetendency of the variation of frequency, and thus re establish the correctload/generation without waiting for big frequency reduction. These elements could becombined to the frequency elements using the AND logic equations to provide a veryusefull mechanism allowing a more secure trip decision to be achieved duringtransient system disturbances.

This function will be inhibited if the voltage level for each phase is below the settableundervoltage blocking value (see menu "CONFIGURATION", sub-menu "FREQ anddf/dt CONFIG").

The information "freq out of range" will be generated :

� in the above mentioned application

� if the frequency is out of range : fmeasured > (fn+20Hz) or fmeasured < (fn�20Hz)

To gain access to this menu the default display,press � once, � 4 times, � once and� once.


[81R] FREQ CHANGE

OF RATE

Heading of the �Rate of change of Frequency� sub-menu

[81R] df/dt1 =

NO

Description : configuration of the 1er stageRange : YES/NO

[81R] df/dt1 =

1.0 Hzs

Description : setting of the 1er stageRange : [ � 10Hz/s to + 10Hz/s], step = 0.1

[81R] df/dt2 =

NO

Description : configuration of the 2nd stageRange : YES/NO

[81R] df/dt2 =

1.0 Hzs

Description : setting of the 2nd stageRange : [ � 10Hz/s to + 10Hz/s], step = 0.1

[81R] df/dt3 =

NO

Description : configuration of the 3rd stageRange : YES/NO

[81R] df/dt3 =

1.0 Hzs

Description : setting of the 3rd stageRange : [ � 10Hz/s to + 10Hz/s], step = 0.1


[81R] df/dt4 =

NO

Description : configuration of the 4th stageRange : YES/NO

[81R] df/dt4 =

1.0 Hzs

Description : setting of the 4th stageRange : [ � 10Hz/s to + 10Hz/s], step = 0.1

[81R] df/dt5 =

NO


[81R] df/dt5 =

1.0 Hzs


[81R] df/dt6 =

NO


[81R] df/dt6 =

1.0 Hzs



Page 52/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

10.7.2 df/dt functionning

32

322/

- -

- - -

- - =

ii

iii

ttffdtdf

32 - - ii

21

211/

- -

- - -

- - =

ii

iii

ttffdtdf

fi-1

1

1/-

-

- - =

ii

iii

ttffdtdf

fifi-2

ii

iii

ttffdtdf

P0399ENa

- - =

+

++

1

11/

fi+1

FIGURE 2

The rates of change of frequency are calculated every cycle based upon the frequencyvalues being insensitives to vector shifts, phase jumps and harmonics.

NOTE: To be insensitive to the phase shift and vector jumps, we rejectall measuements of df/dt greater than 20Hz/s .


1

P0400ENa

2 3

FIGURE 3

CONFIGURATION

Menu :

df/dt: CYCLE NB= 3

df/dt: VALIDAT.NB= 2

PROTECTION

Menu :

(setting of the 1er stage)

[81R] df/dt1: =0.5 Hzs

After the first three instantaneous df/dt values, the firstaverage value will be calculated (fig.2). This averagevalue will be compared to the threshold of the df/dt inthe protection menu (1er stage in this example):

33/2/1/1/ dtdfdtdfdtdfdtaveragedf ��

�

The second average value will be calculated basedupon the next detected three instantaneous values ofdf/dt (fig.3) .This second average value will becompared to the threshold of the df/dt in theprotection menu (1er stage in this example):

33/2/1/2/ dtdfdtdfdtdfdtaveragedf ��

�


Page 54/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

P0401ENa

1 2 3

CONFIGURATION

Menu:

df/dt: CYCLE NB= 3

If both df/dt average1 and df/dt average2 exceed the threshold of the first element ofdf/dt in the protection Menu,then the protection will opeate

However if only one of the average values exceeds the programmed threshold, thenthe protection function will not oparate since the VALIDATION Number forpositionning the protection (=2) is not reached.


11. CONTROL FUNCTIONS

To gain access to the �AUTOMAT.CTRL� menu from the default display, press �once and � 5 times.

The accessible sub-menus are then indicated below :

AUTOMAT. CTRL

� � � � � � � �

� TRIP OUTPUT RLY � LATCH OUTPUTS � BLOCKING LOG1 t � BLOCKING LOG2 t �

� � � � �

And :

AUTOMAT. CTRL

� � � � � �

� AUX OUTPUT RLY � LATCH OUTPUT AND LOGIC � T DELAY �

� � RELAYS EQUAT � EQUATION �

And :

AUTOMAT. CTRL

� � � �

� INPUTS �

� �

CB SUPERVISION

11.1 "TRIP OUTPUT RLY" Menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to assign to the trip output contact (RL1) part or allthe selected time-delayed information.

In order to assign an information to the trip output contact, please go to the cellcorresponding to the selected information and press the � key. Select theconfiguration (YES or NO) with the � and � keys. Validate with the � key.


Page 56/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

11.1.1 MiCOM P921 - P922 and P923 : common information

To gain access to the �AUTOMAT.CTRL� menu from the default display, press �once, � 5 times (P921) or 6 times (P922 and P923) and � once.

TRIP OUTPUT RLY Heading of the �TRIP OUTPUT RLY� menu

TRIP tV<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV<�,which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tV<<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV<<�,which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tV<<<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV<<<�, which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES / NO

TRIP tV>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV>�,which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tV>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV>>�,which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tV>>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV>>>�, which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tV0>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV0>�,which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tV0>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV0>>�, which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tV0>>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV0>>>�, which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tAUX1 =

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tAUX1�, which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tAUX2 =

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tAUX2�, which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP EQUATION A =

NO

Description : selection of the �A� logic equation result, whichwill be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO


TRIP EQUATION B =

NO

Description : selection of the �B� logic equation result, whichwill be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

11.1.2 Additional information for the MiCOM P922 � MiCOM P923 relay

TRIP tV2>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV2>�,which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tV2>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV2>>�, which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tV1<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV1<�,which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tV1<<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV1<<�, which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tF1 =

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tF1�,which will be sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP tF2 =

NO


TRIP tF3 =

NO


TRIP tF4 =

NO


TRIP tF5 =

NO


TRIP tF6 =

NO



Page 58/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

11.1.3 Additional information for the MiCOM P923 relay

TRIP df/dt1=

NO

Description : selection of the 1st stage of rate of change offrequency, which will be sent to RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP df/dt2=

NO

Description : selection of the 2nd stage of rate of change offrequency, which will be sent to RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP df/dt3=

NO

Description : selection of the 3rd stage of rate of change offrequency, which will be sent to RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP df/dt4=

NO

Description : selection of the 4th stage of rate of change offrequency, which will be sent to RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP df/dt5=

NO


TRIP df/dt6=

NO


TRIP EQUATION

C= NO

Description : selection of the "C" logic equation result which willbe sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

TRIP EQUATION

D= NO

Description : selection of the "D" logic equation result which willbe sent to the RL1 output contactRange : YES/NO

11.2 "LATCH OUTPUTS" Menu

11.2.1 Description

This sub-menu makes it possible to latch the information of any stage associated tothe trip output contact (RL1). The latched trip output contact will then be maintainedeven if the fault has disappeared, and as long as a reset will not be performed. Thereset can be done :

� via a logic input (select �UNLATCH� in the list of available data, see �INPUTS�menu § 11.8),

� via the local or remote communication link.

In order to latch one information, please go to the relevant cell corresponding to theselected information, press then the � key. Select the configuration (YES or NO) withthe � and � keys. Validate with the � key.


11.2.2 MiCOM P921-MiCOM P922 and P923 : common information

To gain access to the �AUTOMAT.CTRL� menu from the default display, press �once, � 5 times(P921) or 6 times(P922 and P923), � once and � once.

LATCH OUTPUTS Heading of the �LATCH OUTPUTS� menu

LATCH tV<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV<�,which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV<<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV<<�, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV<<<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV<<<�, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV>�,which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV>>�, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV>>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV>>>�, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV0>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV0>�,which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV0>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV0>>�, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV0>>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV0>>>�, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tAUX1 =

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tAUX1�, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tAUX2 =

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tAUX2�, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH EQUATION A =

NO

Description : selection of the result of the �A� logic equation,which will be latched.Range : YES/NO


Page 60/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

LATCH EQUATION B =

NO

Description : selection of the result of the �B� logic equation,which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

11.2.3 Additional information for the MiCOM P922 and P923 relay

LATCH tV2>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV2>�,which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV2>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV2>>�, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV1<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV1<�,which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tV1<<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV1<<�, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tF1 =

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tF1�,which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH tF2 =

NO


LATCH tF3 =

NO


LATCH tF4 =

NO


LATCH tF5 =

NO


LATCH tF6 =

NO



11.2.4 Additional information for the MiCOM P923

LATCH df/dt1 =

NO

Description : selection of the 1st stage of the rate of change offrequency, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH df/dt2 =

NO

Description : selection of the 2nd stage of the rate of change offrequency, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH df/dt3 =

NO

Description : selection of the 3rd stage of the rate of change offrequency, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH df/dt4 =

NO

Description : selection of the 4th stage of the rate of change offrequency, which will be latched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH df/dt5 =

NO


LATCH df/dt6 =

NO


LATCH EQUATION C =

NO

Description : selection of the "C" logic equation which will belatched.Range : YES/NO

LATCH EQUATION D =

NO

Description : selection of the "D" logic equation which will belatched.Range : YES/NO


The aim is :

Latching of the output contact RL1, which is linked to the �tV>� information.

Settings are :

� select �YES� for the information which must be latched in the above menu : �tV>�,


Page 62/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

11.3 "BLOCKING LOG1 t" Menu

11.3.1 Description

The principle of the blocked overcurrent protection involves the use of start contactsfrom downstream relays (P121 or P122 for example) wired onto blocking inputs ofupstream relays (P921, P922 or P923 for example).

In the MiCOM P921 or P922-P923, the �BLOCKING LOGIC1 t� and �BLOCKINGLOGIC2 t� sub-menus allow the user to select time-delayed information, which willbe blocked by a dedicated logic input (see �INPUTS� sub-menu, �BLOCK LOG1� or�BLOCK LOG2� input).

In order to block one information, please go to the relevant cell corresponding to theselected information, press then the � key. Select the configuration (YES or NO) withthe � and � keys. Validate with the � key.

11.3.2 MiCOM P921-P922 and P923 : common information

To gain access to the �BLOCKING LOG1 t� sub-menu from the default display, press� once, � 5 times (P921) or 6 times (P922-P923), � once and � twice.

BLOCKING LOG1 t Heading of the �BLOCKING LOGIC 1� sub-menu

BLOCK1 tV<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV<�,which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLK LOG1� logicinput.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tV<<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV<<�, which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLKLOG1� logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tV<<<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV<<<�, which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLKLOG1� logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tV>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV>�,which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLK LOG1� logicinput.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tV>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV>>�, which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLKLOG1� logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tV>>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV>>>�, which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLKLOG1� logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tV0>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV0>�,which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLK LOG1� logicinput.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tV0>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV0>>�, which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLKLOG1� logic input.Range : YES/NO


BLOCK1 tV0>>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV0>>>�, which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLKLOG1� logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tAUX1 =

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tAUX1�, which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLKLOG1� logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tAUX2 =

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tAUX2�, which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLKLOG1� logic input.Range : YES/NO


BLOCK1 tV2>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV2>�,which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLK LOG1� logicinput.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tV2>>=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV2>>�, which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLKLOG1� logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tV1<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tV1<�,which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLK LOG1� logicinput.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tV1<<=

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information�tV1<<�, which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLKLOG1� logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tF1 =

NO

Description : selection of the time-delayed information �tF1�,which will be blocked by energisation of the �BLK LOG1� logicinput.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 tF2 =

NO


BLOCK1 tF3 =

NO


BLOCK1 tF4 =

NO


BLOCK1 tF5 =

NO


BLOCK1 tF6 =

NO



Page 64/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


BLOCK1 df/dt1 =

NO

Description : selection of the 1st stage of the rate of change offrequency which will be blocked by energisation of the "BLKLOG1" logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 df/dt2 =

NO

Description : selection of the 2nd stage of the rate of change offrequency which will be blocked by energisation of the "BLKLOG1" logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 df/dt3 =

NO

Description : selection of the 3rd stage of the rate of change offrequency which will be blocked by energisation of the "BLKLOG1" logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 df/dt4 =

NO

Description : selection of the 4th tage of the rate of change offrequency which will be blocked by energisation of the "BLKLOG1" logic input.Range : YES/NO

BLOCK1 df/dt5 =

NO


BLOCK1 df/dt6 =

NO



The aim is :

The user wants to block the first undervoltage stage if the logic input n°2 is energised.

Settings are :

� select �YES� for the information «tV<« in the �BLOCKING LOG1 t� menu. Seeabove,

� select the logic input n°2 in the �INPUTS� sub-menu (see § 11.9) and allocate tothis input the information �BLK LOG1�, as indicated below :

INPUT 2 =

BLK LOG1

11.4 "BLOCKING LOG2 t" Menu

The aim of this sub-menu is identical to the one of the �BLOCKING LOG1 t� sub-menu. In consequence, its description is not done in this Technical Guide.

To gain access to the �BLOCKING LOG2 t� sub-menu from the default display, press� once, � 5 times(P921) or 6 times(P922 and P923), � once and � 3 times.


11.5 "AUX OUTPUT RLY" Menu

11.5.1 Description

This sub-menu makes it possible to allocate to each individual output contact(excepted the watchdog and the trip output RL1) the information available in theMiCOM relay. Instantaneous and time-delayed information can be then affected toone or many output contacts.

The available output contacts are :

� MiCOM P921 : 3 output contacts, RL2 to RL4 (indicated by "432" in the following cells),

� MiCOM P922 and P923 : 7 output contacts, RL2 to RL8 (indicated by "8765432" in the following cells),

In order to assign one information to one output contact, please go to the relevantcell corresponding to the selected information, press then the � key. Select theconfiguration (0 or 1) with the � and � keys. Validate with the � key.

NOTE : if the information assigned to the trip output contact (RL1) hasbeen latched, all output contacts (RL2 to RL8) which are used toduplicate the trip output will be latched.

11.5.2 MiCOM P921, MiCOM P922 and P923: common information

To gain access to the �AUX OUTPUT RLY� sub-menu from the default display, press� once, � 5 times(P921) or 6 times(P922 and P923), � once and � 4 times.

AUX OUTPUT RLY Heading of the �AUX OUTPUT RLY� menu

TRIP. CB : 8765432

0000000

Description : selection of the output contacts, which are used toduplicate the trip outputRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

CLOSE CB : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �CB Close� information to theoutput contacts (this command comes from the remotecommunication).Range : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V< : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V<� information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV< : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV<� information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V<< : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V<<� information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV<< : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV<<� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact


Page 66/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

V<<< : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V<<<� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV<<< : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV<<<� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V>� information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV>� information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V>> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V>>� information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV>> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV>>� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V>>> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V>>>� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV>>> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV>>>� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V0> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V0>� information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV0> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV0>� information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V0>> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V0>>� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV0>> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV0>>� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V0>>> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V0>>>� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV0>>>: 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV0>>>� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact


tAUX1 : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tAUX1� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tAUX2 : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tAUX2� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

CB FAIL : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �CB Fail� information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contactNote : this information appears if the �CB FAIL� logic input isenergised.

EQU. A : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �A�equation result to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

EQU. B : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �B�equation result to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact


V2> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V2>�information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV2> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV2>�information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V2>> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V2>>�information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV2>> : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV2>>�information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V1< : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V1<�information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV1< : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV1<�information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

V1<< : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �V1<<�information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tV1<< : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tV1<<�information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact


Page 68/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

F1 : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �F1�information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

tF1 : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �tF1�information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

F2 : 8765432

0000000


tF2 : 8765432

0000000


F3 : 8765432

0000000


tF3 : 8765432

0000000


F4 : 8765432

0000000


tF4 : 8765432

0000000


F5 : 8765432

0000000


tF5 : 8765432

0000000


F6 : 8765432

0000000


tF6 : 8765432

0000000


CB ALAR : 8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �CB Alarm�information to theoutput contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contactNote : this information appears if one of the supervisionthresholds is reached (ex : maximum number of operations).

F OUT OF RANGE:8765432

0000000

Description : allocation of the �F OUT OF RANGE�informationto the output contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact


ACTIVE : 8765432

GROUP 0000000

Description : allocation of the �ACTIVE GROUP�information tothe output contactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

11.5.4 Additional information for MiCOM P923 only

df/dt1 : 876543

0000000

Description : allocation of the �df/dt1�information to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

df/dt : 876543

0000000


df/dt3 : 876543

0000000


df/dt4 : 876543

0000000


df/dt5 : 876543

0000000


df/dt6 : 876543

0000000


EQU. C : 876543

0000000

Description : allocation of the �C� equation result to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact

EQU. D : 876543

0000000

Description : allocation of the �D� equation result to the outputcontactsRange : 0 or 1 for each output contact


Page 70/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

11.6 "LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS" Menu

11.6.1 Description

This menu makes it possible to latch the output contacts (RL2 to RL4 for MiCOMP921- and RL2 to RL8 for MiCOM P922 and P923) which are associated with one orseveral stages, the latch is done by relay and not by functions.

The latched output contacts will then be maintained even if the fault has disappeared,and as long as a reset will not be performed. The reset an be done :

� via a logic input (select "UNLATCH" in the list of available data, see "INPUTS"menu § 11.8)

� via a local or remote communication link

In order to latch one output relay, please go to the relevant cell corresponding to theselected information, press then � key. Select the configuration (YES or NO) with �and � keys. Validate with the � key.

11.6.2 MiCOM P921, MiCOM P922 and P923 : common information

To gain access to the "LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS" submenu from the default display,press � once, � 5 times (P921) or 6 times (P922 or P923), � once and � 5 times.

LATCH OUTPUT

RELAYS

Heading of the �LATCH OUPTU RELAYS� menu

OUTPUT 2

NO

Description : selection of the output contact "RL2" to be latched.Range : YES/NO

OUTPUT 3

NO


OUTPUT 4

NO


� Additional information for MiCOM P922 and MiCOM P923 relay

OUTPUT 5

NO


OUTPUT 6

NO


OUTPUT 7

NO


OUTPUT 8

NO



11.7 "AND LOGIC EQUATION" Menu

11.7.1 Description

Two logical gates (�AND�) are available in the MiCOM P921 and P922 relays andfour are available in the MiCOM P923.

In order to assign one information to one logic equation, please go to the relevantcell corresponding to the selected information, press then the � key. Select theequation (A or B) with the � and � keys. Press then the � and � to activate/deactivate the information. Validate with the � key.

One information can be allocated to both equations simultaneously.

The available information that can be allocated to the logic equations are indicatedin the menu below.

11.7.2 MiCOM P921 and MiCOM P922 : common information

To gain access to the �AND LOGIC EQUAT� sub-menu from the default display,press � once, � 5 times(P921) or 6 times(P922 or P923), � once and � 6 times.

AND LOGIC EQUAT Heading of the �AND LOGIC EQUAT� sub-menu

V< : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information �V<�to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV< : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tV<�to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V<< : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV<< : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V<<< : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V<<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV<<< : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV<<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information �V>�to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tV>�to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation


Page 72/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

V>> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV>> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V>>> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V>>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV>>> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV>>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V0> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V0>� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV0> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tV0>�to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V0>> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V0>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV0>> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV0>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V0>>> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V0>>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV0>>> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV0>>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tAUX1 : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tAUX1� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tAUX2 : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tAUX2� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

CB FAIL : BA

00

Description : allocation of the information �CB FAIL� to thelogic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation


11.7.3 Additional information for the MiCOM P922 relay

V2> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V2>� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV2> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tV2>�to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V2>> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V2>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV2>> : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV2>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V1< : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V1<� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV1< : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tV1<�to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V1<< : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V1<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV1<< : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV1<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

F1 : BA

00

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information �F1�to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tF1 : BA

00

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tF1�to the logic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

F2 : BA

00


tF2 : BA

00


F3 : BA

00


tF3 : BA

00



Page 74/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

F4 : BA

00


tF4 : BA

00


F5 : BA

00


tF5 : BA

00


F6 : BA

00


tF6 : BA

00


CB ALARM : BA

00

Description : allocation of the information �CB Alarm� to thelogic equations (A and/or B)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

11.7.4 MiCOM P923

AND LOGIC EQUAT Heading of the �AND LOGIC EQUAT� sub-menu forMiCOM P923

V< : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information �V<�to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV< : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tV<�to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V<< : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV<< : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V<<< : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V<<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation


tV<<< : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV<<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information �V>�to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tV>�to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V>> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV>> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V>>> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V>>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV>>> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV>>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V0> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V0>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV0> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tV0>�to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V0>> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V0>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV0>> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV0>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V0>>> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V0>>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/orD).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV0>>> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV0>>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/orD)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V2> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V2>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation


Page 76/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

tV2> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tV2>�to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V2>> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V2>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV2>> : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV2>>� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V1< : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V1<� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV1< : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tV1<�to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

V1<< : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information�V1<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tV1<< : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tV1<<� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

F1 : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the instantaneous information �F1�to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tF1 : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information �tF1�to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

F2 : DCBA

0000


tF2 : DCBA

0000


F3 : DCBA

0000


tF3 : DCBA

0000


F4 : DCBA

0000



tF4 : DCBA

0000


F5 : DCBA

0000


tF5 : DCBA

0000


F6 : DCBA

0000


tF6 : DCBA

0000


df/dt1 : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the 1st stage information �df/dt1� tothe logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

df/dt2 : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the 2nd stage information �df/dt2� tothe logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

df/dt3 : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the 3rd stage information �df/dt3� tothe logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

df/dt4 : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the 4th stage information �df/dt4� tothe logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

df/dt5 : DCBA

0000


df/dt6 : DCBA

0000


tAUX1 : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tAUX1� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

tAUX2 : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the time-delayed information�tAUX2� to the logic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation

CB ALARM : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the information �CB Alarm� to thelogic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D)Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation


Page 78/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

CB FAIL : DCBA

0000

Description : allocation of the information �CB FAIL� to thelogic equations (A and/or B and/or C and/or D).Range : 0 or 1 for each selected equation


The aim is :

The trip order following an overvoltage condition (tV>> for example) shall begenerated only if the circuit breaker is closed.

Settings are :

� select the logic input n°2 in the �INPUTS� sub-menu (see § 11.9) and assign tothis input the information �AUX1�, as indicated below :

INPUT 2 =

AUX1

The 52a contact can be connected to this input in order to monitor the CB state. Theassociated timer �tAUX1� can be set to 0 (instantaneous information),

� select the �tAUX1� information in the �AND LOGIC EQUAT� menu and allocatethis information to the A logic equation,

� select the �tV>>� information in the �AND LOGIC EQUAT� menu and allocatethis information to the A logic equation,

� define the �Toperate� timer in the �T DELAY EQUATION� sub-menu (see below),

� allocate the result of the �A� logic equation to the trip output contact (see �TRIPOUTPUT RLY� sub-menu).


11.8 "T DELAY EQUATION" Menu

11.8.1 Description

For each logic equation, two independent timers are available : one pick-up timerand one drop-off timer.

The principle of these timers is indicated on the scheme below :

Toperate=pick-up

Treset=drop-off

"A" Equation input

"A" Equation result

P0402ENa


To gain access to the �T DELAY EQUATION� sub-menu from the default display,press � once, 5 times � (P921) or 6 times (P922 or P923), once � and 7 times �.

T DELAY EQUATION Heading of the �T DELAY EQUATION� sub-menu

EQU. A Toperat =

0.0 s

Description : setting of the pick-up timer for the �A� logicequationRange : 0 � 3600s, step = 0,1s

EQU. A Treset =

0.0 s

Description : setting of the drop-off timer for the �A� logicequationRange : 0 � 3600s, step = 0,1s

EQU. B Toperat=

0.0 s

Description : setting of the pick-up timer for the �B� logicequationRange : 0 � 3600s, step = 0,1s

EQU. B Treset=

0.0 s

Description : setting of the drop-off timer for the �B� logicequationRange : 0 � 3600s, step = 0,1s


Page 80/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


EQU. C Toperat=

0.0 s

Description : setting of the pick-up timer for the �C� logicequationRange : 0 � 3600s, step = 0,1s

EQU. C Treset=

0.0 s

Description : setting of the drop-off timer for the �C� logicequationRange : 0 � 3600s, step = 0,1s

EQU. D Toperat=

0.0 s

Description : setting of the pick-up timer for the �D� logicequationRange : 0 � 3600s, step = 0,1s

EQU. D Treset=

0.0 s

Description : setting of the drop-off timer for the �D� logicequationRange : 0 � 3600s, step = 0,1s


11.9 "INPUTS" Menu

11.9.1 Description

This sub-menu makes it possible to allocate each logic input to one specifiedfunction.

It is possible to configure the operation of the digital input, either on falling edge/lowlevel,or on rising edge/high level. Falling edge or low level (idem for rising edge orhigh level) depends on the application of the digital inputs.

ONLY a digital input configured "CHANG SET" can operate either on edge or onlevel.

List of available functions :

Label Significance of the label Operation ofdigital input

NONE No allocation

UNLATCH Unlatching of the latched output contacts on level

52a Interlock of the CB (open if CB open) on level

52b Interlock of the CB (closed if CB open) on level

CB FAIL CB Failure information (external information, for example :SF6 fault)

on level

AUX 1 Allocation of the input to an external auxiliary information AUX1 on level

AUX 2 Allocation of the input to an external auxiliary information AUX2 on level

BLK LOG1 Allocation of the input to the �blocking logic 1� information :if the input is energised, the selected stages in the�BLOCKING LOG1t� menu will be blocked.

on level

BLK LOG2 Allocation of the input to the �blocking logic 2� information :if the input is energised, the selected stages in the�BLOCKING LOG2t� menu will be blocked.

on level

CHANG SET Allocation of the input in order to change the active settinggroup : each transition of the input will be taken into account(default setting group = 1).

on level or onedge

STRT DIST External start of the disturbance recorder. on edge

NOTA :

MiCOM P922 and P923

In order to allocate one function to one logic input, please go to the relevant cellcorresponding to the selected input, press then the � key. Press then the � and �to activate/deactivate the information. Validate with the � key.


Page 82/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

11.9.2 MiCOM P921 and MiCOM P922 : common information

To gain access to the �INPUTS� sub-menu from the default display, press once �, 5times � (P921) or 6 times (P922 or P923), once � and 8 times �.

INPUTS Heading of the �INPUTS� sub-menu

INPUT 1 =

NONE

Description : allocation of the logic input n°1 to one of theabove listed information.Range : see the above list of information

INPUT 2 =

NONE


t AUX 1 =

0.0 s

Description : setting of the auxiliary timer associated to theAUX1 logic input.Range : 0 � 200s, step = 0,01s

t AUX 2 =

0.0 s

Description : setting of the auxiliary timer associated to the AUX2 logie input.Range : 0 � 200s, pas = 0,01s

11.9.3 Additional logic inputs for the MiCOM P922 and P923 relays

INPUT 3 =

NONE


INPUT 4 =

NONE


INPUT 5 =

NONE



11.10 "CB SUPERVISION" Menu

11.10.1 Description

This sub-menu makes it possible to validate the circuit breaker supervision andmonitoring functions, and the various settings associated to these functions.

In the MiCOM P921 � P922 and P923 relays, the control of the circuit breaker can bedone :

� Tripping order : the tripping order is realized by using the dedicated trip outputcontact (RL1). This command is maintained during the specified �TRIP PULSETIME�. The command can be generated by a protective function of the relay : itcan also be done via a logic input (select the �AUX1� logic input and assign the"tAUX1" to the trip output relay), or via the local/remote communication (seechapter 6 of this Technical Guide),

� Closing order : 2 different ways can be used.- This order is realized by using the output contact, which has

been configured for this closing order (see "AUX OUTPUTRLY" menu, "CLOS. CB" cell). This command is maintainedduring the specified "CLOSE PULSE TIME". The command canonly be generated via the local/remote communication (seechapter 6 of this Technical Guide).

- This order can also be realized by using one logic input(select the "AUX2 logic input) which can be assigned to anyof the output contacts. This command will be maintained aslong as the logic input is energized.

Moreover, the MiCOM P922-P923 relays offer the supervision of the closing/openingtime of the circuit breaker. They also include the supervision of the number of CBoperations, with a settable threshold of the maximum allowed operations.


Page 84/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


To gain access to the �CB SUPERVISION� sub-menu from the default display, pressonce �, 5 times � (P921) or 6 times (P922-P923), once � and once �.

CB SUPERVISION Heading of the �CB SUPERVISION� sub-menu"

CB OPEN S�vision

NO

Description : enable/disable the �CB OPEN SUPERVISION�function. If enabled, the function will generate an alarm if themaximum open time has been reached.Range : YES/NONote : only for MiCOM P922 � MiCOM P923

CB OPENING TIME

0.0 s

Description : setting of the maximum allowed opening timeRange : 0.1 � 5s, step = 0.05sNote : only for MiCOM P922 � MiCOM P923

CB CLOSE S�vision

NO

Description : enable/disable the �CB CLOSE SUPERVISION�function. If enabled, the function will generate an alarm if themaximum close time has been reached.Range : YES/NONote : only for MiCOM P922 � MiCOM P923

CB CLOSING TIME

0.0 s

Description : setting of the maximum allowed closing timeRange : 0.1 � 5s, step = 0.05sNote : only for MiCOM P922 � MiCOM P923

NB OPER. ALARM ?

NO

Description : enable/disable the �NB OPER ALARM� function. Ifenabled, an alarm will be generated if the maximum nb ofoperations has been reachedRange : YES/NONote : only for MiCOM P922 � MiCOM P923

NB OPERATIONS=

0

Description : réglage du temps maximum de fermetureRange : 0 � 50000, step = 1Note : only for MiCOM P922 � MiCOM P923

CLOSE PULSE TIME

150 ms

Description : Duration of the close pulseRange : 0.1 � 5s, step = 0.05sNote : common to MiCOM P921 � MiCOM P922 andMiCOM P923

TRIP PULSE TIME

150 ms

Description : Duration of the trip pulseRange : 0.1 � 5s, step = 0.05sNote : common to MiCOM P921 � MiCOM P922 andMiCOM P923


12. RECORDS FUNCTIONS (ONLY MiCOM P922 AND P923)

To gain access to the �RECORDS� sub-menu from the default display, press once �and once �.

The accessible sub-menus are indicated below :

RECORDS

� � � � � � � �

� CB MONITORING � FAULT RECORD � DISTURB RECORDER � � FREQ. DISTURB REC

� � � �

TIME PEAK VALUE

�

12.1 "CB MONITORING" Menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to read and clear the measurements relative to thecircuit breaker monitoring function : closing and opening times, number ofoperations�

To gain access to the �CB MONITORING� sub-menu from the default display, pressonce �, once � and once �.

CB MONITORING Heading of the �CB MONITORING� sub-menu

CB OPENING TIME=

0.0 ms

Description : measurement of the opening time of the CBNote : read only, no modifications allowed

CB CLOSING TIME =

0.0 ms

Description : measurement of the closing time of the CBNote : read only, no modifications allowed

CB OPERATIONS =

RST=[C] 0

Description : display of the total number of CB operations. Thereset of this number is possible by pressing the � key.


Page 86/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

12.2 "FAULT RECORD" Menu

Fault records are stored in the non-volatile memory with the time of the fault to theaccuracy of 1 ms. A total of 5 such latest events are stored. In case of power supplyfailure, this information is saved in the backup lithium battery.

When the available record space is exhausted, the relay will automatically overwritethe oldest record, to accomodate the new record.

The fault records are available for viewing either via the frontplate LCD or remotely,via the communications ports.

Local viewing on the LCD is achieved in the menu column entitled « FAULTRECORD ». This column is described below :

To gain access to the �FAULT RECORD� sub-menu from the default display, press �once, � once, � once and � once.

FAULT RECORD Heading of the �FAULT RECORD� sub-menu

RECORD NUMBER

5

Description : This selects the required fault record from thepossible 5 that may be stored.Range : 1 � 5, step = 1.Note : a value of 5 corresponds to the latest fault and so on.

FAULT TIME

10 : 45 : 22 : 12

Description : time of the fault with an accuracy within 1ms. Thetime of the fault recorded will be the time at which the protectionalgorithm gives a trip/alarm order.Note : read only, no modifications allowed.

FAULT DATE

02/05/00

Description : date of the fault recorded will be the date atwhich the protection algorithm gives a trip/alarm order.Note : read only, no modifications allowed.

ACTIVE SET GROUP

1

Description : active setting group at the time of the faultNote : read only, no modifications allowed.

FAULTED PHASE

PHASE A B C

Description : phase(s) of faultNote : read only, no modifications allowed.

TRIP ELEMENT

V<

Description : elements that tripped for the faultNote : read only, no modifications allowed.

MAGNITUDE

xxxxxx

Description : magnitude of the voltage that has generated afault, at the instant of the faultNote : read only, no modifications allowed.

VA MAGNITUDE

xxxxxx

Description : magnitude of the phase A voltage at the instant ofthe fault (or Vab according to the connection scheme)Note : read only, no modifications allowed.

VB MAGNITUDE

xxxxxx

Description : magnitude of the phase B voltage at the instant ofthe fault (or Vbc according to the connection scheme)Note : read only, no modifications allowed.


VC MAGNITUDE

xxxxxx

Description : magnitude of the phase C voltage at the instantof the fault (or Vca according to the connection scheme)Note : read only, no modifications allowed.

V0 MAGNITUDE

xxxxxx

Description : magnitude of the residual voltage at the instant ofthe fault (if residual VT connected)Note : read only, no modifications allowed.

12.3 "DISTURB RECORDER" Menu

12.3.1 Description

Disturbance records are stored in the non-volatile memory. A total of 5 such recordsare stored, each of duration 2.5 seconds.

The pre-trigger and post-trigger times can be set in this sub-menu : the total time willbe equal to 2.5s. The pre-time will be priority.

When the available record space is exhausted, the relay will automatically overwritethe oldest record, to accomodate the new record.

The acquisition frequency for the disturbance recorder is 32 samples per cycle of thepower system frequency .

Disturbance records can be extracted either automatically (rear port only) or manually(front or rear port).

The recording of the disturbance data can be triggered by any instantaneousinformation, any time-delayed information, activation of a logic input or a logicequation.


To gain access to the �DISTURB RECORDER� sub-menu from the default display,press � once, � once, � once and � twice.

DISTURB RECORDER Heading of the �DISTURB RECORDER� sub-menu

PRE-TIME

0.1 s

Description : setting of the pre-trigger timeRange : 0.1 � 2.5s, step = 0.01s

POST-TIME

0.1 s

Description : setting of the post-trigger timeRange : 0.1 � 2.5s, pas = 0.01s

DISTURB REC TRIG

ON INST

Description : selection of the trigger modeRange : ON INST / ON TRIP


Page 88/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

12.4 "TIME PEAK VALUE" Menu

This sub-menu makes it possible to set the period of time which will be used tocalculate average and maximum values.

To gain access to the �TIME PEAK VALUE� sub-menu from the default display,press �once, � once, � once and � 3 times.

TIME PEAK VALUE Heading of the �TIME PEAK VALUE� sub-menu

TIME WINDOW

5 min

Description : setting of the period of time used to calculate theaverage and maximum values of voltages.Range : 5 / 10 / 15 / 30 / 60 min

12.5 "FREQ DISTURB REC" Menu (only MiCOM P923)

Frequency disturbance records are stored in the non-volatile memory. One recordcould be stored, its duration is of 20 seconds ; the pre-trigger and the post-triggertimes are fixed at 5 and 15 seconds repectively.

The acquisition frequency of the frequency disturbance record is 1 sample per cycle ofthe power system frequency.

Frequency disturbance records can be extracted either automatically (rear port only)or manually (front or rear port).

The recording of data can be triggered by frequency element, any instantaneous ortime delayed information, activation of a logic input or a logic equation.


To gain access to the "FREQ. DISTURB REC" menu from the default display, press �once, � once, � once and � once.

FREQ DISTURB REC Heading of the �Frequency Disturbance Records�menu

FREQ DISTURB REC

TRIG = ON TRIP

Description : configuration of the frrequency disturbancerecords trigger.Range : TRIP/FREQ/EQU.


13. DISPLAY OF ALARMS

The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default displayand by the yellow alarm LED flashing.

Alarms

The alarm messages can either be self-resetting or latched, in which case they mustbe cleared manually. To view the alarm messages press the � key . When all alarmshave been viewed, but not cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing toconstant illumination. To scroll through these pages, press the � key. The oldestalarm will be displayed on the last page, the most recent one on the first page : eachmessage will be identified by a number. When all pages of the fault record havebeen viewed, the following prompt will appear:

Clear All Alarms

To clear all alarm messages press � ; to return to the display of the first alarmmessage and leave the alarms uncleared, press �. There is no need to enter apassword before the alarm messages can be cleared. When the alarms have beencleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it wasilluminated following a trip.

The alarm messages are classified as indicated below :

� electrical system alarms,

� relay hardware or software alarms.

13.1.1 Electrical system alarms

Any crossing of a threshold (instantaneous or time-delayed) generates an �electricalsystem alarm�. For each alarm, the involved thresholds and phases are indicated.

For example :

V< 2/3

PHASE AB BC CA

NOTE : instantaneous information leads to a self-resetting alarmmessage. The alarm LED will then be switched off as soon as theinstantaneous information has disappeared.


Page 90/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

The list of all electrical alarms and their significance are indicated in the table below :

� MiCOM P921, MiCOM P922 and MiCOM P923 : common alarms

Alarms Significance

V> 1st stage instantaneous overvoltage information

tV> 1st stage time-delayed overvoltage information

V>> 2nd stage instantaneous overvoltage information

tV>> 2nd stage time-delayed overvoltage information

V>>> 3rd stage instantaneous overvoltage information

tV>>> 3rd stage time-delayed overvoltage information

V< 1st stage instantaneous undervoltage information

tV< 1st stage time-delayed undervoltage information

V<< 2ndstage instantaneous undervoltage information

tV<< 2ndstage time-delayed undervoltage information

V<<< 3rdstage instantaneous undervoltage information

tV<<< 3rdstage time-delayed undervoltage information

V0> 1st stage instantaneous residual overvoltage information

tV0> 1st stage time-delayed residual overvoltage information

V0>> 2ndstage instantaneous residual overvoltage information

tV0>> 2ndstage time-delayed residual overvoltage information

V0>>> 3rdstage instantaneous residual overvoltage information

tV0>>> 3rdstage time-delayed residual overvoltage information

t AUX 1 time-delayed �tAUX1� information

t AUX 2 time-delayed �tAUX2� information

EQUATION A time-delayed result of the �A� logic equation

EQUATION B time-delayed result of the �B� logic equation

CB FAILURE�CB Failure� information generated after the energisation of thelogic input allocated to the �CB FAIL� information (see �INPUTS�sub-menu in the �AUTOMAT.CTRL� menu).

LATCH RELAY information generated after the activation of the element which isassociated to the latch.


� Additional alarms for the MiCOM P922 and MiCOM P923 relay :

Alarm Significance

F1 1st frequency stage : instantaneous information

tF1 1st frequency stage : time-delayed information

F2 2nd frequency stage : instantaneous information

tF2 2nd frequency stage : time-delayed information

F3 3rd frequency stage : instantaneous information

tF3 3rd frequency stage : time-delayed information

F4 4th frequency stage : instantaneous information

tF4 4th frequency stage : time-delayed information





V2> 1st stage : instantaneous negative sequence overvoltage information

tV2> 1st stage : time-delayed negative sequence overvoltage information

V2>> 2nd stage : instantaneous negative sequence overvoltage information

tV2>> 2nd stage : time-delayed negative sequence overvoltage information

V1< 1st stage : instantaneous positive sequence undervoltage information

tV1< 1st stage : time-delayed positive sequence undervoltage information

V1<< 2nd stage : instantaneous positive sequence undervoltageinformation

tV1<< 2nd stage : time-delayed positive sequence undervoltage information

F OUT OFRANGE Network frequency is out of the operation range (40Hz � 70Hz)

OPERATE TIMECB Opening time of the CB is greater than the specified threshold.

CB OPEN NB The number of CB operations has reached the maximum allowednumber.

CB CLOSEFAILURE Closing time of the CB is greater than the specified threshold.


Page 92/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

� Additional alarms for the MiCOM P923 :

Alarm Significance

df/dt1 1st stage of the rate of change of frequency information

df/dt2 2nd stage of the rate of change of frequency information

df/dt3 3rd stage of the rate of change of frequency information

df/dt4 4th stage of the rate of change of frequency information



EQUATION C time delayed result of the "C" logic equation

EQUATION D time delayed result of the "D" logic equation

13.1.2 "Relay" ALARMS

Any software or hardware fault of the MiCOM relay generates an�hardware/software� alarm.

If an hardware error appears, the following prompt will appear :

HARDWARE ALARMS

If the � key is pressed, the significance of the hardware problem is then indicated :for example,

RAM ERROR 1/1

The �Warning� LED will blink. The reset of these alarms is not possible. Only thedisappear of their cause will lead to their reset.


Alarms can be classified as minor or major faults :

� Minor fault : the protection functions of the relay are still active. The watchdogcontact is in the �relay healthy� position.

The acknoledgment of those alarms can be done by pressing the � key

Alarm Type Significance Solution

COMM. ERRORMinor

Communication error Check the RS485connection at the rear ofthe relay

CLOCK ERRORMinor

Fault of the internal clock(P922 and P923 only)

Change the date and timevia the front panel or thecommunication links

RAM ERROR*

Minor

Fault in the non-volatile RAMmemory

Stop and start again therelay (power off/on) :check also the lithiumbattery.

BATTERY FAIL* Minor Fault of the battery Check if the battery is flator not correctly in place.

* The "RAM" and "Battery failure" alarm messages can be configured yes or no in"CONFIGURATION /Alarms" menu.

� Major fault : the protection functions of the relay are stopped. The watchdogcontact is in the �relay failed� position.

The acknoledgment of those alarms is impossible : the only way to reset the alarms isthe disappearance of the fault.

Alarm Type Significance Solution

EEPROM ERRORDATA Major

Fault in the EEPROMmemory (data zone)

Send back the relay toAREVA After SalesServices

VT ERRORMajor

Fault in the acquisition chainof analogue signals


EEPROM ERRORCALIBR. Major

Fault in the EEPROMmemory (calibration zone)


WATCH DOGMajor

Fault in the internal circuitsof the relay



Page 94/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

P922 P921 P923

OP PARAMETERS � OP PARAMETERS � OP PARAMETERS �

CONFIGURATION � � CONFIGURATION � � CONFIGURATION � �

GENERAL � � � GENERAL � � � GENERAL � � �

VT RATIO � � � � VT RATIO � � � � VT RATIO � � � �

LED � � � 2x� LED � � � 2x� LED � � � 2x�

CONFIG SELECT � � � 3x� CONFIG SELECT � � � 3x�


� � � 4x�

ALARMS � � � 4x� ALARMS � � � 3x� ALARMS � � � 5x�

CONFIGURATIONINPUTS



� � � �

MEASUREMENTS � 2x� MEASUREMENTS � 2x� MEASUREMENTS � 2x�

COMMUNICATION � 3x� COMMUNICATION � 3x� COMMUNICATION � 3x�

PROTECTION G1 � 4x� PROTECTION � 4x� PROTECTION G1 � 4x�

PROTECTION G2 � 5x� PROTECTION G2 � 5x�

AUTOMAT. CTRL � 6x� AUTOMAT. CTRL � 5x� AUTOMAT. CTRL � 6x�

TRIP OUTPUT RLY � 6x� � TRIP OUTPUT RLY � 5x� � TRIP OUTPUT RLY � 6x� �

LATCH OUTPUTS � 6x� � � LATCH OUTPUTS � 5x� � � LATCH OUTPUTS � 6x� � �



AUX OUTPUT RLY � 6x� � 4x� AUX OUTPUT RLY � 5x� � 4x� AUX OUTPUT RLY � 6x� � 4x�

LATCH OUTPUTRELAYS



� 6x� � 5x�

AND LOGICEQUAT



� 6x� � 6x�

T DELAYEQUATION



� 6x� � 7x�

INPUTS � 6x� � 8x� INPUTS � 5x� � 8x� INPUTS � 6x� � 8x�

CB SUPERVISION � 6x� � 9x� CB SUPERVISION � 5x� � 9x� CB SUPERVISION � 6x� � 9x�

RECORDS � 6x� � � RECORDS � 6x� � �


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

PASS

WO

RD = ****

DES

CRI

PTIO

N =

P921

--

REFE

REN

CE

= ALS

T

SOFT

WA

RE V

ERSI

ON

4.C

FREQ

UEN

CY

=50

Hz

INPU

TS :

2

1

00

OP

PARA

MET

ERS

OU

TPU

TS :

4

321

0

000

GEN

ERA

L

CO

NN

ECTI

ON 3

Vpn

PRO

TEC

TIO

NPR

OT

P-P

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

RMS

VA

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

VT

RATI

O

MA

IN V

T PR

IMA

RY =

20.0

0 kV

MA

IN V

T SE

C�Y

=10

0 V

LED

5 /

6 /

7 /

8

LED

CO

NF.

V<

=Y/

NtV

< =

Y/N

V<

< =

Y/N

tV<

< =

Y/N

V<

<<

=Y/

NtV

<<

< =

Y/N

V>

=Y/

NtV

> =

Y/N

V>

> =

Y/N

tV>

> =

Y/N

V>

>>

=Y/

NtV

>>

> =

Y/N

V0>

=Y/

NtV

0> =

Y/

NV

0>>

=Y/

NtV

0>>

=

Y/N

V0>

>>

=Y/

NtV

0>>

> =

Y/

NtA

UX1

=Y/

NtA

UX2

=Y/

N

MiC

OM

P9

21

Men

us

E/G

nd V

T PR

IMA

RY=

20.0

0 kV

E/G

nd V

T SE

C�Y

=10

0 V

ALA

RMS

INST

.SEL

F-RE

SET

?

YES

INPU

TS:

2

1

11

VO

LTA

GE

INPU

TS=

DC

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

INPU

TS


Page 96/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

MiC

OM

P921

Men

us

VA

=0.0

0 V

VB

=0.0

0 V

VC

=0.0

0 V

VA

B =

0.0

0 V

VC

A =

0.0

0 V

V0 =

0.00 V

MEA

SURE

MEN

TS

VBC

=0.0

0 V

FREQ

UEN

CY =

XX.X

X H

z

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N ?

YES

BAU

D R

ATE

=1920

0 B

d

PARI

TY =

NO

NE

STO

P BI

TS =

1

RELA

Y A

DD

RESS

= 1

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

NPR

OTE

CTI

ON

G

1

[27

] U

ND

ERV

OLT

AG

E

[27] V

< =

YES

[27] V

< =

5.0

V

[27]

DEL

AY

TYPE

=D

MT

[27] tR

ESET

V< 10 m

s

[27] V

<<

=5.0

V

[27] TM

S =

1.0

[27] V

<<

=YES

[59]

OV

ERV

OLT

AG

E

[59] V

> =

YES

[59] V

> =

130.

0 V

[59] D

ELA

Y T

YPE

=D

MT

[59] tR

ESET

V> 10 m

s

[59] tV

> =

40 m

s

[59] V

>>

=130.

0 V

[59] TM

S =

1.0

[59] V

>>

=YES

[59

N] RE

SID

UA

L O

/V [59N

] V

0 >

= YES

[59N

] V

0 >

= 5.0

V

[59N

] D

ELA

Y T

YPE

=D

MT

[59N

] tR

ESET

V0>

10 m

s

[59N

] V

0>>

=5.0

V

[59N

] TM

S =

1.0

[59N

] tV

0>

= 40 m

s[2

7] tV

<=

40 m

s

[59N

] V

0>>

= YES

[27]

tV<

<=

10 m

s

[27]

V<

<<

= YES

[27]

V<

<<

= 5.0

V

[27]

tV<

<<

= 10

ms

[59]

tV >

> =

40 m

s

[59]

V >

>>

= YES

[59]

V >

>>

= 130.0

V

[59]

tV >

>>

= 40 m

s

[59N

] tV

0>>

=40

ms

[59N

] V

0>

>>

=YE

S

[59N

] V

0>

>>

=5.0

V

[59N

] tV

0>

>>

=40 m

s[2

7] H

YST

ERES

IS=

1.02

[59]

HYS

TERE

SIS

=0.9

8


MiC

OM

P92

1 -

Men

us

AU

X O

UTP

UT

RLY

TRIP

. C

B

432

0

00C

LOS.

CB

V <

tV <

V <

<tV

<<

V <

<<

tV <

<<

V >

tV >

V

>>

tV >

>V

>>

>tV

>>

>V

0 >

tV0

>V

0 >

>tV

0 >

>V

0 >

>>

tV0

>>

>tA

UX1

tAU

X2C

B FA

ILEQ

U.

AEQ

U.

B

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

TRIP

OU

TPU

T RL

Y

TRIP

tV

< =

NO

TRIP

tV

<<

=N

O

TRIP

tV

<<

< = N

O

TRIP

tV

>>

=N

O

TRIP

tV

0> =

NO

TRIP

tV

0>>

> = NO

TRIP

t A

UX1

= NO

TRIP

t A

UX

2 = N

O

TRIP

EQ

UA

TIO

N A

=N

O

TRIP

EQ

UA

TIO

N B

=N

OTR

IP t

V>

=N

O

TRIP

tV

0>>

= NO

TRIP

tV

>>

> = N

O

LATC

H

OU

TPU

TS

LATC

H t

V <

=N

O

LATC

H t

V <

< = N

O

LATC

H t

V <

<<

= NO

LATC

H t

V >

> = N

O

LATC

H t

V >

>>

= NO

LATC

H t

V0

>>

> =

NO

LATC

H t

AU

X 1

= NO

LATC

H t

AU

X 2

=N

O

LATC

H t

V >

=N

O

LATC

H t

V0

>>

= NO

LATC

H t

V0

> = N

O

LATC

H E

QU

ATI

ON

A=

N

O

LATC

H E

QU

ATI

ON

B=

N

O

BLO

CK

ING

LO

G 1

/2 t

BLO

CK

1 t

V <

= NO

BLO

CK

1 tV

<<

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 tV

<<

< =

NO

BLO

CK

1 tV

>>

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 tV

>>

> =

NO

BLO

CK

1 tV

0 >

> =

NO

BLO

CK

1 tV

0 >

>>

=

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

AU

X1 =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

AU

X 2

= N

O

BLO

CK

1 tV

> = N

O

BLO

CK

1 tV

0 >

= NO


Page 98/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

MiC

OM

P9

21

- M

enusINPU

TS 1

/2

NO

NE

UN

LATC

H52

a52

bC

B FA

ILA

UX

1A

UX

2BL

K L

OG

1BL

K L

OG

2

t A

UX

2 =

20.0

s

t A

UX

1 =

10.0

s

LATC

H O

UTP

UT

RELA

YS

OU

TPU

T 2

YES

OU

TPU

T 4

YES

OU

TPU

T 3

YES

V <

:

BA

00tV

<V

<<

tV <

<V

<<

<tV

<<

<V

>tV

>V

>>

tV >

>V

>>

>tV

>>

>V

0 >

tV0

>V

0 >

>tV

0 >

>V

0 >

>>

tV0

>>

>t

AU

X 1

t A

UX

2C

B FA

IL

AN

D L

OG

IC E

QU

AT

T D

ELA

YEQ

UA

TIO

N

EQU

. A

Top

erat

=0.

0 s

EQU

. A

Tre

set

=0.

0 s

EQU

. B

Tope

rat

=0.

0 s

EQU

. B

Tres

et = 0.0

s

CB

SUPE

RVIS

ION

CLO

SE P

ULS

E TI

ME

150

ms

TRIP

PU

LSE

TIM

E 1

50 m

s


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

PASS

WO

RD = ****

DES

CRI

PTIO

N =

P922

--

REFE

REN

CE

= ALS

T

SOFT

WA

RE V

ERSI

ON

4.C

FREQ

UEN

CY

=50

Hz

INPU

TS :

5432

1

0000

0

OP

PARA

MET

ERS

OU

TPU

TS :

8765

4321

0000

000

0

DA

TE12

/09/

01

TIM

E10

:33:

10

GEN

ERA

L

CO

NN

ECTI

ON 3

Vpn

PRO

TEC

TIO

NPR

OT

P-P

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

RMS

VA

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

VT

RATI

O

MA

IN V

T PR

IMA

RY =

20.0

0 k

V

MA

IN V

T SE

C�Y

=100

V

LED

5 /

6 /

7 /

8

LED

CO

NF.

V<

=Y/N

tV<

=Y/N

V<

< =

Y/N

tV<

< =

Y/N

V<

<<

=Y/N

tV<

<<

=Y/N

V>

=Y/N

tV>

=Y/N

V>

> =

Y/N

tV>

> =

Y/N

V>

>>

=Y/N

tV>

>>

=Y/N

V0>

=Y/N

tV0>

=

Y/N

V0>

> =

Y/N

tV0>

> =

Y/N

V0>

>>

=Y/N

tV0>

>>

=

Y/N

tAU

X1 =

Y/N

tAU

X2 =

Y/N

V2>

=Y/N

tV2>

=Y/N

V2>

> =

Y/N

tV2>

> =

Y/N

V1<

=Y/N

tV1<

=Y/N

V1<

<=

Y/N

tV1<

< =

Y/N

F1/F

2/F

3/F

4/F5

/F6 =

Y/N

tF1/

tF2/

tF3

tF4/

tF5/

tF6

=Y/N

f.O

UT

OF

R =

Y/N

CO

NFI

G S

ELEC

T

CH

AN

GE

GRO

UP

INPU

T

ED

GE

MiC

OM

P92

2

Men

us

E/G

nd V

T PR

IMA

RY=

20.0

0 k

V

E/G

nd V

T SE

C�Y

=100

V

AC

TIV

E G

ROU

P =

1

SETT

ING

GRO

UP

=1

ALA

RMS

INST

.SEL

F-RE

SET

?

YES

ALA

RMS

BATT

ERY=

N

O


Page 100/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

INPU

TS

INPU

TS:

543

21

11

111

VO

LTA

GE

INPU

TS=

DC

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

MiC

OM

P92

2

Men

us

VA

=0.

00 V

VB

=0.

00 V

VC

=0.

00 V

VA

B =

0.00

V

VC

A =

0.00

V

V0

=0.

00 V

MEA

SURE

MEN

TS

V1

=0.

00 V

V2

=0.

00

V

VBC

=0.

00 V

FREQ

UEN

CY

=XX

.XX

Hz

MA

X. &

AV

ERA

GE

VRS

T =

[C

]

MA

X. V

A R

MS

=0.

00 V

MA

X. V

B RM

S =

0.0

0 V

MA

X. V

C R

MS

=0

.00

V

MA

X. V

AB

RMS

=0

.00

V

MA

X. V

BC R

MS

=0

.00

V

AV

ERA

GE

VA

RM

S =

0.0

0 V

AV

ERA

GE

VB

RMS

=0.

00

V

AV

ERA

GE

VA

B RM

S =

0.00

V

AV

ERA

GE

VBC

RM

S =

0.

00 V

AV

ERA

GE

VC

A R

MS

=0.

00 V

MA

X. V

CA

RM

S =

0.0

0 V

AV

ERA

GE

VC

RM

S =

0.0

0 V

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N ?

YES

BAU

D R

ATE

=1

9200

Bd

PARI

TY =

NO

NE

STO

P BI

TS =

1

RELA

Y A

DD

RESS

= 1

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N

DA

TE F

ORM

AT

=

PRIV

ATE


MiC

OM

P9

22

Men

us

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

PRO

TEC

TIO

N

G1/G

2

[27

] U

ND

ERV

OLT

AG

E

[27] V

< =

YES

[27] V

< =

5.0

V

[27]

DEL

AY

TYPE

=D

MT

[27] tR

ESET

V< 10 m

s

[27] V

<<

=5.0

V

[27] tV

<<

=10 m

s

[27] V

<<

< =YES

[27] V

<<

< =5.0

V

[27] tV

<<

< = 10

ms

[27] TM

S =

1.0

[27] V

<<

=YES

[59]

OV

ERV

OLT

AG

E

[59] V

> =

YES

[59] V

> =

130.

0 V

[59] D

ELA

Y T

YPE

=D

MT

[59] tR

ESET

V> 10 m

s

[59] tV

> =

40 m

s

[59] V

>>

=130.

0 V

[59] tV

>>

=40 m

s

[59] V

>>

> = Y

ES

[59] V

>>

> = 1

30.

0 V

[59] tV

>>

> = 40 m

s

[59] TM

S =

1.0

[59] V

>>

=YES

[59

N] RE

SID

UA

L O

/V [59N

] V

0 >

= YES

[59N

] V

0 >

= 5.0

V

[59N

] D

ELA

Y T

YPE

=D

MT

[59N

] tR

ESET

V0>

10 m

s

[59N

] V

0>>

=5.0

V

[59N

] tV

0>

> =

40 m

s

[59N

] V

0>>

> =

YES

[59N

] TM

S =

1.0

[59N

] tV

0>

= 40 m

s

[47

] N

EG S

EQ O

/V

[47]

V2>

=YE

S

[47]

V2>

=

5.0 V

[47] D

ELA

Y T

YPE

=D

MT

[47]

tRE

SET

V2

>10

ms

[47]

tV

2>

=40

ms

[47]

TM

S =

1.0

[47]

V2>

> =

NO

[27D

] PO

S SE

Q U

/V

[27D

]V1<

=YES

[27D

]V1<

=5.0

V

[81

] FR

EQU

ENC

Y

[81]

F1/F

2/F

3/

F4/F

5/F

6 =

YES

[81]

F1/F

2/F

3/

F4/F

5/F

6 =

50.0

Hz

[81]

tF1/t

F2/t

F3/

tF4/t

F5/t

F6 =

0

ms

[27] tV

<=

40 m

s

[59N

] V

0>

>>

=5.0

V

[59N

] tV

0>

>>

=40 m

s

[47]

V2>

> =

5.0 V

[47]

tV

2>

> =

40

ms

[27D

] D

ELA

Y T

YPE

=C

ST

[27D

] tR

ESET

V1<

10

ms

[27D

] tV

1<

=40

ms

[27D

] TM

S =

1.0

[27D

] V

1<

< =

YES

[27D

] V

1<

< = 5

.0 V

[27D

] tV

1<

< =

40

ms

[59N

] V

0>>

= YES

[27] H

YST

ERES

IS=

1.0

2[5

9]

HYST

ERES

IS =

0.9

8


Page 102/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

LATC

H

OU

TPU

TS

LATC

H t

V <

=N

O

LATC

H t

V <

< = N

O

LATC

H t

V <

<<

= NO

LATC

H t

V >

> = N

O

LATC

H t

V >

>>

= NO

LATC

H t

V0

>>

> =

NO

LATC

H t

V >

=N

O

LATC

H t

V0

>>

= NO

BLO

CK

ING

LO

G 1

/2 t

BLO

CK

1 t

V <

= NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V <

< =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V <

<<

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V >

> =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V >

>>

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V0

>>

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V0

>>

>=

N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

AU

X1 =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

AU

X 2

= N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V >

= NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V0

> = NO

TRIP

OU

TPU

T RL

Y

TRIP

tV

< =

NO

TRIP

tV

<<

=N

O

TRIP

tV

<<

< = N

O

TRIP

tV

>>

=N

O

TRIP

tV

0>

=N

O

TRIP

tV

0>

>>

= NO

TRIP

tV

> =

NO

TRIP

tV

0>

> = N

O

LATC

H t

V0

> = N

O

MiC

OM

P9

22

- M

enus

TRIP

tV

2 >

=N

O

TRIP

tV

2 >

> = N

O

TRIP

tV

1 <

=N

O

TRIP

tF1

=N

O

TRIP

tF6

=N

O

TRIP

tV

1 <

< = N

O

TRIP

tV

>>

> = N

O

LATC

H t

V2

> = NO

LATC

H t

V2

>>

=N

O

LATC

H t

V1

< = NO

LATC

H t

F1 =

NO

LATC

H t

F6 =

NO

LATC

H t

V1

<<

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V2

> =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V2

>>

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V1

< =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

F1 = N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

F6 = N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V1

<<

=N

O

AU

X O

UTP

UT

RLY

TRIP

. C

B8

765

432

000

000

0C

LOS.

CB

V <

tV <

V <

<tV

<<

V <

<<

tV <

<<

V >

tV >

V

>>

tV >

>V

>>

>tV

>>

>V

0 >

tV0 >

V0

>>

tV0

>>

V0

>>

>tV

0 >

>>

TRIP

t A

UX1

= NO

TRIP

t A

UX

2 = N

O

TRIP

EQ

UA

TIO

N A

=N

O

TRIP

EQ

UA

TIO

N B

=N

O

LATC

H t

AU

X 1

= NO

LATC

H t

AU

X 2

= NO

LATC

H E

QU

ATI

ON

A=

N

O

LATC

H E

QU

ATI

ON

B=

N

O


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

AU

X O

UTP

UT

RLY

V2 >

8765

432

0000

000

tV2 >

V2 >

>tV

2 >

>V

1 <

tV1 <

V1 <

<tV

1 <

<F1 tF

1F2 tF

2F3 tF

3F4 tF

4F5 tF

5F6 tf

6tA

UX1

tAU

X2C

B A

LAR

F O

UT

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

INPU

TS 1

/2/3

/4/5

NO

NE

UN

LATC

H52

a52

bC

B FA

ILA

UX

1A

UX

2BL

K L

OG

1BL

K L

OG

2C

HA

NG

SET

DIS

T TR

IG

t A

UX

2 =

20.0

s

t A

UX

1 =

10.0

s

CB

FAIL

EQU

. A

EQU

. B

AC

TIV

E G

ROU

P

LATC

H O

UTP

UT

RELA

YS

OU

TPU

T 2

YES

OU

TPU

T 4

YES

OU

TPU

T 5 Y

ES

OU

TPU

T 7

Y

ES

OU

TPU

T 8

YES

OU

TPU

T 3

YES

OU

TPU

T 6

YES

V <

:

BA

00tV

<V

<<

tV <

<V

<<

<tV

<<

<V

>tV

>V

>>

tV >

>V

>>

>tV

>>

>V

0 >

tV0

>V

0 >

>tV

0 >

>V

0 >

>>

tV0

>>

>

AN

D L

OG

IC E

QU

AT

V2 >

BA

00

tV2 >

V2 >

>tV

2 >

>V

1 <

tV1 <

V1 <

<tV

1 <

<F1 tF

1F2 tF

2F3 tF

3F4 tF

4F5 tF

5F6 tF

6t

AU

X 1

t A

UX

2C

B A

LAR

CB

FAIL

T D

ELA

YEQ

UA

TIO

N

EQU

. A

Top

erat

=0.0

s

EQU

. A

Tre

set =

0.0

s

EQU

. B

Tope

rat

=0.0

s

EQU

. B

Tres

et = 0.0

s

MiC

OM

P9

22

Men

us


Page 104/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

TIM

E PE

AK

VA

LUE

TIM

E W

IND

OW

5 m

in

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

CB

MO

NIT

ORI

NG

CB

OPE

NIN

G T

IME

=83

ms

CB

CLO

SIN

G T

IME

=10

0 m

s

CB

OPE

RATI

ON

S =

RST

= [C

]0

FAU

LT R

ECO

RDD

ISTU

RB R

ECO

RDER

PRE-

TIM

E = 1.

3 s

POST

-TIM

E =

0.2

s

DIS

TURB

REC

TRI

GO

N IN

ST

REC

ORD

REC

ORD

NU

MBE

R5

FAU

LT T

IME

10:4

5:22

:12

FAU

LT D

ATE 02

/05/

00

FAU

LTED

PH

ASE

Phas

e A

B C

TRIP

ELE

MEN

TV

<

VA

MA

GN

ITU

DE

2

2 kV

VB

MA

GN

ITU

DE

22

kV

VC

MA

GN

ITU

DE

20

kV

V0

MA

GN

ITU

DE

1 k

V

AC

TIV

E SE

T G

ROU

P 1

MA

GN

ITU

DE 22

kV

MiC

OM

P9

22

Men

us

CB

SUPE

RVIS

ION

CB

OPE

N S

�vis

ion

?YE

S

CB

CLO

SE S

�vis

ion

YES

CB

CLO

SIN

G T

IME

150.

0 m

s

NB

OPE

RATI

ON

S =

1000

CLO

SE P

ULS

E TI

ME

150

ms

TRIP

PU

LSE

TIM

E 1

50 m

s

CB

OPE

NIN

G T

IME

100

.0 m

s

NB

OPE

R. A

LARM

?YE

S

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

PASS

WO

RD = ****

DES

CRI

PTIO

N =

P923

--

REFE

REN

CE

= ALS

T

SOFT

WA

RE V

ERSI

ON

4.C

FREQ

UEN

CY

=50

Hz

INPU

TS :

543

21

000

00

OP

PARA

MET

ERS

OU

TPU

TS :

8765

4321

000

0000

0

DA

TE1

2/09

/01

TIM

E1

0:33

:10

GEN

ERA

L

CO

NN

ECTI

ON 3 V

pn

PRO

TEC

TIO

NPR

OT

P-P

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

RMS

VA

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

VT

RATI

O

MA

IN V

T PR

IMA

RY =

20.

00

kV

MA

IN V

T SE

C�Y

=1

00 V

LED

5 /

6 /

7 /

8

LED

CO

NF.

V<

=Y

/NtV

< =

Y/N

V<

< =

Y/N

tV<

< =

Y/N

V<

<<

=Y

/NtV

<<

< =

Y/N

V>

=Y

/NtV

> =

Y/N

V>

> =

Y/N

tV>

> =

Y/N

V>

>>

=Y

/NtV

>>

> =

Y/N

V0

> =

Y/N

tV0

> =

Y

/NV

0>

> =

Y/N

tV0

>>

=

Y/N

V0

>>

> =

Y/N

tV0

>>

> =

Y

/NtA

UX1

=Y

/NtA

UX2

=Y

/NV

2>

=Y

/NtV

2>

=Y

/NV

2>

> =

Y/N

tV2

>>

=Y

/NV

1<

=Y

/NtV

1<

=Y

/NV

1<

<=

Y/N

tV1

<<

=Y

/NF1

/F2/

F3/F

4/F5

/F6

=Y

/NtF

1/tF

2/t

F3tF

4/tF

5/t

F6

=Y

/Nf.O

UT

OF

R =

Y/N

df/d

t1�

Y/N

df/d

t6

CO

NFI

G S

ELEC

T

CH

AN

GE

GRO

UP

INPU

T

ED

GE

MiC

OM

P9

23

Men

us

E/G

nd V

T PR

IMA

RY=

20.

00

kV

E/G

nd V

T SE

C�Y

=1

00 V

AC

TIV

E G

ROU

P =

1

SETT

ING

GRO

UP

=1

FREQ

. A

nd d

f/dt

CO

NFI

G

df/d

t C

YC

LE N

B=

1

df/d

t V

ALI

DA

TN

B=

2

PRO

TEC

TIO

NBL

OC

K=

20V

ALA

RMS

INST

.SEL

F-RE

SET

?

YES

ALA

RMS

BATT

ERY

=

N

O


Page 106/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

INPU

TS

INPU

TS:

543

21

1111

1

VO

LTA

GE

INPU

TS=

DC

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

MiC

OM

P9

23

Men

us

VA

=0.

00 V

VB

=0.

00 V

VC

=0.

00 V

VA

B =

0.00

V

VC

A =

0.00

V

V0

=0.

00 V

MEA

SURE

MEN

TS

V1

=0.

00 V

V2

=0

.00

V

VBC

=0.

00 V

FREQ

UEN

CY

=XX

.XX

Hz

MA

X. &

AV

ERA

GE

VRS

T =

[C

]

MA

X. V

A R

MS

=0.

00 V

MA

X. V

B RM

S =

0.00

V

MA

X. V

C R

MS

=0.

00 V

MA

X. V

AB

RMS

=0.

00 V

MA

X. V

BC R

MS

=0.

00 V

AV

ERA

GE

VA

RM

S =

0.0

0 V

AV

ERA

GE

VB

RMS

=0

.00

V

AV

ERA

GE

VA

B RM

S =

0.0

0 V

AV

ERA

GE

VBC

RM

S =

0.

00

V

AV

ERA

GE

VC

A R

MS

=0.

00

V

MA

X. V

CA

RM

S =

0.00

V

AV

ERA

GE

VC

RM

S =

0.0

0 V

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N ?

YES

BAU

D R

ATE

=19

200

Bd

PARI

TY =

NO

NE

STO

P BI

TS =

1

RELA

Y A

DD

RESS

= 1

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N

DA

TE F

ORM

AT=

P

RIV

ATE


MiC

OM

P9

23

Men

us

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

PRO

TEC

TIO

N

G1/G

2

[27

] U

ND

ERV

OLT

AG

E

[27] V

< =

YES

[27] V

< =

5.0

V

[27]

DEL

AY T

YPE

=D

MT

[27] tR

ESET

V< 10 m

s

[27] V

<<

=5.0

V

[27] tV

<<

=10 m

s

[27] V

<<

< =YES

[27] V

<<

< =5.0

V

[27] tV

<<

< = 10

ms

[27] TM

S =

1.0

[27] V

<<

=YES

[59

] O

VER

VO

LTA

GE

[59] V

> =

YES

[59] V

> =

130.

0 V

[59] D

ELA

Y T

YPE

=D

MT

[59] tR

ESET

V> 10 m

s

[59] tV

> =

40 m

s

[59] V

>>

=130.

0 V

[59] tV

>>

=40 m

s

[59] V

>>

> = Y

ES

[59] V

>>

> = 1

30.

0 V

[59] tV

>>

> = 40 m

s

[59] TM

S =

1.0

[59] V

>>

=YES

[59

N] RE

SID

UA

L O

/V [59N

] V

0 >

= YES

[59N

] V

0 >

= 5.0 V

[59N

] D

ELA

Y TY

PE =

DM

T

[59N

] tR

ESET

V0>

10 m

s

[59N

] V

0>>

=5.

0 V

[59N

] tV

0>

> =

40 m

s

[59N

] V

0>>

> =

YES

[59N

] TM

S =

1.0

[59N

] tV

0>

= 40 m

s

[47

] N

EG S

EQ O

/V

[47] V

2>

=YE

S

[47] V

2>

=

5.0 V

[47]

DEL

AY T

YPE

=D

MT

[47] tR

ESET

V2>

10 m

s

[47] tV

2>

=40

ms

[47] TM

S =

1.0

[47] V

2>

> =

NO

[27D

] PO

S SE

Q U

/V

[27D

]V1<

=YES

[27D

]V1<

=5.0

V

[81]

FREQ

UEN

CY

[81]

F1/

F2/F

3/F4

/F5/F

6 =

YES

[81]

F1/

F2/F

3/F4

/F5/F

6 =

50.

0 H

z

[81]

tF1

/tF2

/tF3

/tF

4/t

F5/t

F6 =

0 m

s

[27] tV

<=

40 m

s

[59N

] V

0>

>>

=5.0

V

[59N

] tV

0>

>>

=40 m

s

[47] V

2>

> =

5.0 V

[47] tV

2>

> =

40

ms

[27D

] D

ELA

Y TY

PE =

CST

[27D

] tR

ESET

V1<

10 m

s

[27D

] tV

1<

=40 m

s

[27D

] TM

S =

1.0

[27D

] V

1<<

=

YES

[27D

] V

1<<

= 5.0

V

[27D

] tV

1<

< =

40 m

s

[59N

] V

0>>

= YES

[81R]

FRE

Q C

HA

NG

EO

F RA

TE

[81R

]df

/dt1

= No

[81R

]df

/dt1

=

1.0

Hzs

[81R

]df/

dt6 = N

o

[81R

]df/

dt6 =

1.0

Hzs

[81R

]df/

dt2 = N

o

[81R

]df/

dt2 =

1.0

Hzs

[81R

]df/

dt3 = N

o

[81R

]df/

dt3 =

1.0

Hzs

[81R

]df/

dt4 = N

o

[81R

]df/

dt4 =

1.0

Hzs

[81R

]df/

dt5

= No

[81R

]df/

dt5

=

1.0

Hzs

[27] H

YST

ERES

IS=

1.0

2[5

9] H

YST

ERES

IS =

0.9

8


Page 108/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

LATC

H

OU

TPU

TS

LATC

H t

V <

=N

O

LATC

H t

V <

< = N

O

LATC

H t

V <

<<

= NO

LATC

H t

V >

> = N

O

LATC

H t

V >

>>

= NO

LATC

H t

V0

>>

> =

NO

LATC

H t

AU

X 1

= NO

LATC

H t

AU

X 2

= NO

LATC

H t

V >

=N

O

LATC

H t

V0

>>

= NO

BLO

CK

ING

LO

G 1

/2 t

BLO

CK

1 t

V <

= NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V <

< =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V <

<<

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V >

> =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V >

>>

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V0

>>

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V0

>>

>=

N

OBL

OC

K 1

tA

UX1

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

AU

X 2

= N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V >

= NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V0

> = NO

TRIP

OU

TPU

T RL

Y

TRIP

tV

< =

NO

TRIP

tV

<<

=N

O

TRIP

tV

<<

< = N

O

TRIP

tV

>>

=N

O

TRIP

tV

0>

=N

O

TRIP

tV

0>

>>

= NO

TRIP

t A

UX1

= NO

TRIP

t A

UX

2 = N

O

TRIP

EQ

UA

TIO

N A

=N

O

TRIP

EQ

UA

TIO

N B

=N

O

TRIP

tV

> =

NO

TRIP

tV

0>

> = N

O

LATC

H t

V0

> = N

O

MiC

OM

P9

23

- M

enus

TRIP

tV

2 >

=N

O

TRIP

tV

2 >

> = N

O

TRIP

tV

1 <

=N

O

TRIP

tF1

=N

O

TRIP

tF6

=N

O

TRIP

df/d

t6 =

NO

TRIP

tV

1 <

< = N

O

TRIP

df/

dt1

=N

O

TRIP

tV

>>

> = N

O

LATC

H E

QU

ATI

ON

A=

N

O

LATC

H E

QU

ATI

ON

B=

N

OLA

TCH

tV

2 >

= NO

LATC

H t

V2

>>

=N

O

LATC

H t

V1

< = NO

LATC

H t

F1 =

NO

LATC

H t

F6 =

NO

LATC

H d

f/dt

6 =

NO

LATC

H t

V1

<<

=N

O

LATC

H d

f/dt

1 =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V2

> =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V2

>>

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

V1

< =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

F1 = N

O

BLO

CK

1 t

F6 = N

O

BLO

CK

1 d

f/dt

6 =

NO

BLO

CK

1 t

V1

<<

=N

O

BLO

CK

1 d

f/dt

1 =

NO

AU

X O

UTP

UT

RLY

TRIP

. C

B8

765

432

000

000

0C

LOS.

CB

V <

tV <

V <

<tV

<<

V <

<<

tV <

<<

V >

tV >

V

>>

tV >

>V

>>

>tV

>>

>V

0 >

tV0 >

V0

>>

tV0

>>

V0

>>

>tV

0 >

>>

LATC

H E

QU

ATI

ON

C=

N

O

LATC

H E

QU

ATI

ON

D=

N

O

TRIP

EQ

UA

TIO

N C

=N

O

TRIP

EQ

UA

TIO

N D

=N

O


DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

AU

X O

UTP

UT

RLY

V2

>87

654

32

000

000

0tV

2 >

V2

>>

tV2

>>

V1

<tV

1 <

V1

<<

tV1

<<

F1 tF1

F2 tF2

F3 tF3

F4 tF4

F5 tF5

F6 tf6

df/d

t1df

/dt2

df/d

t3df

/dt4

df/d

t5df

/dt6

tAU

X1tA

UX2

CB

ALA

RF

OU

T

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

MiC

OM

P9

23

- M

enus

INPU

TS 1

/2/3

/4/5

NO

NE

UN

LATC

H5

2 a

52

bC

B FA

ILA

UX

1A

UX

2BL

K L

OG

1BL

K L

OG

2C

HA

NG

SET

DIS

T TR

IG

t A

UX

2 =

20.0

s

t A

UX

1 =

10.0

s

CB

FAIL

EQU

. A

EQU

. B

EQU

. C

EQU

. D

AC

TIV

E G

ROU

P

LATC

H O

UTP

UT

RELA

YS

OU

TPU

T 2

YES

OU

TPU

T 4

YES

OU

TPU

T 5

YES

OU

TPU

T 7

Y

ES

OU

TPU

T 8

YES

OU

TPU

T 3

Y

ES

OU

TPU

T 6

YES

V <

:D

CBA

000

0tV

<V

<<

tV <

<V

<<

<tV

<<

<V

>tV

>V

>>

tV >

>V

>>

>tV

>>

>V

0 >

tV0

>V

0 >

>tV

0 >

>V

0 >

>>

tV0

>>

>

AN

D L

OG

IC E

QU

AT

V2

>D

CBA

00

00

tV2

>V

2 >

>tV

2 >

>V

1 <

tV1

<V

1 <

<tV

1 <

<F1 tF

1F2 tF

2F3 tF

3F4 tF

4F5 tF

5F6 tF

6df

/dt1

df/d

t2df

/dt3

df/d

t4df

/dt5

df/d

t6t

AU

X 1

t A

UX

2C

B A

LAR

CB

FAIL

T D

ELA

YEQ

UA

TIO

N

EQU

. A

Top

erat

=0.

0 s

EQU

. A

Tre

set

=0.

0 s

EQU

. B

Tope

rat

=0.

0 s

EQU

. B

Tres

et = 0.0

s

EQU

. C

Top

erat

=0.

0 s

EQU

. C

Tre

set

=0.

0 s

EQU

. D

Top

erat

=0.

0 s

EQU

. D

Tre

set

=0.

0 s


Page 110/110 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

TIM

E PE

AK

VA

LUE

TIM

E W

IND

OW

5 m

in

DEF

AU

LT D

ISPL

AY

CB

MO

NIT

ORI

NG

CB

OPE

NIN

G T

IME

=83

ms

CB

CLO

SIN

G T

IME

=10

0 m

s

CB

OPE

RATI

ON

S =

RST

= [

C]

0

FAU

LT R

ECO

RDD

ISTU

RB R

ECO

RDER

PRE-

TIM

E = 1.3

s

POST

-TIM

E =

0.2

s

DIS

TURB

REC

TRI

GO

N IN

ST

REC

ORD

REC

ORD

NU

MBE

R5

FAU

LT T

IME

10:4

5:22

:12

FAU

LT D

ATE 02

/05/

00

FAU

LTED

PH

ASE

Phas

e A

B C

TRIP

ELE

MEN

TV

<

VA

MA

GN

ITU

DE

2

2 kV

VB

MA

GN

ITU

DE

22

kV

VC

MA

GN

ITU

DE

20

kV

V0

MA

GN

ITU

DE

1 k

V

AC

TIV

E SE

T G

ROU

P 1

MA

GN

ITU

DE 22

kV

MiC

OM

P9

23

Men

us

CB

SUPE

RVIS

ION

CB

OPE

N S

�vis

ion

?YE

S

CB

CLO

SE S

�vis

ion

YES

CB

CLO

SIN

G T

IME

150

.0 m

s

NB

OPE

RATI

ON

S =

100

0

CLO

SE P

ULS

E TI

ME

150

ms

TRIP

PU

LSE

TIM

E 15

0 m

s

CB

OPE

NIN

G T

IME

10

0.0

ms

NB

OPE

R. A

LARM

?YE

S

AU

TOM

AT.

CTR

L

FREQ

.DIS

TURB

REC

FREQ

.DIS

TURB

REC

TRIG

=

ON

FRE

Q

Technical Guide P92x/EN CT/E11


CommunicationsModbus MappingCourier DatabaseIEC 60870-5-103

Technical Guide P92x/EN CT/E11Modbus ProtocolMiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 1/118

CONTENTS

1. MODBUS PROTOCOL 5

1.1 MODBUS communication characteristics 5

1.1.1 MODBUS network characteristics 5

1.1.2 Parameters of the MODBUS connection 6

1.1.3 Synchronisation of exchanged messages 6

1.1.4 Message validity check 6

1.1.5 Address of the MiCOM relays 7

1.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays 7

1.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol 7

1.3.1 Frame size received by the MiCOM P92x relay 7

1.3.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P92x relay 8

1.3.3 Messages validity check 8

1.4 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records 9

1.4.1 Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM. 9

1.4.2 Service request 10

1.4.3 Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel 10

1.4.4 Request to retrieve an index frame 10

1.5 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records 10

1.5.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event 11

1.5.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated event 11

1.6 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records 11

1.6.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record 12

1.6.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record 12

1.7 MiCOM P921-P922-P923 database organisation 13

1.7.1 Description of the MODBUS application mapping 13

1.7.2 Page 0 : Product information, remote signalling and remote measurements 14

1.7.3 Page 1 : Remote settings 17

1.7.4 Page 2 : Protective functions - Remote settings for group 1. 25

1.7.4.1 Undervoltage protection (P921- P922 and P923) 25

1.7.4.2 Overvoltage protection (P921 -P922 and P923) 26

1.7.4.3 Zero sequence overvoltage protection (P921- P922 and P923) 27

1.7.4.4 Negative sequence overvoltage protection (P922- P923) 28

1.7.4.5 Positive sequence undervoltage protection (P922 � P923) 28

1.7.4.6 Under/overfrequency (P922 � P923) 29

1.7.4.7 Rate of change of frequency ( Only MiCOM P923) 29

P92x/EN CT/E11 Technical GuideModbus Protocol

Page 2/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.7.5 Page 3 : Protective functions - Remote settings for group 2. 30

1.7.5.1 Undervoltage protection (P922 and P923) 30

1.7.5.2 Overvoltage protection (P922 and P923) 31

1.7.5.3 Zero sequence overvoltage protection (P922 and P923) 31

1.7.5.4 Negative sequence overvoltage protection (P922 and P923) 32

1.7.5.5 Positive sequence undervoltage protection (P922 and P923) 33

1.7.5.6 Under/overfrequency protection (P922 and P923) 34

1.7.5.7 Rate of change of frequency ( Only MiCOM P923) 35

1.7.6 Page 4 : Remote commands 35

1.7.7 Pages 5 and 6 : reserved 35

1.7.8 Page 7 : Self tests results of the relay MiCOM 35

1.7.9 Page 8 : Time synchronisation 36

1.7.10 Page 9 to 21h : Disturbance records data (25 pages) (MiCOM P922 and P923 only)37

1.7.11 Page 22h : Disturbance record index frame (MiCOM P922 and P923 only) 39

1.7.12 Page 35h : Events record (MiCOM P922 and P923 only) 39

1.7.13 Page 36h : Oldest event data (MiCOM P922 and P923 only) 39

1.7.14 Page 37h : 5 last fault records data (MiCOM P922 and P923 only) 40

1.7.15 Pages 38h to 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and channel (MiCOM P922and P923 only) 40

1.7.16 Page 3Dh : Number of disturbance records available (MiCOM P922 and P923 only)41

1.7.17 Page 3Eh : Oldest fault record data (MiCOM P922 and P923 only). 41

1.7.18 Page 40h: Status Frame of Frequency Disturbance Record (MiCOM P923 only). 41

1.7.19 Page 41h: selection of Frequency Disturbance Record and channel (MiCOM P923only). 42

1.7.20 Pages 42h to 49h : Datas of Frequency Disturbance Record (MiCOM P923 only). 42

1.7.21 Page 4Ah: Frequency Disturbance Record Frame index and acknowledgment(MiCOM P923 only). 43

1.8 Description of the mapping format 44

1.9 Specific formats for the records files (P922 and P923 only) 57

1.10 Specific formats for the frequency disturbance records files (P923 only) 65

2. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE 69

2.1 K-BUS 69

2.1.1 K-Bus Transmission Layer 69

2.1.2 K-Bus Connection 69

2.1.3 Auxiliary equipment 70

2.2 Relay Courier Database 70

2.2.1 Main Reference Cells 70

2.2.2 List of events generated by the relay MiCOM P922 and P923 71


2.3 Setting Changes 74

2.4 Systems Integration Data 74

2.4.1 Address of the relay 74

2.4.2 Measured Values 75

2.4.3 Status word 75

2.4.4 Unit Status word 75

2.4.5 Control status word 75

2.4.6 Logic Input status word 76

2.4.7 Output Relay Status word 76

2.4.8 Alarm Information 76

2.4.9 Protection Indication 76

2.4.10 Control and supervision 78

2.4.11 Remote Change of setting 79

2.5 Events Extraction (MiCOM P922 and P923 only) 79

2.5.1 Automatic Event Extraction 79

2.5.2 Events Types 79

2.5.3 Event Format 80

2.5.4 Manual record Extraction 80

2.6 Disturbance Record Extraction 80

3. APPENDIX 1 81

4. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE 109

4.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer 109

4.2 Initialization 109

4.3 Time Synchronization (P922 & P932 only) 110

4.4 Spontaneous Events (P922 & P923 only) 110

4.5 General Interrogation 110

4.6 Cyclic Measurements 110

4.7 Commands 110

4.8 Disturbance Records (P922 & P923 only) 111

4.9 Blocking of Monitor Direction 111

5. APPENDIX 2 112

5.1 IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASES 112

5.1.1 List of Events produced by the relay 112

5.1.2 System State 114


Page 4/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

6. PROCESSED COMMANDS 116

6.1 System Commands 116

6.2 General Commands (ASDU 20) (Control direction) 116

7. RELAY RE-INITIALIZATION 117

8. CYCLIC MESSAGES (ASDU 9 AND ASDU 77) 117


1. MODBUS PROTOCOL

The MiCOM P921-P922-P923 relay offer MODBUS TM RTU mode communication viaa rear RS485 port.

1.1 MODBUS communication characteristics

1.1.1 MODBUS network characteristics

The MODBUS protocol is based on the master-slave principle with the MiCOM P921or P922-P923 relay as slave.

The MODBUS protocol allows the master to read and to write one or several bits, oneor several words and to remote the event logging data.

The access to the network can be :

� either according to a query/response principle

SlaveMiCOM P921 n˚1



Response

Query

Master

P0410 ENa

� or according to a broadcast message sent from the master to all the slaves.




Broadcast

Master

P0411ENa

in that case :

� compulsory, the broadcast message is a writing order,

� the slaves return no response,

� the protocol is RTU mode. Each byte of the data frame is coded according to ahexadecimal base.

� At the end of each frame, two bytes of CRC16 validity checksum are applied onthe whole of the frame content.


Page 6/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.1.2 Parameters of the MODBUS connection

The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows :

� Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz).

� MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode.

� The baud rate can be configurated by operator dialogue in the front panel ofthe relay :

Baud rate

300

600

1200

2400

4800

9600

19200

38400

� Mode de transmission des characters paramétrable par dialogue opérateur

Transmission mode

1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop : total 10 bits

1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits

1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits

1 start / 8 bits / 2 stop : total 11 bits

1.1.3 Synchronisation of exchanged messages

Any character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to atransmission time of 3 bytes is considered as a frame start.

1.1.4 Message validity check

The validation of a trame is performed with a 16-bit cyclical redundancy check (CRC).The generator polynomial is :

1 + x² + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h


1.1.5 Address of the MiCOM relays

The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1and 255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages.

1.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays

The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are :

Function 1 or 2 : Reading of n bits

Function 3 or 4 : Reading of n words

Function 5 : Writing of 1 bit

Function 6 : Writing of 1 word

Function 7 : Fast reading of 8 bits

Function 8 : Reading of the diagnosis counters

Function 11 : Reading of the Event counter

Function 15: Writing of n bits

Function 16 : Writing of n words

1.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol

MODBUS is a master-slave protocol whereby every exchange involves a master queryand a slave response.

1.3.1 Frame size received by the MiCOM P92x relay

Frame transmitted by the master (query) :

Slave number Function code Information CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes

Slave number :

The slave number is situated between 1 and 255.

Function code :

Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16).

Information :

Contains the parameters of the selected function.

CRC16 :

Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master.

NOTA : the MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast framessent out by the master.


Page 8/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.3.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P92x relay

Frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) :

Slave number Function code Data CRC16

1 byte 1 byte n bytes 2 bytes

Slave number :


Function code :

Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16).

Data :

Contains the response data to master query.

CRC16 :

Value of the CRC16 calculated by the MiCOM relay.

1.3.3 Messages validity check

When the MiCOM relay receives a master query, it validates the frame :

� If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. The MiCOM relay does not reply to thequery. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, thisis the only case of non-reply by the MiCOM relay to a master query.

� If the CRC is correct but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sents tothe master a exception response.

Exception frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) :

Slave number Function code Error code CRC16

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes

Slave number :


Function code :

The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the exception frame is the code inwhich the most significant bit (bit7) is forced to 1.


Error code :

Among the 8 exception codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay managestwo of them :

� code 01 : Function code unauthorised or unknown.

� code 03 : A value of the data field is unauthorised (incorrect code).� Control of pages being read.

� Control of pages being written.

� Control of address in pages.

� Length of request messages.

CRC16:

The CRC16 value is calculated by the slave.

1.4 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records

To retrieve a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exactgiven order :

1. (optional) : Send a request to know the number of disturbance recordsavailable in the saved RAM.

2. To retrieve the data of one channel:

2a � (compulsory) : Send a service request specifying the record numberand the channel number which have to be retrieved.2b � (compulsory) : Send requests to retrieve the data of a disturbancerecord channel as many time as needed.2c � (compulsory) : send a request to retrieve the index frame.

3. Process the same operation (as described in the item 2) for each channel.

1.4.1 Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM.

Slave number Function code Word address Word number CRC

xx 03h 3Dh 00 00 24h xx.........xx

This request may be answered an error message with the error code :

EVT_NOK (0F) : No record available.

NOTA : If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will containzero value in the non-used words.


Page 10/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.4.2 Service request

This request shall be send before to retrieve the sample data of a disturbance recordchannel. It allows to specify the record number and the channel number which haveto be retrieved. It allows also to know the number of samples in the channel.


xx 03h Refer tomapping

00 0Bh xx.........xx

This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible :

CODE_DEF_RAM (02) : Saved RAM failure.

CODE_EVT_NOK (03) : No disturbance record available in the saved RAM.

1.4.3 Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel


xx 03h Refer to mapping 1 to 7Dh xx......xx

This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible :

CODE_DEP_DATA (04) : The requested sample number is superior thanthe number of samples in the specifiedchannel.

CODE_SERV_NOK (05) : The record number and the channel numberhave not been specified by a service request.

NOTA : This type of request can retrieve up to125 words. A sample iscoded on 1 word (16 bits).

1.4.4 Request to retrieve an index frame


xx 03h 22h 00 00 07h xx........xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code :

CODE_SERV_NOK (05) : The record number and the channel numberhave not been specified by a service request.

1.5 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records

Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record :

1. Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event.

2. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.


1.5.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event


xx 03h 36h 00 00 09h xx........xx


EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : An event is being written into the saved RAM.

NOTA : On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the eventrecord acknowledgement :Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.Non automatic event record acknowledgement on eventretrieval.

a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 - mapping address 0400h) shall beset to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged.

b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 - mapping address 0400h) shall beset to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged.

To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit13 of this frame (format F9 � mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.

1.5.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated event


xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 09h xx........xx


EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : An event is being written into the saved RAM.

NOTA : This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.

1.6 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records

Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record :

1. Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record.

2. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.


Page 12/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.6.1 Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record


xx 03h 3Eh 00 00 0Fh xx........xx

NOTA : On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the faultrecord acknowledgement:

a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.

b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on eventretrieval.

a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 - mapping address 0400h) shall beset to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged.

b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval :

The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 - mapping address 0400h) shall beset to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged.To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14of this frame (format F9 � mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1.

1.6.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record


xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 0Fh xx........xx

NOTA : This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.


1.7 MiCOM P921-P922-P923 database organisation

1.7.1 Description of the MODBUS application mapping

Pages 0 to 8 : Contain the MiCOM P921-P922-P923 parameters.

Pages 9 to 3Dh : Contain the data of the event records, data of the fault valuerecords, and data of the disturbance records, these pages are only available forMiCOM P922 and P923.

Pages 40h to 4Ah : Contain the data of the frequency disturbance records MiCOMP923.

These pages are explained in the following way :

Page No Page content Access

Page 0 Information of product, remote signalling, remotemeasurements

Reading

Page 1 Remote settings for general parameters Reading & writing

Page 2 Remote settings for protection group number 1 Reading & writing

Page 3 Remote settings for protection group number 2 Reading & writing

Page 4 Remote controls Writing

Page 5 Reserved Not accessible

Page 6 Reserved Not accessible

Page 7 Self tests results Quick reading

Page 8 Synchronisation Writing

Pages 9hto 21h

Disturbance record data Reading

Page 22h Index frame for the disturbance records Reading

Pages 23hto 34h

Reserved Not accessible

Page 35h Event record data Reading

Page 36h Data of the oldest event Reading

Page 37h Fault value record data Reading

Pages 38hto 3Ch

Selection of the disturbance record and selectionof its channel

Reading

Page 3Dh Number of available disturbance records Reading

Page 3Eh Data of the oldest fault value record Reading

Pages 40hto 4Ah

Data of the frequency disturbance records Reading


Page 14/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.7.2 Page 0 : Product information, remote signalling and remote measurements

Read only access

Address Group Description Settingsrange

Step Unit Format Defaultsettings

0000 Productinformation

Description of the relaycharacters 1 and 2

- F10

0001 Description of the relaycharacters 3 and 4

- F10 P9

0002 Description of the relaycharacters 5 and 6

- F10 21 or 22 or23

0003 Factory referencecharacters 1 and 2

- F10 AL

0004 Factory referencecharacters 3 and 4

- F10 ST

0005 Software version 10 - xx 1 - F21

0006 Communication type 0-2 1 - F41

0007 Internal ratio :numerator

F1

0008 Internal ratio :denominator

F1

0009 Start information(VDEW)

F24

000A to000C

Reserved

000D Active configurationgroup

1-2 F1

000E Setting mode 0-1 1 - F24 0

000F Status of the protection F45

0010 Remotesignalling

Logic input 0 to 3 or 31 1 - F12

0011 Logic data 0 to 03FF 2n - F20

0012 Internal logics 0 to FFFF 2n - F22

0013 Output relays 0 to 1F or1FF

1 - F13

0014 Output information forthreshold : V>

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0015 Output information forthreshold : V>>

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0016 Output information forthreshold : V>>>

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0017 Output information forthreshold : V<

0 to FFFF 1 - F47

0018 Output information forthreshold : V<<

0 to FFFF 1 - F47

0019 Output information forthreshold : V<<<

0 to FFFF 1 - F47

001A Output information forthreshold : V0>

0 to FFFF 1 - F16




001B Output information forthreshold : V0>>

0 to FFFF 1 - F16

001C Output information forthreshold : V0>>>

0 to FFFF 1 - F16

001D Output information forthreshold : V2>,V2>>, V1<, V1<<

0 to FFFF 1 - F48

001E Output information forthreshold f1

0 to 7 1 - F49

001F Output information forthreshold f2

0 to 7 F49

0020 Output information forthreshold f3

0 to 7 F49


0 to 7 F49


0 to 7 F49


0 to 7 F49

0024 Output information for :"Equation A", "EquationB", "tAUX1", "tAUX2" and"Alarm CB Sup."�Equation C �,�Equation D�

0 to FFFF 1 - F38

0025 Not acknowledgedalarms: "Equation A","Equation B", "tAUX1","tAUX2" and "Alarm CBSup."�Equation C�,�Equation D�

0 to FFFF 1 - F38

0026 Number of disturbancerecords available

0 to 5 1 - F31

0027 Trip information (RL1) 0 to 1 0 F1

0028 Memorisation of thethreshold V>

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

0029 Memorisation of thethreshold V>>

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

002A Memorisation of thethreshold V>>>

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

002B Memorisation of thethreshold V<

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

002C Memorisation of thethreshold V<<

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

002D Memorisation of thethreshold V<<<

0 to FFFF 1 - F17

002E Not acknowledgedalarms : Flag 1

F36

002F Not acknowledgedalarms : Flag 2

F37


Page 16/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

ProductAddress Group Description Settings range Step Unit Format Default

settings P921 P922/ P923

0030 Measurements True RMS phasevoltage VA

0 to500 000 000

1 V/100 F18 X X X

0032 True RMS phasevoltage VB

0 to500 000 000

1 V/100 F18 X X X

0034 True RMS phasevoltage VC

0 to500 000 000

1 V/100 F18 X X X

0036 True RMS residualvoltage Vr

0 to500 000 000

1 V/100 F18 X X X

0038 Positive seq.voltage(fundamental)

1 V/100 F18 X X

003A Negative seq.voltage(fundamental)

1 V/100 F18 X X

003C Signal Period µsec F1 X X

003D Frequency 4000 - 8000 1 1/100 Hz F1 X X

003E Maximum value ofthe phase A voltage

0 to500 000 000

1 V/100 F18 X X

0040 Maximum value ofthe phase B voltage

0 to500 000 000

1 V/100 F18 X X

0042 Maximum value ofthe phase C voltage

0 to500 000 000

1 V/100 F18 X X

0044 Average value ofthe phase A voltage

0 to500 000 000

1 V/100 F18 X X

0046 Average value ofthe phase B voltage

0 to500 000 000

1 V/100 F18 X X

0048 Average value ofthe phase C voltage

0 to500 000 000

1 V/100 F18 X X

004A to004F

Reserved X X X

0050 Fourier Module Module VA - F1 X X X

0051 Module VB - F1 X X X

0052 Module VC - F1 X X X

0053 Module Vo - F1 X X X

0054 FourierArgument

Argument VA - F1 X X X

0055 Argument VB - F1 X X X

0056 Argument VC - F1 X X X

0057 Argument Vo - F1 X X X

0058 Positive seq. Voltagemodule

- F1 X X

0059 Negative seq.voltage module

- F1 X X

005A to005F

Reserved X X X




0060 Memorisation of thelatched output relays (1)

F6

0061 Reset of the latched outputrelays (1)

F6

0062-0063

Reserved

0064 df/dt protectioninformation

F58

0065 Memorization of the df/dtprotection information

F58

0066 to006F

Reserved

1.7.3 Page 1 : Remote settings

Read and write access



0100 Remotesettings

Address 1 to 255 1 - F1 1

0101 Reserved - - - - -

0102 Passwordcharacters 1 and 2

32 -127 1 - F10 AA

0103 Passwordcharacters 3 and 4

32 -127 1 - F10 AA

0104 Frequency 50-60 10 Hz F1 50

0105 to108

Reserved

0109 Default display 1-4 1 - F26 1

010A User reference(characters 1 and 2)

32-127 1 F10 AL

010B User reference(characters 3 and 4)

32-127 1 F10 ST

010C Fault number to bedisplayed (P922 & P923only)

1-5 1 F31 5

010D Configuration of thevalidation edge of thelogic inputs

0 F12 0

010E Reserved

010F Type of input voltage Ofthe logic inputs

0-1 1 F50 0

CBsupervision

(P922-P923 ) only

0110 CB operation number 1 F1

0111 CB operating time 1 1/100 sec F1

0112 to117

Reserved

0118 CB closing time 1 1/100 sec F1

0119 to011E

Reserved


Page 18/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923



011F Latched relays F14

Ratios

0120 Phase VT :primary value

10 to 100000ou22 to 48

1 10 V F51 2000

0122 Phase VT :secondary value

570 to 1300ou2200 to 4800

1 V/10 F1 1000

0123 Residual VT :primary value

10 to 100000ou22 to 48

1 10 V F51 2000

0125 Residual VT : secondaryvalue

570 to 1300ou 2200 to4800

1 V/10 F1 1000

0126 Connection 0 to 3 1 F52 0

0127 Protection 0 to 1 1 F53 0

0128 Integration time (numberof cycles for calculationof the average df/dt)

1 - 200 1 F1 1

0129 Confirmation number fordf/dt protection operation

2 or 4 2 F1 4

012A Under voltage blockingthreshold (U<Blk ) forfrequency elements

to 1300or200 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

012B to012F

Reserved

Communication

0130 Baud rate 0 to 7 1 - F4 6 = 19200bauds

0131 Parity 0 to 2 1 - F5 0 = without

0132 Reserved

0133 Number of stop bits 0 to 1 1 - F29 0 = 1 stopbit

0134 Comm. available 0 to 1 1 - F30 1 = COMavailable

0135 Date Format 0 to 1 0 F33

0136 to013F

Reserved

0140 Setting group Active setting group 1 to 2(P922/P923)1 (P921)

1 - F1 1

0141 Validation ofinstantaneous selfresetting

0 to 1 1 F1 0

0142 Configuration of thechange of the settinggroup

0 to 1 1 F60 0

0143 Configuration of Batteryand RAM error alarms

0 to 1 1 F1 0

0144 to014F

Reserved




0150 Ledsconfiguration

Led 5 1st part 1 - F19 0

0151 Led 6 1st part 1 - F19 0

0152 Led 7 1st part 1 - F19 0

0153 Led 8 1st part 1 F19 0

0154 Led 5 2nd part 1 F19' 0

0155 Led 6 2nd part 1 F19' 0

0156 Led 7 2nd part 1 F19' 0

0157 Led 8 2nd part 1 F19' 0

0158 Led 5 3rd part 1 F19'' 0

0159 Led 6 3rd part 1 F19'' 0

015A Led 7 3rd part 1 F19'' 0

015B Led 8 3rd part 1 F19'' 0

015C to015F

Reserved

0160 Logic inputsconfiguration

Logic input 1 VTA - F15 0

0161 Logic input 2 VTA - F15 0

0162 Logic input 3 (P922-P923)

VTA - F15 0


VTA - F15 0


VTA - F15 0

0165 Allocation ofthe protectioninformation tothe auxiliaryoutput contact(RL2 to RL8)

df/dt1 0 to 127 1 - F14 0

0166 df/d2 0 to 127 1 - F14 0

0167 df/dt3 0 to 127 1 - F14 0

0168 df/dt4 0 to 127 1 - F14 0

0169 df/dt5 0 to 127 1 - F14 0

016A df/dt6 0 to 127 1 - F14 0

016B Allocation ofthe protectioninformation tothe Logicequations

df/dt1 0 to 15 1 - F54 0

016C df/dt2 0 to 15 1 - F54 0

016D df/dt3 0 to 15 1 - F54 0

016E df/dt4 0 to 15 1 - F54 0

016F df/dt5 0 to 15 1 - F54 0


Page 20/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923



0170 Allocation ofthe informationto the auxiliaryoutput contact(RL2 to RL8)

Trip 0 - 7 or0 � 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0171 Closing order 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0172 tV< 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0173 tV<< 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0174 tV<<< 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0175 tV> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0176 tV>> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0177 tV>>> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0178 tVo> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0179 tVo>> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

017A tVo>>> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

017B V< 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

017C V<< 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

017D V<<< 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

017E V> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

017F V>> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0180 V>>> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0181 Vo> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0182 Vo>> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0183 Vo>>> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0184 tAux 1 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0185 tAux 2 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

0186 tV2> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0187 V2>> 0 - 7 or0 � 127

1 - F14 0 X X




0188 tV1< 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0189 tV1<< 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

018A tf1 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

018B tf2 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

018C tf3 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

018D tf4 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

018E tf5 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

018F tf6 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0190 V2> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0191 V2>> 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0192 V1< 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0193 V1<< 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0194 f1 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0195 f2 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0196 f3 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0197 f4 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0198 f5 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

0199 f6 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

019A CB alarms ofoperations, closingtime, operatingtime

0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

019B Frequency out ofrange

0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X

019C CB failure 0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

019D t logicequation�A�

0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

019E t logicequation�B�

0 - 7 or0 - 127

1 - F14 0 X X X

019F t logic equation�C� 0 - 127 F14 X

01A0 t logic equation�D� 0 - 127 F14 X

01A1 Active group 0 - 127 F14 X X


Page 22/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923



01A2 Allocation ofthe informationto the Logicequations

tV< 0 - 3or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01A3 tV<< 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01A4 tV<<< 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01A5 tV> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01A6 tV>> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01A7 tV>>> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01A8 tVo> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01A9 tVo>> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01AA tVo>>> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01AB V< 0 - 3 or0 -15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01AC V<< 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01AD V<<< 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01AE V> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01AF V>> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01B0 V>>> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01B1 Vo> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01B2 Vo>> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01B3 Vo>>> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01B4 tAux 1 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01B5 tAux 2 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01B6 tV2> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01B7 tV2>> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01B8 tV1< 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01B9 tV1<< 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01BA tf1 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X




01BB tf2 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01BC tf3 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01BD tf4 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01BE tf5 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01BF tf6 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01C0 V2> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01C1 V2>> 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01C2 V1< 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01C3 V1<< 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01C4 f1 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01C5 f2 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01C6 f3 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01C7 f4 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01C8 F5 0 - 3 or0 � 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01C9 F6 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01CA CB alarms ofoperations, closingtime, operatingtime

0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X

01CB df/dt6 0-15 1 - F54 0 X

01CC CB failure 0 - 3 or0 - 15

1 - F54 0 X X X

01CD to01CF

Reserved X X X

01D0 Automat. ctrl Trip out contactconfiguration (RL1)1st part

0 to 1FFF or7FFF

1 - F6 0 X X X

01D1 Trip out contactconfiguration (RL1)2nd part

0 to 3FF orFFFF

F7 0 X X

01D2 Latching of theoutput contacts (1)

0 to 1FFF or7FFF

1 - F6 0 X X X

01D3 Latching of theoutput contacts (2)

0 to 3FF orFFFF

F7 0 X X

01D4 Blocking logic 1 0 to 1FFF 1 - F8 0 X X X

01D5 Blocking logic 1(end)

0 to 3FF orFFFF

F7 0 X X


Page 24/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923



01D6 Blocking logic 2 0 to 1FFF 1 - F8 0 X X X

01D7 Blocking logic 2(end)

0 to 3FF orFFFF

F7 0 X X

01D8 Pick-up timer � Aequation

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0 X X X

01D9 Drop-off timer � Aequation

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0 X X X

01DA Pick-up timer � Bequation

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0 X X X

01DB Drop-off timer � Bequation

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0 X X X

01DC Auxiliary timer 1 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0 X X X

01DD Auxiliary timer 2 0 to 20000 1 1/100 sec F1 0 X X X

01DE Reserved X X X

01DF Frequencydisturbance record(Triggerconfiguration)

0-2 1 F57 0 X

01E0 Disturbancerecords

Pre-time 1 to 25 1 1/10 sec F1 1 X X

01E1 Post-time 1 to 25 1 1/10 sec F1 1 X X

01E2 Disturbance record

(TriggerConfiguration)

0 to 1 1 - F32 0 X X

01E3 CB supervision Number ofoperations

0-1 1 - F24 0 X X

01E4 Max number of theCB operation

0 - 50000 1 - F1 0 X X

01E5 Supervision of theoperating time

0-1 1 - F24 0 X X

01E6 Max operating time 10 to 500 5 1/100 sec F1 10 X X

01E7 Supervision of theclosing time

0-1 1 - F24 0 X X

01E8 Max closing time 10 to 500 5 1/100 sec F1 10 X X

01E9 Time period foraverage/maxvalues

5 to 60 VTA min F42 5 X X

01EA Tripping pulse 10 to 500 5 1/100 sec F1 10 X X X

01EB Closing pulse 10 to 500 5 1/100 F1 10 X X X

01EC Pick-up timer � Cequation

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0 X

01ED Drop-off timer � Cequation

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0 X

01EE Pick-up timer � Dequation

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0 X

01EF Drop-off timer � Dequation

0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec F1 0 X

01F0 to01F7

Description of theMiCOM relay forCourier Comm.

32-127 1 F10 X X X


1.7.4 Page 2 : Protective functions - Remote settings for group 1.

1.7.4.1 Undervoltage protection (P921- P922 and P923)



0200 Setting groupn°1

V< configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0201 Threshold V< 50 to1300 or200 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

0202 Type of temporisation 0 to 1 1 - F27 0

0203 TMS value for V< 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10

0204 tRESET temporisation 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 10

0205 V< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0206 to020F

Reserved 0

0210 V<< configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0211 Threshold V<< 50 to 1300or200 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

0212 V<< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1

0213 to021F

Reserved 0

0220 V<<< configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0221 Threshold V<<< 50 to 1300or200 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

0222 V<<< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1

0223 to022E

Reserved 0

022F V< Hysteresis 102 to 105 1 % or1/100

F1 102


Page 26/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.7.4.2 Overvoltage protection (P921 -P922 and P923)



0230 V> configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0231 Threshold V> 50 to 2000or200 to 7200

1or5

V/10 F1 1300 or4800


0233 TMS value for V> 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10


0235 V> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0236 to023F

Reserved 0

0240 V>> configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0241 Threshold V>> 50 to 2600or200 to 9600

1or5

V/10 F1 1300 or4800

0242 V>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1

0243 to024F

Reserved 0

0250 V>>> configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0251 Threshold V>>> 50 to 2600or200 to 9600

1or5

V/10 F1 1300 or4800

0252 V>>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1

0253 to025E

Reserved 0

025F V> Hysteresis 95 to 98 1 % or1/100

F1 98


1.7.4.3 Zero sequence overvoltage protection (P921- P922 and P923)



0260 Vo> configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

0261 Threshold Vo> 5 to 1300or20 to4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200


0263 TMS value for Vo> 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10


0265 Vo> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0266 to026F

Reserved 0

0270 Vo>> configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

0271 Threshold Vo>> 5 to 1300or20 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

0272 Vo>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0273 to027F

Reserved 0

0280 Vo>>> configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

0281 Threshold Vo>>> 5 to 1300or20 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

0282 Vo>>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0283 to028F

Reserved 0


Page 28/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.7.4.4 Negative sequence overvoltage protection (P922- P923)



0290 V2> configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

0291 Threshold V2> 50 to 2000or200 to 7200

1or5

V/10 F1 1300or4800


0293 TMS value for V2> 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10


0295 V2> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0296 to029F

Reserved 0

02A0 V2>> configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

02A1 Threshold V2>> 50 to 2000or200 to 7200

1or5

V/10 F1 1300or4800

02A2 V2>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

02A3 to02AF

Reserved 0

1.7.4.5 Positive sequence undervoltage protection (P922 � P923)



02B0 V1< configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

02B1 Threshold V1< 50 to 1300or200 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

02B2 Type of temporisation 0 to 1 1 - F27 0

02B3 TMS value V1< 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10

02B4 tRESET temporisation 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 1

02B5 V1< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

02B6 to02BF

Reserved 0

02C0 V1<< configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

02C1 Threshold V1<< 50 to 1300or200 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

02C2 V1<< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

02C3 to02CF

Reserved 0


1.7.4.6 Under/overfrequency (P922 � P923)



02D0 f1 0-2 1 - F56 0

02D1 Threshold f1 4000 to 6000if fn= 50Hz5000 to 7000if fn= 60Hz

1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000

02D2 f1 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

02D3 f2 0-2 1 - F56 0


1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000


02D6 f3 0-2 1 - F56 0


1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000


02D9 f4 0-2 1 - F56 0

02DA Threshold f4 4000 to 6000if fn= 50Hz5000 to 7000if fn= 60Hz

1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000

02DB f4 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

02DC f5 0-2 1 - F56 0

02DD Threshold f5 4000 to 6000if fn= 50Hz5000 to 7000if fn= 60Hz

1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000

02DE f5 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

02DF f6 0-2 1 - F56 0

02E0 Threshold f6 4000 to 6000if fn= 50Hz5000 to 7000if fn= 60Hz

1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000

02E1 f6 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

1.7.4.7 Rate of change of frequency ( Only MiCOM P923)



02E2 df/dt1 0-1 1 F24 0

02E3 df/dt1 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10Hz/s

F2 10

02E4 df/dt2 0-1 1 F24 0


F2 10

02E6 df/dt3 0-1 1 F24 0


F2 10

02E8 df/dt4 0-1 1 F24 0


Page 30/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923




F2 10

02EA df/dt5 0-1 1 F24 0

02EB df/dt5 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10Hz/s

F2 10

02EC df/dt6 0-1 1 F24 0

02ED df/dt6 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10Hz/s

F2 10

02EE to02EF

Reserved

1.7.5 Page 3 : Protective functions - Remote settings for group 2.

1.7.5.1 Undervoltage protection (P922 and P923)



0300 Setting groupn° 2

V< configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0301 Threshold V< 50 to 1300or200 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200


0303 TMS value V< 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10


0305 V< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0306 to030F

Reserved 0

0310 V<< configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0311 Threshold V<< 50 to 1300or200 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

0312 V<< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1

0313 to031F

Reserved 0

0320 V<<< configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0321 Threshold V<<< 50 to 1300or200 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

0322 V<<< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1

0323 to032E

Reserved 0

032F V< Hysteresis 102 to 105 1 % ou1/100

F1 102


1.7.5.2 Overvoltage protection (P922 and P923)



0330 V> configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0331 Threshold V> 50 to 2000or200 to 7200

1or5

V/10 F1 1300or4800


0333 TMS value V> 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10


0335 V> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0336 to033F

Reserved 0

0340 V>> configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0341 Threshold V>> 50 to 2600or200 to 9600

1or5

V/10 F1 1300or4800

0342 V>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1

0343 to034F

Reserved 0

0350 V>>> configuration 0-2 1 - F55 0

0351 Threshold V>>> 50 to 2600or200 to 9600

1or5

V/10 F1 1300or4800

0352 V>>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 1

0353 to035E

Reserved 0

035F V> Hysteresis 95 to 98 1 % or1/100

F1 98

1.7.5.3 Zero sequence overvoltage protection (P922 and P923)



0360 Vo> configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

0361 Threshold Vo> 5 to 1300or20 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200


0363 TMS value Vo> 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10


0365 Vo> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0366 to036F

Reserved 0

0370 Vo>> configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

0371 Threshold Vo>> 5 to 1300or20 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

0372 Vo>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0373 to037F

Reserved 0

0380 Vo>>> configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0


Page 32/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923



0381 Threshold Vo>>> 5 to 1300or20 to 4800

1or5

V/10 F1 50or200

0382 Vo>>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0383 to038F

Reserved 0

1.7.5.4 Negative sequence overvoltage protection (P922 and P923)



0390 V2> configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

0391 Threshold V2> 50 to 2000or200 to 7200

1 or 5 V/10 F1 1300or4800


0393 TMS value V2> 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10


0395 V2> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

0396 to039F

Reserved 0

03A0 V2>> configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

03A1 Threshold V2>> 50 to 2000or200 to 7200

1 or 5 V/10 F1 1300or4800

03A2 V2>> temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

03A3 to03AF

Reserved 0


1.7.5.5 Positive sequence undervoltage protection (P922 and P923)



03B0 V1< configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

03B1 Threshold V1< 50 to 1300or200 to 4800

1 or 5 V/10 F1 50or200

03B2 Type of temporisation 0 to 1 1 - F27 0

03B3 TMS value V1< 5 to 1000 5 1/10 F1 10

03B4 tRESET temporisation 0 to 10000 1 1/100 s F1 1

03B5 V1< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

03B6 to03BF

Reserved 0

03C0 V1<< configuration 0-1 1 - F24 0

03C1 Threshold V1<< 50 to 1300or200 to 4800

1 or 5 V/10 F1 50or200

03C2 V1<< temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

03C3 to03CF

Reserved 0


Page 34/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.7.5.6 Under/overfrequency protection (P922 and P923)



03D0 f1 0-2 1 - F56 0


1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000


03D3 f2 0-2 1 - F56 0


1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000


03D6 f3 0-2 1 - F56 0


1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000


03D9 f4 0-2 1 - F56 0

03DA Threshold f4 4000 to 6000if fn= 50Hz5000 to 7000if fn= 60Hz

1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000

03DB f4 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

03DC f5 0-2 1 - F56 0

03DD Threshold f5 4000 to 6000if fn= 50Hz5000 to 7000if fn= 60Hz

1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000

03DE f5 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4

03DF f6 0-2 1 - F56 0

03E0 Threshold f6 4000 to 6000if fn= 50Hz5000 to 7000if fn= 60Hz

1 1/100 Hz F1 5000 or6000

03E1 f6 temporisation 0 to 59999 1 1/100 s F1 4


1.7.5.7 Rate of change of frequency ( Only MiCOM P923)



03E2 df/dt1 0-1 1 F24 0


F2 10

03E4 df/dt2 0-1 1 F24 0


F2 10

03E6 df/dt3 0-1 1 F24 0


F2 10

03E8 df/dt4 0-1 1 F24 0


F2 10

03EA df/dt5 0-1 1 F24 0

03EB df/dt5 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10Hz/s

F2 10

03EC df/dt6 0-1 1 F24 0

03ED df/dt6 threshold -100 to 100 1 1/10Hz/s

F2 10

03EE to03EF

Reserved

1.7.6 Page 4 : Remote commands

Writing only access

Address Group Description Settingsgroup


0400 Remotecontrol

Remote control word 1 0 to 31 1 - F9 0

1.7.7 Pages 5 and 6 : reserved

1.7.8 Page 7 : Self tests results of the relay MiCOM

Quick reading access only

Address Group Description Settingsgroup


0700 ProtectionStatus

Description of theprotection autocontrols

1 - F23 0


Page 36/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.7.9 Page 8 : Time synchronisation

Time synchronisation : access in writing for n words (function 16). The timesynchronisation format is based on 8 bits (4 words).

Timer @page Nb bits Values range Unit

Year pF + pf 8 2 year

Month 8 1 1 - 12 month

Day 8 1 1 - 31 day

Hour 8 1 0 - 23 hour

Minute 8 1 0 - 59 minute

Millisecond pF + pf 8 2 0 - 59999 ms


1.7.10 Page 9 to 21h : Disturbance records data (25 pages) (MiCOM P922 and P923 only)

Disturbance records data (25 pages). Access in words writing, each disturbancemapping page contains 250 words.

Address Contents Format

0900 to 09FAh 250 disturbance data words F61

0A00 to 0AFAh 250 disturbance data words F61

0B00 to 0BFAh 250 disturbance data words F61

0C00 to 0CFAh 250 disturbance data words F61

0D00 to 0DFAh 250 disturbance data words F61

0E00 to 0EFAh 250 disturbance data words F61

0F00 to 0FFAh 250 disturbance data words F61











1A00 to 1AFAh 250 disturbance data words F61

1B00 to 1BFAh 250 disturbance data words F61

1C00 to 1CFAh 250 disturbance data words F61

1D00 to 1DFAh 250 disturbance data words F61

1E00 to 1EFAh 250 disturbance data words F61

1F00 to 1FFAh 250 disturbance data words F61




Page 38/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

N.B. : - The disturbance data pages contain values of one channel from one given disturbance record.

- significance of the value according to the type of channel :VA, VB, VC = 16 bits valuesFrequency = time between 2 samples in msLogical channel =

bit 0 = RL1 ( Trip Relay )bit 1 = RL2bit 2 = RL3bit 3 = RL4bit 4 = watchdogbit 5 = RL5bit 6 = RL6bit 7 = RL7bit 8 = RL8bit 9 = reservedbit 10 = logic input 1bit 11 = logic input 2bit 12 = logic input 3bit 13 = logic input 4bit 14 = logic input 5bit 15 = reserved


1.7.11 Page 22h : Disturbance record index frame (MiCOM P922 and P923 only)

Read access only.


2200h Disturbance data index frame F62

1.7.12 Page 35h : Events record (MiCOM P922 and P923 only)

Read access only.

Address Contents Format Address Contents Format Address Contents Format

3500h EVT n°1 F63 3519h EVT n°26 F63 3532h EVT n°51 F63

3501h EVT n°2 F63 351Ah EVT n°27 F63 3533h EVT n°52 F63

3502h EVT n°3 F63 351Bh EVT n°28 F63 3534h EVT n°53 F63

3503h EVT n°4 F63 351Ch EVT n°29 F63 3535h EVT n°54 F63

3504h EVT n°5 F63 351Dh EVT n°30 F63 3536h EVT n°55 F63

3505h EVT n°6 F63 351Eh EVT n°31 F63 3537h EVT n°56 F63

3506h EVT n°7 F63 351Fh EVT n°32 F63 3538h EVT n°57 F63


3508h EVT n°9 F63 3521h EVT n°34 F63 353Ah EVT n°59 F63

3509h EVT n°10 F63 3522h EVT n°35 F63 353Bh EVT n°60 F63

350Ah EVT n°11 F63 3523h EVT n°36 F63 353Ch EVT n°61 F63

350Bh EVT n°12 F63 3524h EVT n°37 F63 353Dh EVT n°62 F63

350Ch EVT n°13 F63 3525h EVT n°38 F63 353Eh EVT n°63 F63

350Dh EVT n°14 F63 3526h EVT n°39 F63 353Fh EVT n°64 F63

350Eh EVT n°15 F63 3527h EVT n°40 F63 3540h EVT n°65 F63

350Fh EVT n°16 F63 3528h EVT n°41 F63 3541h EVT n°66 F63


3511h EVT n°18 F63 352Ah EVT n°43 F63 3543h EVT n°68 F63

3512h EVT n°19 F63 352Bh EVT n°44 F63 3544h EVT n°69 F63

3513h EVT n°20 F63 352Ch EVT n°45 F63 3545h EVT n°70 F63

3514h EVT n°21 F63 352Dh EVT n°46 F63 3546h EVT n°71 F63

3515h EVT n°22 F63 352Eh EVT n°47 F63 3547h EVT n°72 F63

3516h EVT n°23 F63 352Fh EVT n°48 F63 3548h EVT n°73 F63


3518h EVT n°25 F63 3531h EVT n°50 F63 354Ah EVT n°75 F63

1.7.13 Page 36h : Oldest event data (MiCOM P922 and P923 only)

Read access only.


3600h Most older event data F63


Page 40/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.7.14 Page 37h : 5 last fault records data (MiCOM P922 and P923 only)

Read access only.


3700h Fault record values n°1 F64





1.7.15 Pages 38h to 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and channel (MiCOM P922and P923 only)

Read access only.

Address Disturbance recordnumber

Channel Format

3800h 1 VA F65

3801h 1 VB F65

3802h 1 VC F65

3803h 1 V0 F65

3804h 1 Frequency F65

3805h 1 Logic input and outputs F65

3900h 2 VA F65

3901h 2 VB F65

3902h 2 VC F65

3903h 2 V0 F65

3904h 2 Frequency F65

3905h 2 Logic input and outputs F65

3A00h 3 VA F65

3A01h 3 VB F65

3A02h 3 VC F65

3A03h 3 V0 F65

3A04h 3 Frequency F65

3A05h 3 Logic input and outputs F65

3B00h 4 VA F65

3B01h 4 VB F65

3B02h 4 VC F65

3B03h 4 V0 F65

3B04h 4 Frequency F65

3B05h 4 Logic input and outputs F65


Address Disturbance recordnumber

Channel Format

3C00h 5 VA F65

3C01h 5 VB F65

3C02h 5 VC F65

3C03h 5 V0 F65

3C04h 5 Frequency F65

3C05h 5 Logic input and outputs F65

1.7.16 Page 3Dh : Number of disturbance records available (MiCOM P922 and P923 only)

Read access only.


3D00h Number of disturbance recordsavailable

F66

1.7.17 Page 3Eh : Oldest fault record data (MiCOM P922 and P923 only).


3E00h Oldest fault record data F64

1.7.18 Page 40h: Status Frame of Frequency Disturbance Record (MiCOM P923 only).

Read access only


4000h Status of Frequency disturbance record F70


Page 42/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.7.19 Page 41h: selection of Frequency Disturbance Record and channel (MiCOM P923only).

Read access only


4100h Average Va Vb Vc F71

4101h Measured period F71

4102h Logic inputs/outputs F71

4103h Sample period F71

1.7.20 Pages 42h to 49h : Datas of Frequency Disturbance Record (MiCOM P923 only).

Read access only


4200 to 42FAh 250 frequency disturbance data words F72








N.B. : - The disturbance data pages contain values of one channelfrom one given disturbance record.

- significance of the value according to the type of channel :VA, VB, VC = 16 bits valuesPeriod = time between 2 samples in msLogical channel =

bit 0 = RL1 ( Trip Relay )bit 1 = RL2bit 2 = RL3bit 3 = RL4bit 4 = watchdogbit 5 = RL5bit 6 = RL6bit 7 = RL7bit 8 = RL8bit 9 = reservedbit 10 = logic input 1bit 11 = logic input 2bit 12 = logic input 3bit 13 = logic input 4bit 14 = logic input 5bit 15 = Validity of the frequency measurement


1.7.21 Page 4Ah: Frequency Disturbance Record Frame index and acknowledgment(MiCOM P923 only).

Read access only


4A00h Freq disturbance record frame indexand acknowledgement

F73


Page 44/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

1.8 Description of the mapping format

PRODUCTSCODE DESCRIPTION

P921 P922 P923

F1 Unsigned integer - numerical data : 1 - 65535 X X X

F2 Signed integer - numerical data : 32768 - 32767 X X X

F3 not used X X X

Unsigned integer : Modbus speed X X X

0 : 300

1 : 600

2 : 1200

3 : 2400

4 : 4800

5 : 9600

6 : 19200

F4

7 : 38400

Unsigned integer : parity X X X

0 : without

1 : even

F5

2 : odd

Unsigned integer : selection of the information assignedto the trip output (RL1) and of the information latched tothe other output contacts (RL2 to RL4 for MiCOM P921,RL2 to RL8 for MiCOM P922- P923).

bit 0 : tV< X X X

bit 1 : tV<< X X X

bit 2 : tV<<< X X X

bit 3 : tV> X X X

bit 4 : tV>> X X X

bit 5 : tV>>> X X X

bit 6 : tVo> X X X

bit 7 : tVo>> X X X

bit 8 : tVo>>> X X X

bit 9 : tAux1 X X X

bit 10 : tAux2 X X X

bit 11 : t Equation A X X X

bit 12 : t Equation B X X X

bit 13 : t Equation C X

bit 14 : t Equation D X

F6

bit 15 : Reserved X X X



P921 P922 P923

Unsigned integer : selection of the information assignedto the trip output (RL1) and of the information latched tothe other output contacts. Selection of the informationwhich is blocked by the blocking logic (1 or 2)

X X

bit 0 :tV2> X X

bit 1 : tV2>> X X

bit 2 :tV1< X X

bit 3 :tV1<< X X

bit 4 :tf1 X X

bit 5 :tf2 X X

bit 6 :tf3 X X

bit 7 :tf4 X X

bit 8 : tf5 X X

bit 9 :tf6 X X

F7

bit 10 : df/dt1

bit 11 : df/dt2

bit 12 : df/dt3

bit 13 : df/dt4

bit 14 : df/dt5

bit 15 : df/dt6

X

X

X

X

X

X

Unsigned integer : Selection of the information which isblocked by the blocking logic (1 or 2)

X X X

bit 0 : tV<

bit 1 : tV<<

bit 2 : tV<<<

bit 3 : tV>

bit 4 : tV>>

bit 5 : tV>>>

bit 6 : tVo>

bit 7 : tVo>>

bit 8 : tVo>>>

bit 9 : tAux1

bit 10 : tAux2

F8

bits 11 to 15 : Reserved.


Page 46/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


P921 P922 P923

Unsigned integer : Remote commands

bit 0 : Tripping contact delatched (RL1) X X X

bit 1 : 1 st alarm acknowledgement X X X

bit 2 : All alarms acknowledgement X X X

bit 3 : Remote tripping (to RL1) X X X

bit 4 : Remote closing (to programmed output contacts) X X X

bit 5 : Setting group change X X

bit 6 : Average and max values reset X X


bit 8 : Disturbance record remote start X X


bit 10 : Remote Command Frequency Disturbance X


bit 12 : Manual event/fault acknowledgement mode X X

bit 13 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest eventrecord

X X

bit 14 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest faultrecord

X X

F9

bit 15 : Remote acknowledgement of the "RAM error"alarm

X X

2 characters ASCII X X X

32 - 127 = ASCII character 1

F10

32 - 127 = ASCII character 2

F11 Reserved X X X

Unsigned integer : Logic input status

bit 0 : logic input number 1 X X X

bit 1 : logic input number 2 X X X

bit 2 : logic input number 3 X X



F12

bits 5 to 15 : reserved

Unsigned integer : Logic output status

bit 0 : logic output number RL1 (tripping) X X X

bit 1 : logic output number RL2 X X X



bit 4 : logic output number RL0 (watchdog) X X X

bit 5 : logic output number RL5 X X

F13




P921 P922 P923

F13 bit 7 : logic output number RL7 X X



Unsigned integer : logic outputs configuration (exceptedRL1)

bit 0 : selection logic output number RL2 X X X



bit 3 : selection logic output number RL5 X X



F14


Unsigned integer : Logical input allocation

bit 0 : delatch (UNLATCH) X X X

bit 1 : 52a X X X

bit 2 : 52b X X X

bit 3 : external CB failure (CB fail) X X X

bit 4 : external input 1 (AUX1) X X X

bit 5 : external input 2 (AUX2) X X X

bit 6 : blocking logic 1 (BLK LG1) X X X

bit 7 : blocking logic 2 (BLK LG2) X X X

bit 8 : change of active setting group (CHANG SET) X X

F15

bit 9 : external start of the disturbance recorder (DISTTRIG)

X X

Unsigned integer : Information generated by thezero sequence overvoltage function

X X X

bit 0 : instantaneous information (V0>) or (V0>>)or (V0>>>)

bit 1 to 4 : reserved

bit 5 : instantaneous information (V0>) or (V0>>)or (V0>>>)

bit 6 : time delayed information (tV0>) or (tV0>>)or (tV0>>>)

F16



Page 48/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


P921 P922 P923

Unsigned integer : Information generated by theovervoltage function

X X X

bit 0 : instantaneous information (V>) or (V>>) or(V>>>)

bit 1 : instantaneous information VA

bit 2 : instantaneous information VB

bit 3 : instantaneous information VC

bit 4 : reserved

bit 5 : instantaneous information (V>) or (V>>) or(V>>>)

bit 6 : time delayed information (V>) or (V>>) or(V>>>)

F17


F18 Long integer X X X

Unsigned long integer : LED configuration X X X

Bit 0 : V<

Bit 1 : tV<

Bit 2 : V<<

Bit 3 : tV<<

Bit 4 : V<<<

Bit 5 : tV<<<

Bit 6: V>

Bit 7: tV>

Bit 8: V>>

Bit 9: tV>>

Bit 10: V>>>

Bit 11: tV>>>

Bit 12: Vo>

Bit 13: tVo>

Bit 14: Vo>>

F19

Bit 15: tVo>>



P921 P922 P923

Unsigned long integer: LED configuration (cont.)

Bit 0 : Vo>>> X X X

Bit 1 : tVo>>> X X X

Bit 2 : taux1 X X X

Bit 3 : taux2 X X X

Bit 4 : V2> X X

Bit 5 : tV2> X X

Bit 6: V2>> X X

Bit 7: tV2>> X X

Bit 8: V1< X X

Bit 9: tV1< X X

Bit 10: V1<< X X

Bit 11: tV1<< X X

Bit 12: f1 X X

Bit 13: tf1 X X

Bit 14: f2 X X

F19'

Bit 15: tf2 X X

Unsigned long integer: LED configuration (cont.) X X

Bit 0 : f3 X X

Bit 1 : tf3 X X

Bit 2 : f4 X X

Bit 3 : tf4 X X

Bit 4 : f5 X X

Bit 5 : tf5 X X

Bit 6: f6 X X

Bit 7: tf6 X X

F19"

Bit 8: Frequency out of range

Bit 9 : df/dt1

Bit 10 : df/dt2

Bit 11 : df/dt3

Bit 12 : df/dt4

Bit 13 : df/dt5

Bit 14 : df/dt6

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X


Page 50/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


P921 P922 P923

Unsigned integer : Logic input status

bit 0 : Blocking logic 1 (BLK LG1) X X X

bit 1 : Blocking logic 2 (BLK LG2) X X X

bit 2 : Unlatched of the output contacts(UNLATCH)

X X X

bit 3 : 52a X X X

bit 4 : 52b X X X

bit 5 : CB failure (CB fail) X X X

bit 6 : Auxiliary input 1 (AUX 1) X X X

bit 7 : Auxiliary input 2 (AUX 2) X X X

bit 8 : Change of active setting group (CHANGSET)

X X

bit 9 : External start of the disturbance recorder(DIST TRIG)

X X

F20

bit 10 to 15 : Reserved

Unsigned integer : Software version X X X

10 : version 1.A

11 : version 1.B

F21

20 : version 2.A etc ...

Unsigned integer : internal logic data X X X

bit 0 : trip output contact latched (RL1)

F22

bit 1 : reserved

Unsigned integer : Self tests results X X X

bit 0 : Protection in Service X X X

bit 1 : Minor fault X X X

bit 2 : Not acknowledged event record X X

bit 3 : Time synchronisation status X X

bit 4 : Disturbance record available X X

bit 5 : Fault record available X X


F23


Unsigned integer : Status of the relay functions X X X

0 : Disabled

F24

1 : Enabled

F25 2 characters ASCII X X X



P921 P922 P923

Selection of the default display

1 : RMS value Va or Vab X X X

2 : RMS value Vb or Vbc X X X

3 : RMS value Vc or Vca X X X

4 : RMS value V0 X X X

5 : frequency X X

6 : V1 X X

F26

7 : V2 X X

Unsigned integer : Selection of the type oftemporisation

X X X

0 : DMT time delay

F27

1 : IDMT time delay

F28 Reserved X X X

Unsigned integer : Modbus communication X X X

0 : 1 bit stop

F29

1 : 2 bits stop

Unsigned integer : Rear communication X X X

0 : Communication non available

F30

1 : Communication available

Unsigned integer : Number of disturbance recordsavailable

X X

0 : None

...

F31

5 : 5 Disturbance Records available

Unsigned integer : Selection of the trigger modefor the disturbance recorder

X X

0 : Instantaneous information

F32

1 : Time delayed information

F33 Unsigned integer : type of date used by themodbus communication

0 : Modbus date

1 : IEC date

X X X


Page 52/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


P921 P922 P923

F34 Unsigned integer : Latch of auxiliary output relays

bit 0 : selection of the auxiliary output relay no 2







X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Unsigned integer : Disturbance recorder status X X

0 : No record in progress

F35

1 : Record in progress

Unsigned integer : Alarm status (1)

Bit 0 : V0 > X X X

Bit 1 : tV0 > X X X

Bit 2 : V0 >> X X X

Bit 3 : tV0 >> X X X

Bit 4 : V0 >>> X X X

Bit 5 : tV0 >>> X X X

Bit 6 : V2 > X X

Bit 7 : tV2 > X X

Bit 8 : V2 >> X X

Bit 9 : tV2 >> X X

Bit 10 : V1 < X X

Bit 11 : t V1 < X X

Bit 12 : V1 << X X

F36

Bit 13 : tV1 << X X

Unsigned integer : Alarm status (2) X X

Bit 0 : instantaneous information f1

Bit 1 : time delayed information f1






F37




P921 P922 P923




F37


Unsigned integer : Auxiliary inputs status and CBsupervision data

Bit 0 : Logical equation A" X X X

Bit 1 : Logical equation B" X X X

Bit 2 : Logical equation : time delayed information" X X X

Bit 3 : time delayed information "tAUX1" X X X

Bit 4 : time delayed information "tAUX2" X X X

Bit 5 : Max CB operating time reached X X

Bit 6 : Max CB operations reached X X

Bit 7 : Max CB closing time reached X X

Bit 8 : CB alarm (logical "OR" between bits 5, 6and 7)

X X

Bit 9 : Frequency out of range: fmeasured > fn+20Hzor fmeasured < fn-20Hz

X X

Bit 10 : Logical equation C" X

Bit 11 : Logical equation D" X

Bit 12 : Frequency out of range due toundervoltage blocking

X

F38

Bits 13 to 15 : reserved X X X

F39 Reserved

F40 Reserved

Unsigned integer : Rear communication protocol(RS485)

X X X

0 : Modbus RTU

1 : Courier KBus

F41

2 : IEC 60870-5-103

Unsigned integer : Time period for calculation ofaverage/max values

X XF42

5, 10, 15, 30 or 60 min


Page 54/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


P921 P922 P923

Unsigned integer : MiCOM relay status X X X

Bit 0 : Watchdog

Bit 1 : Communication failure

Bit 2 : EEPROM data failure

Bit 3 : Analog failure

Bit 4 : Datation

Bit 5 : EEPROM calibration failure

Bit 6 : RAM memory failure

F45

Bit 7 to 15 : Reserved

F46 Unsigned integer: disturbance recordacknowledgement

Bit 0 : Reserved

Bit 1 : Reserved

Bit 2 : Acknowledgement of the oldest disturbancerecord (manually)

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Unsigned integer : Information generated by theundervoltage protection

X X X

Bit 0 : instantaneous information threshold phase(V<) or

(V<<) or (V<<<)

Bit 1 : instantaneous information VA

Bit 2 : instantaneous information VB

Bit 3 : instantaneous information VC

Bit 4 : reserved

Bit 5 : instantaneous information (V<) or (V<<) or(V<<<)

Bit 6 : time delayed information (tV<) or (tV<<) or(tV<<<)

F47

Bits 7 to 15 : reserved

Unsigned integer : Information generated by the"Negative seq. Overvoltage" and "Positive seq.undervoltage"

X X

Bit 0 : instantaneous information threshold V2>

Bit 1 : instantaneous information V2>

Bit 2 : time delayed information V2>

Bit 3 : instantaneous information threshold V2>>

Bit 4 : instantaneous information V2>>

F48

Bit 5 : time delayed information V2 >>



P921 P922 P923

Bit 6 : instantaneous information threshold V1<

Bit 7 : instantaneous information V1<

Bit 8 : time delayed information V1<

Bit 9 : instantaneous information threshold V1<<

Bit 10 : instantaneous information V1<<

Bit 11 : time delayed information V1<<

F48

Bits 12 to 15 reserved

Unsigned integer : Information generated by thefrequency protection

X X

Bit 0 : Frequency protection

Bit 1 : Instantaneous information

Bit 2 : Time delayed information of the frequencyprotection

F49

Bit 3 to Bit 15: Reserved

F50 Unsigned integer: type of the voltage applied tothe logic inputs

0 : DC voltage

1 : AC voltage

X X X

F51 Unsigned long integer X X X

Unsigned integer : Voltage connection X X X

0 : Connection "3Vpn"

1 : Connection "3Vpn+Vr"

2 : Connection "2Upp+Vr"

F52

3 : Connection "3Upp+Vr"

Unsigned integer : Configuration of the voltageprotection

X X X

0 : "PROTECT P-N" = phase voltage protection

F53

1 : "PROTECT P-P" = line voltage protection

Unsigned integer : Configuration of the logicalequation

X X X

bit 0 : selection of the "A" logical equation X X X

F54

bit 1 : selection of the "B" logical equation

bit 2 : selection of the "C" logical equation

bit 3 : selection of the "D" logical equation

X X X

X

X


Page 56/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


P921 P922 P923

Unsigned integer : Configuration of theunder/overvoltage thresholds

X X X

0 : Disabled

1 : "OR" detection

F55

2 : "AND" detection

Unsigned integer : Configuration of the frequencythresholds

X X

0 : Disabled

1 : Underfrequency

F56

2 : Overfrequency

F57 Unsigned integer : trigger mode of the frequencydisturbance record

0 : start of a time delayed df/dt information

1 : activation of a logic equation

2 : closing of the tripping relay contact ( RL1 )

X

F58 Unsigned integer : information generated by therate of change of frequency function

Bit 0 : df/dt1 instantaneous information






X

F59 Unsigned integer : selection of the Date format

0 : Private date format

1 : Date Format IEC

X X

F60 Unsigned integer : Selection of the working modefor changing the active group:

0 : the user chooses to work on EDGE of a logicinput; either with a control command, or by usingthe front face of the relay.

1 : the user chooses to work on LEVEL of a logicinput.

X X


1.9 Specific formats for the records files (P922 and P923 only)

CODE DESCRIPTION

F61 Conversion rules for the voltage values of the disturbance record

* In order to obtain the phase voltages values at the VT primary, apply the followingformula :

« Read value » x « VT primary value » / « VT secondary value » x coef

2100

* In order to obtain the Vo value at the residual VT primary, apply the following formula :

« Read value » x « Residual VT primary value »/« Residual VT secondary value » x

coef2100

where : coef = 12600 for the range (57-130V) and 3400 for the range (220-480V)

F62 Disturbance records data

1st word : Disturbance record number

2nd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec)

3rd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec)

4th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)

5th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)

6th word : Cause of the disturbance record trigging

1 : Relay n°1 operation (trip)


3 : Remote trigger

4 : Trig order received through a logic input

7 th word : Frequency at the beginning of the post time

F63 Events records data

1st word : Event type : refer to format F67

2nd word : Associated value type : refer to format F67

3rd word : Modbus address ( use of different version of VDEW )- refer to paragraph 1.5

4th word : Courier cell address ( use of different version of VDEW )- refer to paragraph1.5

5 th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994

6 th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994

7 th word : event occurrence date (ms)

8 th word : event occurrence date (ms)

9 th word : acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged event ; 1 = acknowledgedevent)


Page 58/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

CODE DESCRIPTION

F64 Fault record data

1 st word : Fault record number

2 nd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/94

3 rd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/94

4 th word : Fault date (ms)

5 th word : Fault date (ms)

6 th word : Fault date (season ; 0 = winter, 1 = summer, 2 = non defined)

7 th word : Active setting group while the fault occurrence (1 or 2)

8 th word : Faulty phase : (0 = none, 1 = phase A, 2 = phase B, 3 = phase C, 4 =

phases AB, 5 = phases AC, 6 = phases BC, 7 = phases A-B-C, 8 = earth)

9 th word : Cause of the fault record : refer to format F65 F69 ( Code of the fault)

10 th word : Fault value magnitude (fundamental value) : refer to format F68

11 th word : Phase A voltage magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F68

12 th word : Phase B voltage magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F68

13 th word : Phase C voltage magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F68

14 th word : Zero sequence voltage magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F68

F65 Disturbance records data

1st word : Samples number contained in the mapping

2nd word : Pre-time sample number

3rd word : Post-time sample number

4 th word : Primary value of phase CT

5 th word : Secondary value of phase CT

6 th word : Primary value of residual CT

7 th word : Secondary value of residual CT

8 th word : Internal ratio of phase CT

9 th word : Internal ratio of residual CT

10 th word : Primary phase VT value (LSB)

11 th word : Primary phase VT value (MSB)

12 th word : Secondary phase VT value

13 th word : Primary residual VT value (LSB)

14 th word : Primary residual VT value (MSB)

15 th word : Secondary residual VT value

16 th word : Internal ratio-numerator (100)

17 th word : Internal ratio-denominator ( 12600 or 3400)

18 th word : Address of the last page containing samples

19 th word : Words number contained in the last page


CODE DESCRIPTION

F66 Data for the available disturbance records

1st word : Number of disturbance record available

2nd word : Oldest disturbance record number

3rd word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec)

4 th word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec)

5 th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms)

6 th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms)

7 th word : Cause of the oldest disturbance record:

1 : Relay n°1 operation


3 : Remote trigger.


8 th word : Acknowledgement

9 th word : Previous disturbance record number

10 th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec)

11 th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec)

12 th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms)

13 th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms)

14 th word : Cause of the previous disturbance record :

1 : Relay n°1 operation


3 : Remote trigger


15 th word : Acknowledgement

And so on regarding the other disturbance records�


Page 60/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

CODE DESCRIPTION Type AddressModbus

CelluleCourier

F67 Code of event and type of the associated value

00 "No event" -

01 "Remote closing" F9 013H 021

02 "Remote tripping" F9 013H 021

03 "Start of disturbance record" F9 - -

04 "Trip output unlatched" F9 013H 021

05 "Settings change" address addres - -

06 "V >" F17 014H�� 023

07 "V >>" F17 015H�� 023

08 "V >>>" F17 016H�� 023

09 "V <" F47 017H�� 023

10 "V <<" F47 018H�� 023

11 "V <<<" F47 019H�� 023

12 "V0 >" F16 01AH�� 023

13 "V0 >>" F16 01BH�� 023

14 "V0 >>>" F16 01CH�� 023

15 "tU >" F17 014H�� 023

16 "tU >>" F17 015H�� 023

17 "tU >>>" F17 016H�� 023

18 "tU <" F47 017H�� 023

19 "tU <<" F47 018H�� 023

20 "tU <<<" F47 019H�� 023

21 "tV0 >" F16 01AH�� 024

22 "tV0 >>" F16 01BH�� 024

23 "tV0 >>>" F16 01CH�� 024

24 "t AUX1" F38 024H�� 024

25 "t AUX2" F38 024H�� 024

26 " t Logical equation A" F38 024H�� 024

27 " t Logical equation B" F38 024H�� 024

28 "Logic inputs" F12 010H�� 020

29 "Blocking logic 1" F20 011H�� 020

30 "Blocking logic 2" F20 011H�� 020

31 52a F20 011H�� 020

32 52b F20 011H�� 020

33 "CB failure" F20 011H�� 020

34 "Change of active setting group" F20 011H 020

35 "trip : tV >" F13 013H 021



CelluleCourier

36 "trip : tV >>" F13 013H 021

37 "trip : tV >>>" F13 013H 021

38 "trip : tV <" F13 013H 021

39 "trip : tV <<" F13 013H 021

40 "trip : tV <<<" F13 013H 021

41 "trip : tV0 >" F13 013H 021

42 "trip : tV0 >>" F13 013H 021

43 "trip : tV0 >>>" F13 013H 021

44 "trip : t AUX1" F13 013H 021

45 "trip : t AUX2" F13 013H 021

46 "trip : t logical equation A" F13 013H 021

47 "trip : t logical equation B " F13 013H 021

48 "Trip of auxiliary output contacts" F39 013H 021

49 "Alarm acknowledgement from the HMI" - - -

50 "Global alarm acknowledgement from theHMI"

- - -

51 "Alarm acknowledgement from thecommunication"

- - -

52 "Global alarm acknowledgement from thecommunication"

- - -

53 "Major hardware alarms" F45 00FH�� 022

54 "Minor hardware alarms" F45 00FH�� 022

55 "V2>" F48 01DH�� 024

56 "V2 >>" F48 01DH�� 024

57 "V1 <" F48 01DH�� 024

58 "V1 <<" F48 01DH�� 024

59 "f1" F49 01EH�� 024

60 "f2" F49 01FH�� 024

61 "f3" F49 020H�� 024

62 "f4" F49 021H�� 024

63 "f5" F49 022H�� 024

64 "f6" F49 023H�� 025

65 "tV2>" F48 01DH�� 025

66 "tV2 >>" F48 01DH�� 025

67 "tV1 <" F48 01DH�� 025

68 "tV1 <<" F48 01DH�� 025

69 "tf1" F49 01EH�� 025


Page 62/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


CelluleCourier

70 "tf2" F49 01FH�� 025

71 "tf3" F49 020H�� 025

72 "tf4" F49 021H�� 025

73 "tf5" F49 022H�� 025

74 "tf6" F49 023H�� 025

75 "Frequency out of range" F38 024H�� 025

76 "CB operating time" F38 024H�� 025

77 "Number of operations" F38 024H�� 025

78 "CB closing time" F38 024H�� 025

79 "trip : tV2>" F13 013H 021

80 "trip : tV2 >>" F13 013H 021

81 " trip: tV1 <" F13 013H 021

82 " trip: tV1 <<" F13 013H 021

83 " trip: tf1" F13 013H 021

84 " trip: tf2" F13 013H 021

85 " trip: tf3" F13 013H 021

86 " trip: tf4" F13 013H 021

87 " trip: tf5" F13 013H 021

88

89

90

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

" trip: tf6

�General Start� only for VDEW,otherwise 0

�General trip� only for VDEW, otherwise 0

�Local setting � only for VDEW, otherwise 0

� t Logical equation C�

� t Logical equation D�

�df/dt1�

�df/dt2�

�df/dt3�

�df/dt4�

�df/dt5�

�df/dt6�

�trip: A logical equation�

�trip: B logical equation�

�trip: df/dt1�

�trip: df/dt2�

�trip: df/dt3�

�trip: df/dt4�

F13

F38

F38

F58

F58

F58

F58

F58

F58

F13

F13

F13

F13

F13

F13

013H

024H��

024H��

064H��

064H��

064H��

064H��

064H��

064H��

013H

013H

013H

013H

013H

013H

021

025

025

026

026

026

026

026

026

021

021

021

021

021

021



CelluleCourier

106

107

108

�trip: df/dt5�

�trip: df/dt6�

�Latch of the relays �

F13

F13

F34

013H

013H

060H

021

021

N.B. : The double arrow �� means the event is generated on eventoccurrence and another is generated on event disappearance.On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associatedformat is set to "1".On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associatedformat is set to "0".

CODE DESCRIPTION

F68 Conversion rules for the fault records

In order to obtain phase and residual voltages at primary VT, apply the followingformula :

Range 57 to 130V :

"Read value".* ("primary phase VT" / " Secondary phase VT ") * 1/63

Range 220 to 480V :

"Read value".* 1/17

Conversion formula (fault magnitude in case of a frequency fault):

1000000/ "Read value"

F69 Code of the fault

00 "No fault"

01 "Remote tripping order"

02 "Trip output contact for : tV>"

03 "Trip output contact for : tV>>"

04 "Trip output contact for : tV>>>"

05 "Trip output contact for : tV<"

06 "Trip output contact for : tV<<"

07 "Trip output contact for : tV<<<"

08 "Trip output contact for : tV0>"

09 "Trip output contact for : tV0>>"

10 "Trip output contact for : tV0>>>"

11 "Trip output contact for : t AUX1"

12 "Trip output contact for : t AUX2"

13 "Trip output contact for : t EQU.A"

14 "Trip output contact for : t EQU.B"

15 "Trip output contact for : tV2>"

16 "Trip output contact for : tV2>>"

17 "Trip output contact for : tV1<"


Page 64/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

CODE DESCRIPTION

18 "Trip output contact for : tV1<<"

19 "Trip output contact for : tf1"





24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

"Trip output contact for : tf6"

�Trip output contact for : t EQU C�

�Trip output contact for : t EQU D�

�Trip output contact for : df/dt1�







1.10 Specific formats for the frequency disturbance records files (P923 only)

CODE DESCRIPTION

F70 Stauts Frame of the frequency disturbance record

1st Word: Flag of Presence of the frequency disturbance (0: absent , 1: present , 2under

recording).

2nd Word: date of the oldest record (sec , MSB)

3rd Word: date of the oldest record (sec, LSB)

4th Word: date of the oldest record (msec , MSB)

5th Word: date of the oldest record (msec, LSB)

6th Word: Cause of frequency disturbance trigger :

Control Commande order for Starting frequency disturbance record

Specific logic input: Start disturbance record

Instantaneous rate of change of frequency element or a time delayedfrequency threshold.

Time delayed information of a logic equation

Closing of the tripping contact (RL1)

7th Word: Acknowledgement

F71 Frequency disturbance record data

1st Word: Samples number contained in the mapping

2nd Word: Pre-time sample number

3rd Word: Post-time sample number

4th Word: Primary value of the phase VT (LSB)

5th Word: Primary value of the phase VT (MSB)

6th Word: Secondary value of the phase VT

7th Word: Primary value of the residual VT (LSB)

8th Word: Primary value of the residual VT (MSB)

9th Word: Secondary value of the residual VT

10th Word: Internal rationumerator (100)

11th Word: Internal ratio- denominateur (6300 or 1700 )

12th Word: Address of the last page in the mapping (containning samples)

13th Word: Words number contained in the last page of the mapping


Page 66/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

CODE DESCRIPTION

F72 Conversion rules for the voltage values of the frequency disturbance record

* In ordre to obtain the phase voltages values at the VT primary, apply thefollowing formula:

�Read value� x (�VT primary value� / �VT secondary value�) x Internal rationumerator

*In order to obtain the Vo value at the residual VT primary, apply the following

formula:

�Read value� x (�Residual VT primary value� / �Residual VT secondary value�) xInternal ratio numerator

Internal ratio numerator=100/internal ratio denominator

Internal ration denominator=6300 for the range(57-130V) or 1700 for therange(220-480V)

Measured frequency= 1000000/measured cycle

F73 Frequency disturbance record data

1st Word: disturbance record end time (sec � MSB)

2nd Word: disturbance record end time (sec � LSB)

3rd Word: disturbance record end time (msec � MSB)

4th Word: disturbance record end time (msec � LSB)

5th Word: Cause of frequency disturbance trigger :

Control Commande order for Starting frequency disturbance record

Specific logic input: Start disturbance record

Time delayed information of a logic equation

Closing of the tripping contact (RL1)

6th Word: Frequency at the beginning of Post-time

Technical Guide P92x/EN CT/E11Courier DatabaseMiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 67/118

Courier Database

P92x/EN CT/E11 Technical GuideCourier Database

Page 68/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

BLANK PAGE


2. K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE

The serial communications are transmitted on K-Bus, a multi �drop networkproposing an instantaneous interface with the IEC 870-5 FT1.2 standards. Thelanguage and the communication protocol used are Courier. this concept permitsespecially to the generic programs of the principal units to access to a high numberof different relays without need to change permanently the principal unit program foreach relay type. The relays form a distributed database in which the principalworkstation proceeds to a selective call of the slave relays in order to know allnecessary information.

Courier is designed to work using a selective call feature which forbids any slaveperiphery to communicate directly with the central unit when a particular informationabout an event needs to be transmitted. The slave workstation has to wait that theprincipal workstation asks for the information. With Courier protocol, eachinformation is given into a box with a code of the length and the database type. Byknowing the database format, the reception periphery can read them.

2.1 K-BUS

K-Bus is a communication system developed for connecting the slave peripheries tothe central unit, permitting them to execute all remote monitoring and remote controlfunctions using the appropriate communication language. K-Bus is not able topermit a direct communication between the slave peripheries. Only a communicationbetween the central unit and the slave peripheries can be established. The principalcharacteristics of the K-Bus are the profitability, high security level, his installationfacility and his user friendliness.

2.1.1 K-Bus Transmission Layer

The communication port RS485 is based on several levels of reception andtransmission voltages with galvanic isolation given by a transformer. A selective callprotocol is used. No relay unit is allowed to transmit before having received avalidation message without any error detection. The transmission is synchronous ona pair of isolated waves. The data are coded FM0 with a clock signal to eliminate allCC-component, allowing the signal to cross the transformers.

With the exception of the central units, each network node is passive. The defectiveunits can not interfere with the communication established with the other healthyunits. The message format is HDLC. The data transmission speed is 64 Kbits/s.

2.1.2 K-Bus Connection

The connection on the K-Bus port is realized by screwed terminals of 4 mm of MIDOSstandards or by FASTON-connectors. A cabled pair is sufficient to realize theconnection, Knowing that the polarity is not important. It is recommended to use anexternal screen earth linked at the end of the principal workstation only. The screenhas to be fixed with a M4 screw following the wiring scheme. The functioning of theK-BUS network is guaranteed for 32 units connected on 1000 meters of cables.Thanks to the data code method, the polarity of the Bus cable connection is notimportant.

Note : the K-Bus network has to finish with a 150 ohms resistance oneach end of the bus. The principal workstation can be placedanywhere on the network. This command point has to beunique.


Page 70/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

2.1.3 Auxiliary equipment

For communication with the relay it is necessary to have at least one converter caseK-Bus/IEC870-5 of the type KITZ and a computer suitable software, aninterconnection cable RS232 for connecting the KITZ to the computer and a softwareconform to the specification of the Courier protocol.

2.2 Relay Courier Database

The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in a database beingreferenced by a row and a column address. Both the column and the row can take arange from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimalvalues, eg 0A02 is column 0A ( 10 decimal ) row 02. Associated settings /data willbe part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identifythe contents of the column.

This database is given in APPENDIX 1.

2.2.1 Main Reference Cells

Cell 0020: description on paragraph 1.4.6







(see APPENDIX 1).


2.2.2 List of events generated by the relay MiCOM P922 and P923

Code Event text Description AssociatedCOURIER cell

0001 TC CLOSE Close by TC 0021

0002 TC TRIP Trip by TC 0021

0003 DIST TRIG Disturbance Recorder Trip

0004 UNLOCK TRIP Unlock Trip TC 0021

0005 SET. CHANGE Setting parameter Change -

0006 V> Start V> 0023

0007 V>> Start V>> 0023

0008 V>>> Start V>>> 0023

0009 V< Start V< 0023

0010 V<< Start V<< 0023

0011 V<<< Start V<<< 0023

0012 V0> Start V0> 0023

0013 V0>> Start V0>> 0023

0014 V0>>> Start V0>>> 0023

0015 t V> Trip V> 0023

0016 t V>> Trip V>> 0023

0017 t V>>> Trip V>>> 0023

0018 t V< Trip V< 0023

0019 t V<< Trip V<< 0023

0020 t V<<< Trip V<<< 0023

0021 t V0> Trip V0> 0024

0022 t V0>> Trip V0>> 0024

0023 t V0>>> Trip V0>>> 0024

0024 t Aux1 Trip Auxiliary 1 0024

0025 t Aux2 Trip Auxiliary 2 0024

0026 EQUATION A Logical equation A 0024

0027 EQUATION B Logical equation B 0024

0028 Ts Change Logical Input Change 0020

0029 Blocking logic 1 Blocking logic no 1 0020

0030 Blocking logic 2 Blocking logic no 2 0020

0031 52 A O/O (CB close) 0020

0032 52 B F/O (CB Open) 0020

0033 CB Fail CB Failure 0020

0034 Setting Change Setting Group Change -


Page 72/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


0035 TRIP t V> Trip t V> -

0036 TRIP t V>> Trip t V>> -

0037 TRIP t V>>> Trip t V>>> -

0038 TRIP t V< Trip t V< -

0039 TRIP t V<< Trip t V<< -

0040 TRIP t V<<< Trip t V<<< -

0041 TRIP t V0> Trip t V0> -

0042 TRIP t V0>> Trip t V0>> -

0043 TRIP t V0>>> Trip t V0>>> -

0044 TRIP t Aux1 Trip t Auxiliary 1 -

0045 TRIP t Aux2 Trip t Auxiliary 2 -

0046 TRIP EQUATION A Trip Logical equation A -

0047 TRIP EQUATION B Trip Logical equation B -

0048 Aux Relays Auxiliary relays command 0021

0049 ACK 1 AL (FAV) First alarm acknowledge (Front Panel) -

0050 ACK ALAR (FAV) All alarms acknowledge (Front Panel) -

0051 ACK 1 AL (COM) First alarm acknowledge(Communication)

-

0052 ACK ALAR (COM) All alarms acknowledge (Communication) -

0053 Hard Maj Alarm Hardware major alarm 0022

0054 Hard Min Alarm Hardware minor alarm 0022

0055 V2 > Start V2> 0024

0056 V2 >> Start V2>> 0024

0057 V1 < Start V1< 0024

0058 V1 << Start V1<< 0024

0059 F1 Start F1 0024

0060 F2 Start F2 0024

0061 F3 Start F3 0024

0062 F4 Start F4 0025

0063 F5 Start F5 0025

0064 F6 Start F6 0025

0065 t V2> Trip V2> 0025

0066 t V2>> Trip V2>> 0025

0067 t V1< Trip V1< 0025

0068 t V1<< Trip V1<< 0025

0069 t F1 Trip F1 0024



0070 t F2 Trip F2 0024

0071 t F3 Trip F3 0024

0072 t F4 Trip F4 0025

0073 t F5 Trip F5 0025

0074 t F6 Trip F6 0025

0075 FREQ. NONMEASURABLE

Non measurable Frequency 0024

0076 OPEN OPERATING TIME CB Open operating Time 0024

0077 TRIP OPERATION Nb CB Trip operation number 0024

0078 CLOSE OPERATING TIME CB Close operating Time 0024

0079 TRIP: t V2> Trip t V2> -

0080 TRIP: t V2>> Trip t V2>> -

0081 TRIP: t V1< Trip t V1< -

0082 TRIP: t V1<< Trip t V1<< -

0083 TRIP: t F1 Trip t F1 -






0089 Reserved -

0090 Reserved -

0091 Reserved -

0092 EQUATION C Logical equation C 0025

0093 EQUATION D Logical equation D 0025

0094 dF / dT 1 Start df / dt 1 0026

0095 dF / dT 2 Start df / dt 2 0026

0096 dF / dT 3 Start df / dt 3 0026

0097 dF / dT 4 Start df / dt 4 0026

0098 dF / dT 5 Start df / dt 5 0026

0099 dF / dT 6 Start df / dt 6 0026

0100 TRIP : EQUATION C Trip Logical equation C -

0101 TRIP : EQUATION D Trip Logical equation D -

0102 TRIP : t dF / dT 1 Trip t df / dt 1 -




Page 74/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923





0108 LATCHED RELAYS Latched Relay command -

NOTE : When the cell reference is different from 0, this means that anevent is generated the event takes place and another event isgenerated when the event disappears.

When the cell reference is equal to zero, only the event is generated.

Twelve bits are available in the character String to describe the content of a Couriercell.

When the event appears, the corresponding bit of the associated format changes to�1�.

When the event disappears, the corresponding bit of the associated format changesto �0�.

2.3 Setting Changes

This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:

Enter Setting Mode- checks that the cell is settable and returns to the limits.

Pre-load Setting- Place a new value in the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that nosetting changes has taken place, the confirmation of the new setting value does notachieved by this action.

Execute Setting- Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positiveresponse will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will bereturned.

Abort Setting- This command can be used to abandon the setting change.

This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the settinglimits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However thismethod can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands arerequired for each change.

2.4 Systems Integration Data

2.4.1 Address of the relay

The relays can have any address between 1 and 254 included. The address 255corresponds to the global address to which all relays and all the other slaveperipheries respond. The Courier protocol specifies that no response can be resentfrom the slave periphery to the global message. This permits to avoid that allperipheries respond at the same time creating by this way a conflict on the bus.

Each relay possesses an address settled on 225 in order to guarantee that in case ofhis connection to the operating network, his address cannot create any conflict withthe address of another periphery already in exploitation. In order to permit to a newperiphery to be entirely operational, his address has to be settled. The address canbe modified manually in capturing the password, than in following the method of thesetting change through the user interface on the front plate of the relay.


Similarly, if the computerized system used takes in charge the auto addressing, therelay address can be settled on 0 by activating the auto-addressing characteristics ofthe computer software. The relay receives then the next valid address on the bus.

If the address is 255 or not known, it can be modified by sending a new address,with a global message, to a periphery possessing a particular serial number. Thismethod is used for those peripheries which do not have any user interface for readingor changing the address in process.

2.4.2 Measured Values

Each measured value can be periodically extracted by a selective call of MiCOMP921, P922 and P923 relays.

2.4.3 Status word

Each response of a slave periphery contains an octet of status. This octet is resent bythe relay at the beginning of each message for signaling important data. Theprincipal workstation can be designed to respond automatically to these importantdata.

The contained indications are the following:

Bit 0 : 1=Recording of disturbance available for retrieval

Bit 1 : 1=Change of the unit status word

Bit 2 : 1=Change of the control status word

Bit 3 : 1=Relay busy, no response possible in time

Bit 4 : 1=Relay out of service

Bit 5 : 1=Recording of events available for retrieval

Bit 6 : 1=Switched Alarm indicator

Bit 7 : 1=Switched tripping indicator

2.4.4 Unit Status word

The unit status word is located in the menu 000C

Each bits pair of the unit status word serves to indicate the status (position ) of the unitelements checked through the relay.

This functionality is not supported on MiCOM P921,P922 and P923 relays.

2.4.5 Control status word

The control status word is located in the cell of the menu 000D

It is used for transmitting the control information of the slave periphery to the centralunit. Nevertheless, the relays described in this manual are protection relays , whichdo not use this control characteristic.


Page 76/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

2.4.6 Logic Input status word

The logic control input status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call fromthe cell of menu 0020. The 2 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the statusof each of the 2 logic inputs. This cell is accessible only in reading.

Bit 0: Logic Input 1





2.4.7 Output Relay Status word

The output relay status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cellof menu 0021. The 8 bits inferior to the returned value indicating the status of eachof the seven output relays . This cell is accessible only in reading.

Bit 0: relay 1 (TRIP)

Bit 1,2,3: programmable relays n° 2,3,4,

Bit 4: Watchdog

Bit 5,6,7,8: programmable relays n° 5,6,7,8

2.4.8 Alarm Information

The status of internal controls triggered by the auto-control program of the relays canbe observed in proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0022.

The bits 0 to 6 indicate the material controls of the product.

Bit 0 Analog Output Error

Bit 1 Communication Error

Bit 2 EEPROM Data error

Bit 3 VT Error

Bit 4 Clock Error

Bit 5 EEPROM Calibration error

Bit 6 RAM Error

2.4.9 Protection Indication

The protection indications provide the status of different protection elements in therelay; and thus the fault indications are so generated. In case of a fault recording,these indications are transmitted to an events recorder. This is the only way to accessto these indications.

The status of the internal protection indication of the relays can be observed inproceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0023 , 0024, 0025 and 0026.


The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0023:

Bit Position Protection Function

0 U<

1 U<<

2 U<<<

3 U>

4 U>>

5 U>>>

6 V0>

7 V0>>

8 tU<

9 tU<<

10 tU<<<

11 tU>

12 tU>>

13 tU>>>

14 tV0>

15 tV0>>



0 V0>>>

1 tV0>>>

2 t Aux1

3 t Aux2

4 t Equ 1

5 t Equ 2

6 Frequency ( Not measurable)

7 Open operation time

8 Trip operation Nb

9 Close operation time

10 F1

11 tF1

12 F2

13 tF2

14 F3

15 tF3



Page 78/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


0 F4

1 tF4

2 F5

3 tF5

4 F6

5 tF6

6 V2>

7 V2>>

8 V1<

9 V1<<

10 tV2>

11 tV2>>

12 tV1<

13 tV1<<

14 t Equ 3

15 t Equ 4

The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0026:(Only MiCOM P923)


0 df/dt1

1 df/dt2

2 df/dt3

3 df/dt4

4 df/dt5

5 df/dt6

2.4.10 Control and supervision

The control functions through the relays can be executed using a serial link. Thesefunctions particularly constitute the changes of an individual relay setting parameters,the changes of the setting group, the remote control of the circuit breaker, as well asthe functions and the locking of the selected output relays.

The remote control is limited to the selected control functions in the table of the relaymenu. In order to modify this selection, a corresponding password is needed. TheCRC and the controls of the message length are used every time a message isreceived . No response is given for message received with an error detection. Theprinciple unit can be re-initialized in order to send again an order, as often as itseems necessary, if it does not receive any response or have received a response withan error detection.


NOTE : The control commands are generally materialized by the changeof the cell value. They dispose the same inherent security. Noresponse is allowed for the global orders to avoid any conflict inthe bus. For this type of order, a double transmission is used bythe relay for the verification of the message. The relay transmitsthen a confirmation indicating that the control order or thechange of setting is accepted. If this is not the case, the relaysends an error message.

2.4.11 Remote Change of setting

When using the serial port, the relay responds to the orders of setting changes only ifthe SD0 Link =1 is selected.

� The selection of the SD0 Link =1 blocks all the remote changes of settings withthe exception of the SC logical Links and the password capture.

� When the SD0 Link =0 is selected, the remote setting changes are protected bythe password.

To make a remote changes of settings, a password is needed to be captured(remotely), and then the SD and SD0 function Links have to be set equal to 1.

2.5 Events Extraction (MiCOM P922 and P923 only)

Events can be extracted either manually or automatically. For automatic extraction allevents are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, thisincludes Faults. The manual approach allows the user to select events and faultsrandomly from the stored records.

2.5.1 Automatic Event Extraction

This method is intended for continuous extraction of events and fault information as itis produced via the rear port.

When a new event information is created, the event bit is set within the status byte.This indicates to the Master device that an event information is available. The oldest(and not extracted ) event can be extracted from the relay using the Send EventCommand. The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a CourierType 0 or Type 3 event. The latest type is used for the fault records.

Once an event is extracted from the relay, the Accept Event can be used to confirmthat this event has been successfully extracted. If all the events are extracted, then theevent bit will reset. If there are more events to be extracted, the next one can beaccessed using the Send Event Command as before.

2.5.2 Events Types

Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:

� Change of state of output contact

� Change of state of opto input

� Protection element operation

� Alarm condition

� Setting change

� Fault record ( Type 3 Courier Event )


Page 80/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

2.5.3 Event Format

The Send Event Command results in the return of the following fields by the relay:

� Cell Reference

� Time stamp

� Cell text

� Cell value

The table in paragraph 1.2.2 (list of events created by the relay) indicates how thecontent of the above mentioned fields are interpreted. The fault event will return aCourier Type 3 event which contains the above fields together with two additionalfields:

� Event extraction column

� Event number

These fields contain additional information which are extracted from the relay usingthe referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a settingwhich allows the selection of the fault record. This setting should be set to the eventnumber value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted fromthe relay by uploading the text and data from the column.

2.5.4 Manual record Extraction

Column 02 of the database can be used to manually view the fault records. Thecontents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possibleto select directly a fault record.

Fault record selection (Row 01) � this cell can be used to directly select a faultrecord using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of the five stored fault records (0will be the most recent fault while 4 is the oldest one). The column will then containthe details of the fault record selected ( row 02 to 0A).

It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from therelay, the number associated with a particular record will change when a new faultoccurs.

2.6 Disturbance Record Extraction

The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible via the Courierinterface.

Select Record Number (Row 01) � this cell can be used to select the record to beextracted. Record 0 will be the oldest un-extracted record, older records will beassigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records.To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port, the disturbance bit of the Statusbyte is set by the relay whenever there are un-extracted disturbance records.

Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of therecord can be read from the cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extractedusing the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B.

As it has been stated, the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extractdisturbance records as they occur. This is possible when using the standard Couriermechanism defined in chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide.

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

81/

118

3.

APP

END

IX 1

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

00

00

SYST

EM D

ATA

01La

ngua

geVe

r>:

Inde

xed

Strin

g0 1 2 3

Lang

1 (F

renc

h)La

ng2

(Eng

lish)

*La

ng3

(Ger

man

)La

ng4

(Spa

nish

)

Setti

ng0/

3/1

02Pa

ssw

ord

ASC

II Pa

ssw

ord(

4 by

tes)

AA

AA

Setti

ng32

/127

/1

03Fn

links

: NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

04D

escr

iptio

nA

SCII

Text

(6 b

ytes

)"P

922x

y" o

r "P

921x

y", w

ith :

x =

S o

r �

y =

0 o

r 1

(V. G

am)

Setti

ng32

/127

/1

05Pl

ant R

efer

ence

ASC

II Te

xt (4

byt

es)

"Pre

f"Se

tting

32/1

27/1

06M

odel

Num

ber

ASC

II Te

xt (1

6 by

tes)

"Mod

el N

umbe

r"D

ata

07Fi

rmw

are

Num

ber:

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

08Se

rial N

umbe

rA

SCII

Text

(16

byte

s)"S

eria

l Num

ber"

Dat

a

09Fr

eque

ncy

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

XXXX

Hz

Setti

ng50

/60/

10

0AC

omm

unic

atio

n Le

vel

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1D

ata

0BA

ddre

ssU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)1*

Setti

ng1/

255/

1

0CPl

ant S

tatu

s W

ord:

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

0DC

ontr

ol S

tatu

s W

ord:

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

0ESe

tting

Gro

upU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

Dat

a

0FLo

ad s

hed

Stag

e: N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TE

10C

ircui

t Bre

aker

Con

trol

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

11So

ftwar

e Re

fere

nce

ASC

II Te

xt (1

6 ch

arac

ters

)D

ata

12-1

FU

nuse

d, r

eser

ved

20Lo

gic

Inpu

t Sta

tus

Bina

ry fl

ag (5

bits

/ 2

bits

)0:

log

inpu

t 11:

log

inpu

t 22:

log

inpu

t 33:

log

inpu

t 44:

log

inpu

t 5

Dat

a

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

82/

118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

21Re

lay

Out

put S

tatu

sBi

nary

flag

(9 b

its /

5 b

its)

0: r

elay

1 (t

rip)

1: r

elay

22:

rel

ay 3

3: r

elay

44:

wat

chdo

g re

lay

5 : r

elay

56

: rel

ay 6

7 : r

elay

78

: rel

ay 8

Dat

a

22A

larm

Bina

ry fl

ag (1

6 bi

ts)

0: A

na o

utpu

t err

1: C

omm

err

2: E

epro

m e

rr d

ata

3: V

t err

or4:

Clo

ck e

rror

5: E

epro

m e

rr c

alib

6: R

am e

rror

7 to

15:

res

erve

d

Dat

a

23Ps

eudo

Log

ic In

put S

tatu

s gr

oup

1Bi

nary

flag

(16

bits

)0:

U<

1: U

<<

2: U

<<

<3:

U>

4: U

>>

5: U

>>

>6:

V0>

7: V

0>>

8: t

U<

9: t

U<

<10

: t U

<<

<11

: t U

>12

: t U

>>

13:

t U>

>>

14:

t V0

>15

: t V

0>>

Dat

a

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

83/

118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

24Ps

eudo

Log

ic In

put S

tatu

s gr

oup

2Bi

nary

flag

(16

bits

/ 6

bits

)0:

V0>

>>

1: tV

0>>

>2:

t A

ux 1

3: t

Aux

24:

t Eq

u 1

5: t

Equ

26

: Fre

q. N

on m

easu

rabl

e7

: Ope

n O

pera

ting

Tim

e8:

Trip

ope

ratio

n N

b9:

Clo

se o

pera

ting

time

10 :

F111

: tF

112

: F2

13 :

tF2

14 :

F 3

15 :

tF3

Dat

a

25Ps

eudo

Log

ic In

put S

tatu

s gr

oup

3Bi

nary

flag

(16

bits

)0

: F4

1 : t

F42

: F5

3 : t

F54

: F6

5 : t

F66

: V2>

7 : V

2>>

8 : V

1<9

: V1<

<10

: tV

2>11

: tV

2>>

12 :

tV1<

13 :

tV1<

<14

: t E

qu 3

15: t

Equ

4

26Ps

eudo

Log

ic In

put S

tatu

s gr

oup

4Bi

nary

flag

(6 b

its)

0 : D

FDT1

1 : D

FDT2

2 : D

FDT3

3 : D

FDT4

4: D

FDT5

5: D

FDT6

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

84/

118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

01

00

USE

R C

ON

TRO

L

01Re

mot

e co

ntro

l 1Bi

nary

flag

(16

bits

/ 5

bits

)0:

Unl

ock

trip

con

t.*1:

Ack

firs

t ala

rm2

: Ack

all

alar

ms

3 : T

RIP

4 : C

LOSE

5 : S

ettin

g C

hang

e6

: RM

S ov

er&

max

Res

et7

: Res

erve

d8

: Dis

t. Re

c. T

rig9

: Res

erve

d10

: Re

serv

ed11

: Re

serv

ed12

: Re

serv

ed13

: Re

serv

ed14

: Re

serv

ed15

: SR

AM

def

. a

ck

Setti

ng0/

31/

1 o

r 0/

6553

5/1

02

00

VIE

W R

ECO

RD

S

01Re

cord

num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

5 *

Setti

ng1/

5/1

02O

ccur

dat

eU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

03A

ctiv

e se

t gro

upU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)

04Ph

ase

in fa

ult

ASC

II Te

xt

05Fa

ult I

dA

SCII

Text

06M

agni

tude

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

07U

a m

agni

tude

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

08U

b m

agni

tude

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

09U

c m

agni

tude

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0AV0

mag

nitu

deC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r

03

00

MEA

SUREM

ENTS

01U

a/U

ab R

MS

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

Dat

a

02U

b/U

bc R

MS

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

Dat

a

03U

c/U

ca R

MS

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

Dat

a

04V0

RM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

rD

ata

05V1

(Vdi

rect

)C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

rD

ata

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

85/

118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

06V2

(Vin

v)C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

rD

ata

07FR

EQU

ENC

YC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

rD

ata

08Re

set M

ax &

Moy

RM

S

09M

AX

RMS

Ua/

Uab

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

Dat

a

0AM

AX

RMS

Ub/

Ubc

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

Dat

a

0BM

AX

RMS

Uc/

Uca

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

Dat

a

0CU

a/U

ab R

MS

AVE

RAG

EC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

rD

ata

0DU

b/U

bc R

MS

AVE

RAG

EC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

rD

ata

0EU

c/U

ca R

MS

AVE

RAG

EC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

rD

ata

0FFr

eque

ncy

Cha

ngeo

f rat

eC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

rD

ata

06

00

SW M

ON

ITO

RIN

G

01SW

ope

ratio

n tim

eC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

0 s

Dat

a

02SW

Clo

sing

tim

eC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

rD

ata

03SW

ope

ratio

n nb

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

Dat

a

08

00

TIM

E:

01D

ate/

Tim

eIE

C87

0 Ti

me

& D

ate

Dat

a

02D

ate

Form

at (I

EC/n

o)In

dexe

d St

ring

0 : P

rivat

e *

1 : I

ECSe

tting

0 (P

rivat

e) /

1 (I

EC)

0D

00

SETT

ING

CH

OIC

E

01Vo

ltage

wiri

ng ty

peU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)3

Vpn

* /

3 Vp

n +

Vr

/ 2

Vpp

+ V

r/

3 Vp

p +

Vr

Setti

ng0/

3/

1

02Pr

otec

tion

type

(PN

-PP)

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

0 *

0D01

< 2

Setti

ng0

(P-N

) / 1

(P-P

)/1

10FR

EQU

ENC

Y &

DF/

DT

SETT

ING

S

11D

F/D

T cy

cle

num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1 *

Setti

ng1

/ 20

0 /

1

12D

F/D

T va

lidat

ion

num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

4 *

Setti

ng2

/ 4

/ 2

13Fr

eque

ncy

prot

ectio

n bl

ocki

ng th

resh

old

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

5.0

V *

if 10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

VSe

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

86/

118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

0E

00

VT

RATI

OS

01Ph

ase

VT P

rimar

yU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)20

00 *

Setti

ng10

/100

000/

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

22/

48/1

02Ph

ase

VT S

econ

dary

(100

0 KV

Ran

ge)

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1000

*Se

tting

570/

1300

/1 if

100

0KV

Rang

e

03N

eutr

al V

T Pr

imar

yU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)20

00 *

0D01

!=

0Se

tting

10/1

0000

0/1

if 10

00KV

Rang

eel

se 2

2/48

/1

04N

eutr

al V

T Se

cond

ary

(100

0 KV

Ran

ge)

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

1000

*0D

01 !

= 0

Setti

ng57

0/13

00/1

if 1

000K

VRa

nge

0F

00

SETT

ING

GRO

UPS

01Se

tting

gro

up to

ggle

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

: Edg

e *

1 : L

evel

Setti

ng0

(Edg

e) /

1 (L

evel

)

02Se

lect

set

ting

grou

pU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)1*

0F01

= 0

Setti

ng1/

2

03G

roup

1 v

isib

leIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 : Y

ES *

1 : N

OSe

tting

0 (Y

ES) /

1 (N

O)

04G

roup

2 v

isib

leIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 : Y

ES1

: NO

*Se

tting

0 (Y

ES) /

1 (N

O)

Prote

ctio

n G

roup n

° 1

20

00

PHA

SE U

ND

ERV

OLT

AG

E

01St

age

1 U

nder

volta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

02M

ax U

<In

dexe

d St

ring

00

= N

O*

/ 1

= O

R /

2 =

AN

DSe

tting

0/2/

1

03Th

resh

old

U<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

5.0

V *

if 10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

V20

02 !

= 0

Setti

ng5.

0 /

130.

0 /

0.1

if10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

/ 48

0.0

/ 0.

5

04D

elay

Typ

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 10:

def

inite

tim

e *

1 : i

nver

se ti

me

2002

!=

0Se

tting

0/1/

1

05TM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 *

2004

=1

Setti

ng0.

5/10

0.0/

0.5

06T

RESE

TC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s

*20

04 =

1Se

tting

0 /

1000

.0 /

0.1

s

07D

elay

U<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

2004

=0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

08-0

FRe

serv

ed

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

87/

118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

10St

age

2 U

nder

volta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

11M

ax U

<<

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

0 =

NO

* /

1 =

OR

/ 2

=A

ND

Setti

ng0/

2/1

12Th

resh

old

U<

<C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r5.

0 V

* if

1000

KV R

ange

else

20.

0 V

2011

!=

0Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KV R

ange

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

13D

elay

U<

<C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

01 s

*20

11 !

= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

14-1

FRe

serv

ed

20St

age

3 U

nder

volta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

21M

ax U

<<

<In

dexe

d St

ring

00

= N

O*

/ 1

= O

R /

2 =

AN

DSe

tting

0/2/

1

22Th

resh

old

U<

<<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

130.

0 V

* if

1000

KV R

ange

else

480

.0 V

2021

!=

0Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KV R

ange

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

23D

elay

U<

<<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.01

s *

2021

!=

0Se

tting

0 /

599.

9 /

0.01

s

24H

yste

resi

s U

<U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)10

2 %

*20

02 !

= 0

or 2011

!=

0or 20

21 !

=0

Setti

ng10

2 /

105

/ 1

(%)

21

00

PHA

SE O

VER

VO

LTA

GE

01St

age

1 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

02M

ax U

>In

dexe

d St

ring

00

= N

O*

/ 1

= O

R /

2 =

AN

DSe

tting

0/2/

1

03Th

resh

old

U>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

130.

0 V

* if

1000

KV R

ange

else

480

.0 V

2102

!=

0Se

tting

5.0

/ 20

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KV R

ange

else

20.

0 /

720.

0 /

0.5

04D

elay

Typ

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 10:

def

inite

tim

e *

1 : i

nver

se ti

me

2102

!=

0Se

tting

0/1/

1

05TM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 *

2104

=1

Setti

ng0.

5/10

0.0/

0.5

06T

RESE

TC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s

*21

04 =

1Se

tting

0 /

1000

.0 /

0.1

s

07D

elay

U>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

2104

=0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

08-0

FRe

serv

ed

10St

age

2 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

88/

118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

11M

ax U

>>

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

0 =

NO

*/1

= O

R/2

= A

ND

Setti

ng0/

2/1

12Th

resh

old

U>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r13

0.0

V *

if 10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 4

80.0

V21

11 !

= 0

Setti

ng5.

0 /

260.

0 /

0.1

if10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

/ 96

0.0

/ 0.

5

13D

elay

U>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

01 s

*21

11 !

= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

14-1

FRe

serv

ed

20St

age

3 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

21M

ax U

>>

>In

dexe

d St

ring

00

= N

O*

/ 1

= O

R /

2 =

AN

DSe

tting

0/2/

1

22Th

resh

old

U>

>>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

130.

0 V

* if

1000

KV R

ange

else

480

.0 V

2121

!=

0Se

tting

5.0

/ 26

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KV R

ange

else

20.

0 /

960.

0 /

0.5

23D

elay

U>

>>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.01

s *

2121

!=

0Se

tting

0 /

599.

9 /

0.01

s

24H

yste

resi

s U

>U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)98

% *

2102

!=

0or 21

11 !

=0

or 2121

!=

0

Setti

ng95

/ 9

8 /

1 (%

)

22

00

EARTH

FA

ULT

01St

age

1 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

02M

ax V

0>Bi

nary

(1 b

it)0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

dSe

tting

0/1/

1

03Th

resh

old

V0>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

5.0

V *

if 10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

V22

02=

1Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KV R

ange

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

04D

elay

Typ

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 10:

def

inite

tim

e *

1: in

vers

e tim

e22

02=

1Se

tting

0/1/

1

05TM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 *

2204

=1

Setti

ng0.

5/10

0.0/

0.5

06T

RESE

TC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s

*22

04 =

1Se

tting

0 /

1000

.0 /

0.1

s

07D

elay

V0>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

2204

=0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

08-0

FRe

serv

ed

10St

age

2 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

11M

ax V

0>>

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

89/

118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

12Th

resh

old

V0>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r5.

0 V

* if

1000

KV R

ange

else

20.

0 V

2211

=1

Setti

ng5.

0 /

130.

0 /

0.1

if10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

/ 48

0.0

/ 0.

5

13D

elay

V0>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

04 s

*22

11=

1Se

tting

0 /

599.

9 /

0.01

s

14-1

FRe

serv

ed

20St

age

3 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

21M

ax V

0>>

>Bi

nary

(1 b

it)0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

dSe

tting

0/1/

1

22Th

resh

old

V0>

>>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

5.0

V *

if 10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

V22

21=

1Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KV R

ange

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

23D

elay

V0>

>>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

2221

=1

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

23

00

V2 (

Vin

vers

e) O

VER

VO

LTA

GE

01St

age

1 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

02M

ax V

2>Bi

nary

(1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

03Th

resh

old

V2>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

130.

0 V

* if

1000

KV

Rang

eel

se 4

80.0

V23

02=

1Se

tting

5.0

/ 20

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

720.

0 /

0.5

04D

elay

Typ

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 10:

def

inite

tim

e *

1 : i

nver

se ti

me

2302

=1

Setti

ng0/

1/1

05TM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 *

2304

=1

Setti

ng0.

5/10

0.0/

0.5

06T

RESE

TC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s

*23

04 =

1Se

tting

0 /

1000

.0 /

0.1

s

07D

elay

V2>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

2304

=0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

08-0

FRe

serv

ed

10St

age

2 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

11M

ax V

2>>

Bina

ry (

1 bi

t)0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

dSe

tting

0/1/

1

12Th

resh

old

V2>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r13

0.0

V *

if 10

00K

V Ra

nge

else

480

.0 V

2311

=1

Setti

ng5.

0 /

200.

0 /

0.1

if 10

00KV

Rang

eel

se 2

0.0

/ 72

0.0

/ 0.

5

13D

elay

V2>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

04 s

*23

11=

1Se

tting

0 /

599.

9 /

0.01

s

24

00

V1 (

Dir

ect)

UN

DER

VO

LTA

GE

01St

age

1 U

nder

volta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

02M

ax V

1<Bi

nary

(1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

90/

118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

03Th

resh

old

V1<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

5.0

V *

if 10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

V24

02=

1Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

04D

elay

Typ

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 10:

def

inite

tim

e *

1: in

vers

e tim

e24

02=

1Se

tting

0/1/

1

05TM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 *

2404

=1

Setti

ng0.

5/10

0.0/

0.5

06T

RESE

TC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s

*24

04 =

1Se

tting

0 /

1000

.0 /

0.1

s

07D

elay

V1<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

2404

=0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

08-0

FRe

serv

ed

10St

age

2 U

nder

volta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

11M

ax V

1<<

Bina

ry (

1 bi

t)0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

dSe

tting

0/1/

1

12Th

resh

old

V1<

<C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r5.

0 V

* if

1000

KV

Rang

eel

se 2

0.0

V24

11=

1Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

13D

elay

V1<

<C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

04 s

*24

11=

1Se

tting

0 /

599.

9 /

0.01

s

25

00

FREQ

UEN

CY

01F1

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

02Th

resh

old

F1C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z25

01 !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

03D

elay

F1

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

2501

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

04F2

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

05Th

resh

old

F2C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z25

04 !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

06D

elay

F2

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

2504

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

07F3

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

08Th

resh

old

F3C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z25

07 !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

09D

elay

F3

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

2507

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

0AF4

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

91/

118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

0BTh

resh

old

F4C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z25

0A !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

0CD

elay

F4

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

250A

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

0DF5

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

0ETh

resh

old

F5C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z25

0D !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

0FD

elay

F5

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

250D

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

10F6

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

11Th

resh

old

F6C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z25

10 !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

12D

elay

F6

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

2510

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

26

00

FREQ

UEN

CY C

HA

NG

E O

F RA

TE

01df

/dt 1

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

02Th

resh

old

df/d

t 1C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*26

01 !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

03df

/dt 2

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

04Th

resh

old

df/d

t 2C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*26

03 !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

05df

/dt 3

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

06Th

resh

old

df/d

t 3C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*26

05 !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

07df

/dt 4

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

08Th

resh

old

df/d

t 4C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*26

07 !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

09df

/dt 5

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

0ATh

resh

old

df/d

t 5C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*26

09 !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

0Bdf

/dt 6

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

0CTh

resh

old

df/d

t 6C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*26

0B !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

Prote

ctio

n G

roup n

° 2

40

00

PHA

SE U

ND

ERV

OLT

AG

E

01St

age

1 U

nder

volta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

02M

ax U

<In

dexe

d St

ring

00

= N

O*/

1 =

OR/

2 =

AN

DSe

tting

0/2/

1

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

92/

118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

03Th

resh

old

U<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

5.0

V *

if 10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

V40

02 !=

0Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

04D

elay

Typ

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 10:

def

inite

tim

e *

1 : i

nver

se ti

me

4002

!= 0

Setti

ng0/

1/1

05TM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 *

4004

=1

Setti

ng0.

5/10

0.0/

0.5

06T

RESE

TC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s

*40

04 =

1Se

tting

0 /

1000

.0 /

0.1

s

07D

elay

U<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

4004

=0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

08-0

FRe

serv

ed

10St

age

2 U

nder

volta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

11M

ax U

<<

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

0 =

NO

* /

1 =

OR

/ 2

=A

ND

Setti

ng0/

2/1

12Th

resh

old

U<

<C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r5.

0 V

* if

1000

KV

Rang

eel

se 2

0.0

V40

11 !=

0Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

13D

elay

U<

<C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

01 s

*40

11 !=

0Se

tting

0 /

599.

9 /

0.01

s

14-1

FRe

serv

ed

20St

age

3 U

nder

volta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

21M

ax U

<<

<In

dexe

d St

ring

00

= N

O*

/ 1

= O

R /

2 =

AN

DSe

tting

0/2/

1

22Th

resh

old

U<

<<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

130.

0 V

* if

1000

KV

Rang

eel

se 4

80.0

V40

21 !=

0Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

23D

elay

U<

<<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.01

s *

4021

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

24H

yste

resi

s U

<U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)10

2 %

*40

02 !=

0or 40

11 !=

0or 40

21 !=

0

Setti

ng10

2 /

105

/ 1

(%)

41

00

PHA

SE O

VER

VO

LTA

GE

01St

age

1 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

02M

ax U

>In

dexe

d St

ring

00

= N

O*

/ 1

= O

R /

2 =

AN

DSe

tting

0/2/

1

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

93/

118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

03Th

resh

old

U>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

130.

0 V

* if

1000

KV

Rang

eel

se 4

80.0

V41

02 !=

0Se

tting

5.0

/ 20

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

720.

0 /

0.5

04D

elay

Typ

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 10:

def

inite

tim

e *

1 : i

nver

se ti

me

4102

!= 0

Setti

ng0/

1/1

05TM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 *

4104

=1

Setti

ng0.

5/10

0.0/

0.5

06T

RESE

TC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s

*41

04 =

1Se

tting

0 /

1000

.0 /

0.1

s

07D

elay

U>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

4104

=0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

08-0

FRe

serv

ed

10St

age

2 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

11M

ax U

>>

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

0 =

NO

* /

1 =

OR

/ 2

=A

ND

Setti

ng0/

2/1

12Th

resh

old

U>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r13

0.0

V *

if 10

00K

V Ra

nge

else

480

.0 V

4111

!= 0

Setti

ng5.

0 /

260.

0 /

0.1

if 10

00KV

Rang

eel

se 2

0.0

/ 96

0.0

/ 0.

5

13D

elay

U>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

01 s

*41

11 !=

0Se

tting

0 /

599.

9 /

0.01

s

14-1

FRe

serv

ed

20St

age

3 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

21M

ax U

>>

>In

dexe

d St

ring

00

= N

O*

/ 1

= O

R /

2 =

AN

DSe

tting

0/2/

1

22Th

resh

old

U>

>>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

130.

0 V

* if

1000

KV

Rang

eel

se 4

80.0

V41

21 !=

0Se

tting

5.0

/ 26

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

960.

0 /

0.5

23D

elay

U>

>>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.01

s *

4121

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

24H

yste

resi

s U

>U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)98

% *

4102

!= 0

or 4111

!=0

or 4121

!=0

Setti

ng95

/ 9

8 /

1 (%

)

42

00

EARTH

FA

ULT

01St

age

1 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

02M

ax V

0>Bi

nary

(1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

94/

118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

03Th

resh

old

V0>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

5.0

V *

if 10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

V42

02=

1Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

04D

elay

Typ

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 10:

def

inite

tim

e *

1: in

vers

e tim

e42

02=

1Se

tting

0/1/

1

05TM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 *

4204

=1

Setti

ng0.

5/10

0.0/

0.5

06T

RESE

TC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s

*42

04 =

1Se

tting

0 /

1000

.0 /

0.1

s

07D

elay

V0>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

4204

=0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

08-0

FRe

serv

ed

10St

age

2 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

11M

ax V

0>>

Bina

ry (

1 bi

t)0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

dSe

tting

0/1/

1

12Th

resh

old

V0>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r5.

0 V

* if

1000

KV

Rang

eel

se 2

0.0

V42

11=

1Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

13D

elay

V0>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

04 s

*42

11=

1Se

tting

0 /

599.

9 /

0.01

s

14-1

FRe

serv

ed

20St

age

3 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

21M

ax V

0>>

>Bi

nary

(1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

22Th

resh

old

V0>

>>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

5.0

V *

if 10

00KV

Ran

geel

se 2

0.0

V42

21=

1Se

tting

5.0

/ 13

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

480.

0 /

0.5

23D

elay

V0>

>>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

4221

=1

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

43

00

V2 (

Vin

vers

e) O

VER

VO

LTA

GE

01St

age

1 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

02M

ax V

2>Bi

nary

(1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

03Th

resh

old

V2>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

130.

0 V

* if

1000

KV

Rang

eel

se 4

80.0

V43

02=

1Se

tting

5.0

/ 20

0.0

/ 0.

1 if

1000

KVRa

nge

else

20.

0 /

720.

0 /

0.5

04D

elay

Typ

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 10:

def

inite

tim

e *

1 : i

nver

se ti

me

4302

=1

Setti

ng0/

1/1

05TM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 *

4304

=1

Setti

ng0.

5/10

0.0/

0.5

06T

RESE

TC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s

*43

04 =

1Se

tting

0 /

1000

.0 /

0.1

s

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

95/

118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

07D

elay

V2>

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

4304

=0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

08-0

FRe

serv

ed

10St

age

2 O

verv

olta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

11M

ax V

2>>

Bina

ry (

1 bi

t)0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

dSe

tting

0/1/

1

12Th

resh

old

V2>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r13

0.0

V *

if 10

00K

V Ra

nge

else

480

.0 V

4311

=1

Setti

ng5.

0 /

200.

0 /

0.1

if 10

00KV

Rang

eel

se 2

0.0

/ 72

0.0

/ 0.

5

13D

elay

V2>

>C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

04 s

*43

11=

1Se

tting

0 /

599.

9 /

0.01

s

44

00

V1 (

Dir

ect)

UN

DER

VO

LTA

GE

01St

age

1 U

nder

volta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

02M

ax V

1<Bi

nary

(1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

03Th

resh

old

V1<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

5.0

V *

if 10

00K

V Ra

nge

else

20.

0 V

4402

=1

Setti

ng5.

0 /

130.

0 /

0.1

if 10

00KV

Rang

eel

se 2

0.0

/ 48

0.0

/ 0.

5

04D

elay

Typ

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 10:

def

inite

tim

e *

1: in

vers

e tim

e44

02=

1Se

tting

0/1/

1

05TM

SC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 *

4404

=1

Setti

ng0.

5/10

0.0/

0.5

06T

RESE

TC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s

*44

04 =

1Se

tting

0 /

1000

.0 /

0.1

s

07D

elay

V1<

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

4404

=0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

08-0

FRe

serv

ed

10St

age

2 U

nder

volta

ge(S

ub H

eadi

ng)

11M

ax V

1<<

Bina

ry (

1 bi

t)0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

dSe

tting

0/1/

1

12Th

resh

old

V1<

<C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r5.

0 V

* if

1000

KV R

ange

else

20.

0 V

4411

=1

Setti

ng5.

0 /

130.

0 /

0.1

if 10

00KV

Rang

eel

se 2

0.0

/ 48

0.0

/ 0.

5

13D

elay

V1<

<C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

04 s

*44

11=

1Se

tting

0 /

599.

9 /

0.01

s

45

00

FREQ

UEN

CY

01F1

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

02Th

resh

old

F1C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z45

01 !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

03D

elay

F1

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

4501

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

96/

118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

04F2

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

05Th

resh

old

F2C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z45

04 !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

06D

elay

F2

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

4504

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

07F3

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

08Th

resh

old

F3C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z45

07 !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

09D

elay

F3

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

4507

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

0AF4

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

0BTh

resh

old

F4C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z45

0A !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

0CD

elay

F4

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

450A

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

0DF5

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

0ETh

resh

old

F5C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z45

0D !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

0FD

elay

F5

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

450D

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

10F6

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

NO

* /

81<

/ 8

1>Se

tting

0/2/

1

11Th

resh

old

F6C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r50

.00

Hz

* if

Fn =

50

Hz

else

60.

00 H

z45

10 !=

0Se

tting

40.0

0 /

60.0

0 /

0.01

if F

n=

50

Hz

else

50.

00 /

70.

00 /

0.0

1

12D

elay

F6

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.04

s *

4510

!= 0

Setti

ng0

/ 59

9.9

/ 0.

01 s

46

00

FREQ

UEN

CY C

HA

NG

E O

F RA

TE

01df

/dt 1

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

02Th

resh

old

df/d

t 1C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*46

01 !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

03df

/dt 2

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

04Th

resh

old

df/d

t 2C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*46

03 !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

05df

/dt 3

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

06Th

resh

old

df/d

t 3C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*46

05 !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

07df

/dt 4

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

97/

118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

08Th

resh

old

df/d

t 4C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*46

07 !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

09df

/dt 5

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

0ATh

resh

old

df/d

t 5C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*46

09 !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

0Bdf

/dt 6

Bina

ry (1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

0CTh

resh

old

df/d

t 6C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r1.

0 H

z /s

*46

0B !=

0Se

tting

-10.

0 /

10.0

/ 0

.1 H

z/s

60

00

AU

TOM

ATI

SM

01Tr

ip C

onfig

urat

ion

Bina

ry (1

3 bi

ts /

15

bits

)0

*Se

tting

0/81

91/1

or

0/32

767/

1

02Tr

ip C

onfig

urat

ion

(2)

Bina

ry (1

0 bi

ts /

16

bits

)0

*Se

tting

0/10

23/1

or

0/65

535/

1

03La

tche

d C

onfig

urat

ion

Bina

ry (1

3 bi

ts /

15

bits

)0

*Se

tting

0/81

91/1

or

0/32

767/

1

04La

tche

d C

onfig

urat

ion

(2)

Bina

ry (

10 b

its /

16

bits

)0

*Se

tting

0/10

23/1

or

0/65

535/

1

05Bl

ocki

ng 1

Con

figur

atio

nBi

nary

(11

bits

)0

*Se

tting

0/20

47/1

06Bl

ocki

ng 1

Con

figur

atio

n (2

)Bi

nary

(10

bits

/ 16

bits

)0

*Se

tting

0/10

23/1

or

0/65

535/

1

07Bl

ocki

ng 2

Con

figur

atio

nBi

nary

(11

bits

)0

*Se

tting

0/20

47/1

08Bl

ocki

ng 2

Con

figur

atio

n (2

)Bi

nary

(10

bits

/ 16

bits

)0

*Se

tting

0/10

23/1

or

0/65

535/

1

61

00

AFF

ECTA

TIO

N D

ES T

S

01Lo

gica

l inp

ut a

lloca

tion

1In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

0: n

othi

ng *

1: u

nlat

ch2:

52

a3:

52

b4:

ext

erna

l CB

failu

re5:

Ext

erna

l inp

ut 1

6: E

xter

nal i

nput

27

: Log

ic b

lock

ing

18

: Log

ic b

lock

ing

29

: Set

ting

chan

ge10

: D

istu

rban

ce tr

ig

Setti

ng0

/ 8

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

0 /

1

02Lo

gica

l inp

ut a

lloca

tion

2In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

0: n

othi

ng *

1: u

nlat

ch2:

52

a3:

52

b4:

ext

erna

l CB

failu

re5:

Ext

erna

l inp

ut 1

6: E

xter

nal i

nput

27

: Log

ic b

lock

ing

18

: Log

ic b

lock

ing

29

: Set

ting

chan

ge10

: D

istu

rban

ce tr

ig

Setti

ng0

/ 8

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

0 /

1

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

98/

118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

03Lo

gica

l inp

ut a

lloca

tion

3In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

0: n

othi

ng *

1: u

nlat

ch2:

52

a3:

52

b4:

ext

erna

l CB

failu

re5:

Ext

erna

l inp

ut 1

6: E

xter

nal i

nput

27

: Log

ic b

lock

ing

18

: Log

ic b

lock

ing

29

: Set

ting

chan

ge10

: D

istu

rban

ce tr

ig

Setti

ng0

/ 10

/ 1

04Lo

gica

l inp

ut a

lloca

tion

4In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

0: n

othi

ng *

1: u

nlat

ch2:

52

a3:

52

b4:

ext

erna

l CB

failu

re5:

Ext

erna

l inp

ut 1

6: E

xter

nal i

nput

27

: Log

ic b

lock

ing

18

: Log

ic b

lock

ing

29

: Set

ting

chan

ge10

: D

istu

rban

ce tr

ig

Setti

ng0

/ 10

/ 1

05Lo

gica

l inp

ut a

lloca

tion

5In

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

0: n

othi

ng *

1: u

nlat

ch2:

52

a3:

52

b4:

ext

erna

l CB

failu

re5:

Ext

erna

l inp

ut 1

6: E

xter

nal i

nput

27

: Log

ic b

lock

ing

18

: Log

ic b

lock

ing

29

: Set

ting

chan

ge10

: D

istu

rban

ce tr

ig

Setti

ng0

/ 10

/ 1

06Ti

mer

aux

1C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0

*Se

tting

0 /

200.

0 /

0.01

s

07Ti

mer

aux

2C

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0

*Se

tting

0 /

200.

0 /

0.01

s

08TS

set

ting

(Edg

e ty

pe)

Bina

ry (5

bits

)Bi

t 0 to

4 =

0 :

Risi

ng e

dge

Bit 0

to 4

= 1

: Fa

lling

edg

eSe

tting

0/31

/1

09TS

vol

tage

Inde

xed

Strin

g0

* =

DC

1 =

AC

Setti

ng0/

1/1

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

99/

118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

62

00

LOG

ICA

L EQ

UA

TIO

NS

CO

NFI

GU

RA

TIO

N

01U

<Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

02t U

<Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

03U

<<

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

04t U

<<

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

05U

<<

<Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

06t U

<<

<Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

07U

>Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

08t U

>Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

09U

>>

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

0At U

>>

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

0BU

>>

>Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

0Ct U

>>

>Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

0DV0

>Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

0Et V

0>Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

0FV0

>>

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

10t V

0>>

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

11V0

>>

>Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

12t V

0>>

>Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

13V2

>Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

14t V

2>Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

15V2

>>

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

16t V

2>>

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

17V1

<Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

18t V

1<Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

19V1

<<

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

1At V

1<<

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

1BF1

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

1Ct F

1Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

100

/118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

1DF2

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

1Et F

2Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

1FF3

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

20t F

3Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

21F4

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

22t F

4Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

23F5

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

24t F

5Bi

nary

(2 b

its /

4 b

its)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

25F6

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

26t F

6Bi

nary

(2 b

its/

4 bi

ts)

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

27D

F/D

T 1

Bina

ry (4

bits

)00

00 *

Setti

ng0

/ 15

/ 1

28D

F/D

T 2

Bina

ry (4

bits

)00

00 *

Setti

ng0

/ 15

/ 1

29D

F/D

T 3

Bina

ry (4

bits

)00

00 *

Setti

ng0

/ 15

/ 1

2AD

F/D

T 4

Bina

ry (4

bits

)00

00 *

Setti

ng0

/ 15

/ 1

2BD

F/D

T 5

Bina

ry (4

bits

)00

00 *

Setti

ng0

/ 15

/ 1

2CD

F/D

T 6

Bina

ry (4

bits

)00

00 *

Setti

ng0

/ 15

/ 1

2DtA

ux 1

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

2EtA

ux 2

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

2FBr

eake

r al

arm

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

00 *

/ 0

000

*Se

tting

0 /

3 /

1 or

0 /

15

/ 1

30Ex

t. Br

eake

r fa

ilure

Bina

ry (2

bits

/ 4

bits

)00

* /

000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 3

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

5 /

1

63

00

LOG

ICA

L EQ

UA

TIO

NS

DEL

AYS

01Eq

uatio

n 1

oper

atio

n de

lay

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 36

00.0

/ 0

.1 s

02Eq

uatio

n 1

rese

t del

ayC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0

*Se

tting

0 /

3600

.0 /

0.1

s

03Eq

uatio

n 2

oper

atio

n de

lay

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 36

00.0

/ 0

.1 s

04Eq

uatio

n 2

rese

t del

ayC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0

*Se

tting

0 /

3600

.0 /

0.1

s

05Eq

uatio

n 3

oper

atio

n de

lay

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 36

00.0

/ 0

.1 s

06Eq

uatio

n 3

rese

t del

ayC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0

*Se

tting

0 /

3600

.0 /

0.1

s

07Eq

uatio

n 4

oper

atio

n de

lay

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 36

00.0

/ 0

.1 s

08Eq

uatio

n 4

rese

t del

ayC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0

*Se

tting

0 /

3600

.0 /

0.1

s

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

101

/118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

64

00

TC C

ON

FIG

URA

TIO

N

01G

ENER

AL

TRIP

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

02C

LOSE

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

03 U

<Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

04t U

<Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

05U

<<

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

06t U

<<

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

07U

<<

<Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

08t U

<<

<Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

09 U

>Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

0At U

>Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

0BU

>>

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

0Ct U

>>

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

0DU

>>

>Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

0Et U

>>

>Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

0FV0

>Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

10t V

0>Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

11V0

>>

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

12t V

0>>

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

13V0

>>

>Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

14t V

0>>

>Bi

nary

(3 b

its /

7 b

its)

000

* /

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

7 /

1 or

0 /

127

/ 1

15V2

>Bi

nary

( 7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

16t V

2>Bi

nary

(7 b

its)

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

127

/ 1

17V2

>>

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

18t V

2>>

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

19V1

<Bi

nary

(7 b

its)

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

127

/ 1

1At V

1<Bi

nary

(7 b

its)

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

127

/ 1

1BV1

<<

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

1Ct V

1<<

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

102

/118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

1DF1

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

1Et F

1Bi

nary

(7 b

its)

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

127

/ 1

1FF2

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

20t F

2Bi

nary

(7 b

its)

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

127

/ 1

21F3

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

22t F

3Bi

nary

(7 b

its)

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

127

/ 1

23F4

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

24t F

4Bi

nary

(7 b

its)

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

127

/ 1

25F5

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

26t F

5Bi

nary

(7 b

its)

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

127

/ 1

27F6

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

28t F

6Bi

nary

(7 b

its)

0000

000

*Se

tting

0 /

127

/ 1

29D

F/D

T 1

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

2AD

F/D

T 2

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

2BD

F/D

T 3

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

2CD

F/D

T 4

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

2DD

F/D

T 5

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

2ED

F/D

T 6

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

2FtA

ux 1

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

30tA

ux 2

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

31Br

eake

r al

arm

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

32Fr

eque

ncy

non

mea

sura

ble

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

33Ex

t. Br

eake

r fa

ilure

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

34Eq

uatio

n A

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

35Eq

uatio

n B

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/ 1

27 /

1

36Eq

uatio

n C

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

37Eq

uatio

n D

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

Setti

ng0

/ 12

7 /

1

38TC

Act

ive

Setti

ng G

roup

Bina

ry (7

bits

)00

0000

0 *

bit 0

to 6

=0:

Gro

up 1

bit 0

to 6

=1:

Gro

up 2

Setti

ng0/

127/

1

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

103

/118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

39TC

lock

set

ting

Bina

ry (3

bits

/ 7

bits

)00

0 *

/ 0

0000

00 *

bit 0

to 2

/ b

it 0

to 6

=1:

TC

Lock

ed

Setti

ng0

/ 7

/ 1

or 0

/127

/1

65

00

CO

NFI

GU

RATI

ON

DES

LED

S

01Le

d 5

(1)

Bina

ry (1

6 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

655

35/

1

02Le

d 6

(1)

Bina

ry (1

6 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

655

35/

1

03Le

d 7

(1)

Bina

ry (1

6 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

655

35/

1

04Le

d 8

(1)

Bina

ry (1

6 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

655

35/

1

05Le

d 5

(2)

Bina

ry (4

bits

/ 1

6 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

15/

1 o

r 0/

655

35 /

1

06Le

d 6

(2)

Bina

ry (4

bits

/ 1

6 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

15/

1 o

r 0/

655

35 /

1

07Le

d 7

(2)

Bina

ry (4

bits

/ 1

6 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

15/

1 o

r 0/

655

35 /

1

08Le

d 8

(2)

Bina

ry (4

bits

/ 1

6 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

15/

1 o

r 0/

655

35 /

1

09Le

d 5

(3)

Bina

ry (9

bits

/ 1

5 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

102

3/ 1

or

0/32

767/

1

0ALe

d 6

(3)

Bina

ry (9

bits

/ 1

5 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

102

3/ 1

or

0/32

767/

1

0BLe

d 7

(3)

Bina

ry (9

bits

/ 1

5 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

102

3/ 1

or

0/32

767/

1

0CLe

d 8

(3)

Bina

ry (9

bits

/ 1

5 bi

ts)

0 *

Setti

ng0/

102

3/ 1

or

0/32

767/

1

66

00

ALA

RM

S

01In

stan

t. al

arm

sel

f-re

set

Bina

ry (1

bits

)D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

02Ba

ttery

ala

rmBi

nary

(1

bits

)D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

69

00

SW S

UPE

RV

ISIO

N

01SW

Ope

ratin

g tim

e?Bi

nary

(1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

02SW

Ope

ratin

g tim

eC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

10 s

*69

01 =

1Se

tting

0.10

/ 5

.0 /

0.0

5 s

03SW

Clo

sing

tim

e ?

Bina

ry (

1 bi

t)0

Dis

able

d *

/ En

able

dSe

tting

0/1/

1

04SW

Clo

sing

tim

eC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

10 s

*69

03 =

1Se

tting

0.10

/ 5

.0 /

0.0

5 s

05SW

Ope

ratin

g nu

mbe

r?Bi

nary

(1

bit)

0D

isab

led

* /

Enab

led

Setti

ng0/

1/1

06SW

Ope

ratin

g nu

mbe

rU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)0

*69

05 =

1Se

tting

0/ 5

0000

/ 1

07TR

IP t

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

0.1

s*Se

tting

0.1

/ 5.

0 /

0.05

s

08C

LOSE

tC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 s*

Setti

ng0.

1 /

5.0

/ 0.

05 s

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

104

/118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

70

00

REC

ORD

ER C

ON

TRO

L(V

ERSI

ON

P922 e

t >

)

01St

art/

Trig

ger

reco

rder

Inde

xed

Strin

g0 1 2

Stop

ped

Trig

erre

dRu

nnin

g *

Setti

ng1/

2/1

02Re

cord

er S

ourc

eIn

dexe

d St

ring

0Sa

mpl

es *

Dat

a

20Pr

etem

psC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 se

cond

esSe

tting

0.1

/ 3.

0 /

0.1

s

21Po

stem

psC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r0.

1 se

cond

esSe

tting

0.1

/ 3.

0 /

0.1

s

22D

istu

rban

ce r

ec. t

rigIn

dexe

d St

ring

0O

N IN

ST*

/ O

N T

RIG

Setti

ng0

/ 1

/ 1

30M

easu

rem

ent p

erio

d (M

ax &

Moy

)U

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)0

5 m

n *

Setti

ng5

/ 10

/ 1

5/ 3

0/ 6

0 m

n

80

00

DIS

TURBA

NC

E REC

(VER

SIO

N P

922 e

t >

)

01Re

cord

Num

ber

Uns

igne

d in

tege

r (1

byt

e)0*

Setti

ng0/

5/1

(sel

on c

onte

xte)

02Tr

igge

r Ti

me

IEC

870

Tim

e &

Dat

edd

/mm

/yy

hh:m

mD

ata

03A

vaila

ble

Cha

nnel

Bit

Mas

kBi

nary

Fla

gIn

dexe

d St

ring

0 1 2 3 4

1111

1"U

a""U

b""U

c""V

0""In

puts

/Out

puts

"

Dat

a

04C

hann

el T

ypes

Bina

ry F

lag

0: d

igita

l, 1:

ana

logu

e01

111

Dat

a

05C

hann

el O

ffse

tsRe

peat

ed g

roup

of C

ourie

r nu

mbe

rsU

ploa

d O

ffse

tsD

ata

06Sc

alin

g Fa

ctor

sRe

peat

ed g

roup

of C

ourie

r nu

mbe

rsU

ploa

d Sc

al. F

acto

rsD

ata

07-0

FN

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TE -

rés

ervé

10Re

cord

Len

gth

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)D

ata

11Tr

igge

r po

sitio

nIn

tege

r (2

byt

es)

Dat

a

12Ti

me

Base

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

Dat

a

13N

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TED

- r

eser

ved

14U

ploa

d Ti

mer

Repe

ated

gro

up o

f Int

eger

sD

ata

15-1

FN

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TED

- r

eser

ved

20U

ploa

d C

hann

el 0

Repe

ated

gro

up o

f Int

eger

sD

ata

21U

ploa

d C

hann

el 1

Repe

ated

gro

up o

f Int

eger

sD

ata

22U

ploa

d C

hann

el 2

Repe

ated

gro

up o

f Int

eger

sD

ata

23U

ploa

d C

hann

el 3

Repe

ated

gro

up o

f Int

eger

sD

ata

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N C

T/E1

1C

ourie

r D

atab

ase

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Page

105

/118

Col

Row

Men

u T

ext

Data

Typ

eIn

dV

alu

es(*

: d

efault)

Dep

end

Cel

l Typ

eM

in/M

ax/

Step

24U

ploa

d C

hann

el In

puts

/Out

puts

Repe

ated

gro

up o

f Int

eger

/Bin

. fla

gsD

ata

90

00

AU

TOM

AT.

FLT

(VER

SIO

N P

922 e

t >

)

01Re

cord

num

ber

Uns

igne

d In

tege

r (2

byt

es)

Setti

ng(a

utom

atic

)

02O

ccur

faul

t dat

eU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)D

ata

03A

ctiv

e se

t gro

upU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)1

Dat

a

04Ph

ase

in fa

ult

ASC

II Te

xt (1

0 by

tes)

"PH

ASE

A"

Dat

a

05Fa

ult I

dA

SCII

Text

(18

byte

s)"U

>>

"D

ata

06M

agni

tude

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

12.3

4 V

Dat

a

07U

a M

agni

tude

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

12.3

4 V

Dat

a

08U

b M

agni

tude

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

12.3

4 V

Dat

a

09U

c M

agni

tude

Cou

rier

float

ing

poin

t num

ber

12.3

4 V

Dat

a

0AV0

Mag

nitu

deC

ourie

r flo

atin

g po

int n

umbe

r12

.34

VD

ata

BF00

CO

MM

SYS

TEM

DA

TA

01D

ist R

ecor

d C

ntrl

Ref

Men

u C

ell (

2)0x

7000

Dat

a

02D

ist R

ecor

d Ex

trac

t Ref

Men

u C

ell (

2)0x

8000

Dat

a

03Se

tting

Tra

nsfe

rtU

nsig

ned

Inte

ger

(2 b

ytes

)0

*D

ata

0 /

1 /

1

04Re

set D

eman

d Ti

mer

sN

ON

IMPL

EMEN

TED

05Re

set E

vent

Rep

ort

NO

N IM

PLEM

ENTE

D

P92x

/EN

CT/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deC

ourie

r D

atab

ase

Page

106

/118

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

BLA

NK

PA

GE

Technical Guide P92x/EN CT/E11IEC 60870-5-103MiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 107/118

IEC 60870-5-103

P92x/EN CT/E11 Technical GuideIEC 60870-5-103

Page 108/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

BLANK PAGE


4. IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE

The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slavedevice. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relayconforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 not supported.

The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

� Initialization (Reset)

� Time synchronization

� Event Record Extraction

� General Interrogation

� Cyclic Measurements

� General Commands

4.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It ispossible to select the relay address and baud rate using the front panel interface.Following a change, a reset command is required to re-establish communications.

The parameters of the communication are the following:

� Even Parity

� 8 Data bits

� 1 stop bit

� Data rate 9600 or 19200 bauds.

4.2 Initialization

Whenever the relay is powered up, or when the communication parameters aremodified, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The relaywill respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), thedifference being that the Reset CU will clear any message which is not sent in therelay�s transmit buffer.

The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU5,the cause of transmission (COT) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCBdepending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will becontained in the data section of this ASDU:

Manufacturer Name : AREVA

The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relaymodel number to identify the type of relay, e.g. P923.

In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up, itwill also produce a power up event.


Page 110/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

4.3 Time Synchronization (P922 & P932 only)

The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of theIEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct the transmission delay as specifiedin the IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as asend/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. If the timesynchronization message is sent as a sent/confirm or broadcast (send/no reply)message, a time synchronization message will be returned as class 1 data.

4.4 Spontaneous Events (P922 & P923 only)

The event created by the relay will be passed using the standard functiontype/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes arenot used, thus any event that can not pass using standardized messages will not besent

Events are categorized using the following information:

� Common Address

� Function type

� Information number

APPENDIX 2 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. Thecommon address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay producesmore events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardized messages.For example if the relay produces starts and trips for three stages of overcurrent onlytwo stages can pass using the standardized messages.

Using the different common address for two of the overcurrent stages allows eachstage to be indicated. The table in APPENDIX 2 shows the common address as anoffset value. The common address offset will be added to the station address inorder to pass these events.

4.5 General Interrogation

The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay. The function numbers,information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GIcycle are indicated in APPENDIX 2.

4.6 Cyclic Measurements

The relay will produce measured value using ASDU 9 on a cyclic basis, this can beread from the relay using a class 2 poll ( note ASDU 3 is not used ).

It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as aproportion of either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. Theselection of either 1.2 or 2.4 for a particular value is indicated in APPENDIX 2.

4.7 Commands

A list of the supported commands is contained in APPENDIX 2. The relay will respondto other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negativeacknowledgement of a command.


4.8 Disturbance Records (P922 & P923 only)

The disturbance records stored by the relay can not be extracted using themechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintainscompatibility with the VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with nodisturbance records at the start of every GI cycle.

4.9 Blocking of Monitor Direction

The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.


Page 112/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

5. APPENDIX 2

5.1 IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASES

An event is always generated on the rising edge of the information.

Some events can be generated on the rising or lowering edge.

In the list below, events only generated on rising edge will be tagged with a �*�.

5.1.1 List of Events produced by the relay

Two types of ASDU can be generated for events : ASDU 1 (time-tagged message) orASDU 2 (time-tagged message with relative time).

The list of processed events is following, with the associated INFORMATIONNUMBER, ASDU TYPE and CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION.

Status indications (monitor direction) :

� Leds reset : INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,*

� Local parameter Setting active : INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<1>

� Setting Group number 1 active : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1>

� Setting Group number 2 active: INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1>

� Auxiliary input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>


� Logical input 1 : INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT<1>





� Logical output 1 : INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT<1>


� Logical output 3: INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT<1>


� Logical output 5: (WD) INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT<1>






Fault Indications (monitor direction) :

� Start U> : INF <64>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Start U>> : INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Start U>>> : INF <66>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Start V0> : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1>

� General Trip : INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� General Start / pick-up : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>

� Trip Logical Equation A : INF <86>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Trip Logical Equation B : INF <87>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Trip Logical Equation C : INF <88>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Trip Logical Equation D : INF <89>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Trip U> : INF <90>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Trip U>> : INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Trip U>>> : INF <94>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Trip V0> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Trip V0>>: INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Trip V0>>> : INF <95>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Start V0>> : INF <96>; TYP <2>; COT<1>

� Start V0>>> : INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<1>

� Start U< : INF <98>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Trip U< : INF <99>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Start U<< : INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Trip U<< : INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Start U<<< : INF <102>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Trip U<<< : INF <103>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Start V1< : INF <104>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Trip V1< : INF <105>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Start V1<< : INF <106>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Trip V1<< : INF <107>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Start V2> : INF <108>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Trip V2> : INF <109>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Start V2>> : INF <110>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Trip V2>> : INF <111>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Start F1 : INF <112>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,


Page 114/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

� Trip F1 : INF <113>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*


� Trip F2 : INF <115>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*


� Trip F3 : INF <117>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*


� Trip F4 : INF <119>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*


� Trip F5 : INF <121>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*


� Trip F6 : INF <123>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*

� Frequency non measurable : INF <124>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,

� Trip df/dt 1 : INF <192>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,*






Auto-recloser Indications (monitor direction) :

� CB in O/O (« closed ») position : INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,

� CB in F/O (« open ») position : INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,

� Trip TC : INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,

� Close TC : INF <143>; TYP <1>; COT<1>

5.1.2 System State

List of processed data, following a General interrogation, is given below: it is asub-assembly of the spontaneous messages.

Status indications (monitor direction) :

� Local parameter Setting active : INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<9>

� Setting Group number 1 active : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<9>

� Setting Group number 2 active: INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<9>


















Fault Indications (monitor direction) :

� General Start / pick-up : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<9>

Auto-recloser Indications (monitor direction) :

� CB in O/O (« closed ») position : INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,

� CB in F/O (« open ») position : INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,

� Trip TC : INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,



Page 116/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

6. PROCESSED COMMANDS

6.1 System Commands

� Synchronization Command (ASDU 6) : INF <0>, TYP <6>, COT<9>

This command can be sent to a specific relay, or global, it only exists on the P922and P923. The time sent by master is the time of the first bit of the frame. The relaysynchronizes with this time, corrected by the frame transmission delay. After updatingits time, the relay send back an acknowledge to the master, by giving its new currenttime. This acknowledge message will be an event of ASDU 6 type.

� General Interrogation Initialization command (ASDU 7) :

INF <0>, TYP <7>, COT<9>

This command starts the relay interrogation :

The relay then sends a list of data containing the relay state (see list described above).The GI command contains a scan number which will be included in the answers ofthe GI cycle generated by the GI command.

If a data has just changed before extracted by the GI, the new state is sent to themaster station.

When an event is generated during the GI cycle, the event is sent in priority, and theGI cycle is temporarily interrupted. The end of the GI consists in sending an ASDU 8to the master station.

If, during a General Interrogation cycle, another GI Initialization command isreceived, the precedent answer is stopped, and the new GI cycle started.

6.2 General Commands (ASDU 20) (Control direction)

Leds Reset : This command acknowledge all alarms on Front Panel on MiCOMP92x products : INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT <20>

� Setting group number 1 : INF<23>, TYP<20>, COT <20>

� Setting group number 2 : INF<24>, TYP<20>, COT <20>

� Trip TC : INF <142>; TYP <20>; COT<20>


After executing one of these commands, the relay sends an acknowledge message,which contains the result of command execution.

If a state change is the consequence of the command, it must be sent in a ASDU 1with COT 12 (remote operation).

If the relay receive another command message from the master station beforesending the acknowledge message, it will be discarded.

Commands which are not processed by the relay are rejected with a negativeacknowledge message.


7. RELAY RE-INITIALIZATION

In case of relay re-initialization, the relay send to the master station :

� A message indicating relay start (INF <5>; TYP <5> COT <6>)

� An identification message of the relay (ASDU 5), which contains themanufacturer name in 8 ASCII characters et 4 free characters containing :« P921 » or « P922 » or « P923 ».

8. CYCLIC MESSAGES (ASDU 9 AND ASDU 77)

Only measurands can be stored in these messages.

The measurands values are stored in lower levels of communication, before pollingby master station.

Several of the fields in the ASDU 9 (INF <148>) are unused in the P921/P922/P923relay (Current and Power values), so they are set to 0 : Only RMS Ua, Ub, Uc valuesand frequency are stored (with a rate such as : 2,4 * nominal value = 4096).

Another ASDU, ASDU 77 (INF <149>), which is a private ASDU, contains 3 othermeasurands : V0 value, V1 (V direct) and V2 (Vinverse) values, in Volts, and in «shortfloating-point » format (IEEE 32 bits floating-point format). These values are notrated.


Page 118/118 MiCOM P921-P922-P923

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P92x/EN IN/E11

MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

Installation

Technical Guide P92x/EN IN/E11InstallationMiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 1/10

��

CONTENTS

1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS 3

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT 3

3. STOCKAGE 4

4. UNPACKING 4

5. RELAY MOUNTING 5

5.1 Rack Mounting 5

5.2 Panel Mounting 7

6. RELAY WIRING 8

6.1 Medium and Heavy Duty Terminal Block Connections 8

6.2 RS485 Port 9

6.3 Earth Connection 9

P92x/EN IN/E11 Technical GuideInstallation

Page 2/10 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

BLANK PAGE


��

1. RECEIPT OF RELAYS

Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatmentprior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately toensure no external damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has beensustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA shouldbe promptly notified.

Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installationshould be returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton. Section 3of this chapter gives more information about the storage of relays.

2. HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A person�s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of severalthousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices whenhandling electronic circuits can cause serious damage which, although not alwaysimmediately apparent, will reduce the reliability of the circuit. This is particularlyimportant to consider where the circuits use complementary metal oxidesemiconductors (CMOS), as is the case with these relays.

The relay�s electronic circuits are protected from electrostatic discharge when housedin the case. Do not expose them to risk by removing the front panel or printed circuitboards unnecessarily.

Each printed circuit board incorporates the highest practicable protection for it�ssemiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to remove a printed circuitboard, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability andlong life for which the relay has been designed and manufactured.

1. Before removing a printed circuit board, ensure that you are at the sameelectrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case.

2. Handle analogue input modules by the front panel, frame or edges of thecircuit boards. Printed circuit boards should only be handled by their edges.Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit tracks or connectors.

3. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both atthe same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

4. Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which isat the same potential as yourself.

5. If it is necessary to store or transport printed circuit boards removed from thecase, place them individually in electrically conducting anti-static bags.


Page 4/10 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

In the unlikely event that you are making measurements on the internal electroniccircuitry of a relay in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with aconductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between500k� to 10M�. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contactwith the case to prevent a build-up of electrostatic potential. Instrumentation whichmay be used for making measurements should also be earthed to the case wheneverpossible.

More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can befound in BS EN 100015:Part 1:1992. It is strongly recommended that detailedinvestigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in aspecial handling area such as described in the aforementioned British Standarddocument.

3. STOCKAGE

If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in aplace free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bagshave been included in the packing they should be retained.

The action of the de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag is exposed toambient conditions and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hourprior to replacing it in the carton. To prevent battery drain during transportation andstorage a battery isolation strip is fitted during manufacture. With the lower accesscover open, presence of the battery isolation strip can be checked by a red tabprotruding from the positive side.

Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust which has collected onthe carton does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packingmay become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose theirefficiency.

Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between �25° to+70°C.

4. UNPACKING

Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of theparts are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in thepacking or lost.

Relays must only be handled by skilled persons.

The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free fromdust and excessive vibration. This particularly applies to installations which are beingcarried out at the same time as construction work.


��

5. RELAY MOUNTING

MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly.

Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing thedimensions for panel cut-outs and hole centres. This information can also be found inthe product publication.

Secondary front covers can also be supplied as an option item to preventunauthorised changing of settings and alarm status. They can be ordered under thereference GEN0055 (size 20TE).

The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are onlyaccessible when the access top and bottom covers are open and hidden from sightwhen the covers are closed.

If an MMLG test block is to be included, it is recommended that, when viewed fromthe front, it is positioned on the right-hand side of the relay (or relays) with which it isassociated. This minimises the wiring between the relay and test block, and allows thecorrect test block to be easily identified during commissioning and maintenance tests.

5.1 Rack Mounting

MiCOM relays may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames (our part numberFX0021 001), as illustrated in Figure 1. These frames have been designed to havedimensions in accordance with IEC60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready touse. On a standard 483 mm rack system this enables combinations of widths of caseup to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by side.

The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26 mmintervals and the relays are attached via their mounting flanges using No.4 recessedhead self-tapping screws.

Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mountingangles at each end of the tier.


Page 6/10 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

P0403XXa

FIGURE 1 : RACK MOUNTING OF RELAYS

Relays can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangementsby means of the rack frame. This enables schemes using products from the MiCOMand MiDOS product ranges to be pre-wired together prior to mounting.

Where the case size summation is less than 80TE on any tier, or space is to be left forinstallation of future relays, blanking plates may be used. These plates can also beused to mount ancillary components. Figure 1 shows the sizes that can be ordered.

NOTE: Blanking plates are only available in black.

Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012,�MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions�.

Width Part number

5TE GJ2028 001

10TE GJ2028 002

15TE GJ2028 003

20TE GJ2028 004

25TE GJ2028 005

30TE GJ2028 006

35TE GJ2028 007

40TE GJ2028 008

TABLE 1 : BLANKING PLATES


��

5.2 Panel Mounting

The relays can be flush mounted into panels using self-tapping screws passingthrough the front mounting flanges. Alternatively tapped holes can be used if thepanel has a minimum thickness of 2.5 mm.

For applications where relays need to be semi-projection or projection mounted, arange of collars are available. Further details can be obtained from the ContractsDepartment of AREVA.

Where several relays are to mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, it is advised thatthey are mechanically grouped together horizontally and/or vertically to form rigidassemblies prior to mounting in the panel.

NOTE: It is not advised that MiCOM relays are fastened using pop rivetsas this will not allow the relay to be easily removed from thepanel in the future if repair is necessary.

If it is required to mount a relay assembly on a panel complying to BS EN60529IP52, it will be necessary to fit a metallic sealing strip between adjoining relays (Partno GN2044 001) and a sealing ring selected from Table 2 around the completeassembly.

Width Single Tier Double Tier

10TE GJ9018 002 GJ9018 018

15TE GJ9018 003 GJ9018 019

20TE GJ9018 004 GJ9018 020

25TE GJ9018 005 GJ9018 021

30TE GJ9018 006 GJ9018 022

35TE GJ9018 007 GJ9018 023

40TE GJ9018 008 GJ9018 024

45TE GJ9018 009 GJ9018 025

50TE GJ9018 010 GJ9018 026

55TE GJ9018 011 GJ9018 027

60TE GJ9018 012 GJ9018 028

65TE GJ9018 013 GJ9018 029

70TE GJ9018 014 GJ9018 030

75TE GJ9018 015 GJ9018 031

80TE GJ9018 016 GJ9018 032

TABLE 2 : IP52 SEALING RINGS

Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012,�MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions�.


��

It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring should be protected by a 16A highrupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current transformercircuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to protectthe wire used.

6.2 RS485 Port

Connections to the RS485 port are made using ring terminals. It is recommended thata 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000m or 200nFtotal cable capacitance.

A typical cable specification would be:

� Each core: 16/0.2 mm copper conductors PVC insulated

� Nominal size: 0.5 mm2 per core

� Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed

Refer to chapter P92x/EN CO, paragraph 2.2 for references of RS232/RS485converters.

6.3 Earth Connection

Every relay must be connected to the local earth bar using the M4 earth studs in thebottom left hand corner of the relay case. The minimum recommended wire size is2.5 mm2 and should have a ring terminal at the relay end. Due to the limitations ofthe ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium orheavy duty terminals is 6.0 mm2 per wire. If a greater cross-sectional area isrequired, two parallel connected wires, each terminated in a separate ring terminal atthe relay, or a metal earth bar could be used.

NOTE: To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass orcopper earth conductors and the rear panel of the relay,precautions should be taken to isolate them from one another.This could be achieved in a number of ways, including placing anickel-plated or insulating washer between the conductor andthe relay case, or using tinned ring terminals.


Page 10/10 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P92x/EN CM/E11

MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

Commissioning Guide

Technical Guide P92x/EN CM/E11Commissioning GuideMiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 1/28

��

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION 5

2. SETTING FAMILIARISATION 6

3. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING 6

3.1 Minimum equipment required 6

3.2 Optional equipment 6

4. PRODUCT CHECKS 7

4.1 With the relay de-energised 74.1.1 Visual inspection 8

4.1.2 Insulation 9

4.1.3 On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring iscorrectly reconnected to the relay. 9

4.1.4 External wiring 9

4.1.5 Watchdog contacts 9

4.1.6 Auxiliary supply 10

4.2 With the relay energised 104.2.1 Watchdog contacts 10

4.2.2 Date and time 10

4.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) 11

4.2.3.1 Testing the alarm LED 11

4.2.3.2 Testing the trip LED 11

4.2.3.3 Testing the user-programmable LEDs 11

4.2.4 Opto-isolated inputs 11

4.2.5 Output relays 12

4.2.6 Rear communications port 13

4.2.6.1 Courier communications 13

4.2.6.2 Modbus communications 13

4.2.6.3 IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications 13

4.2.7 Voltage inputs 14

P92x/EN CM/E11 Techncal GuideCommissioning Guide

Page 2/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

5. SETTING CHECKS 15

5.1 Applying the settings to the relay 15

5.2 Checking the relay settings 15

5.3 Testing the "Phase overvoltage protection" and "Phase undervoltageprotection" functions 16

5.3.1 Wiring diagram 16

5.3.2 MiCOM P921-P922-P923 relay parameters 17

5.3.3 Configuration with 3 single voltages (�3Vpn�) and �AND� detection logic 18

5.3.3.1 Stages (V>) or (V<) with definite time delay 18

5.3.3.2 Stages (V>) or (V<) with inverse time delay 19

5.3.4 Configuration with 3 single voltages (�3Vpn�) and �OR� detection logic 19

5.4 "Under/overfrequency" function tests 205.4.1 Wiring diagram 20

5.4.2 MiCOM P922-P923 relay parameters 20

5.4.3 Test example: stage (f1>) or (f1<) 20

5.5 "Rate of change of frequency" function tests 215.5.1 Wiring diagram 21

5.5.2 MiCOM P923 relay parameters 21

5.5.3 Test example : stage df/dt1 & df/dt2 22

6. ON-LOAD CHECKS - VOLTAGE INPUT CONNECTIONS 23

7. FINAL CHECKS 24

8. PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE 25

8.1 Maintenance period 25

8.2 Maintenance checks 258.2.1 Alarms 25

8.2.2 Opto-isolated inputs 25

8.2.3 Output relays 25

8.2.4 Measurement accuracy 26

8.3 Method of repair 268.3.1 Replacing the complete relay 26

8.4 Changing the battery 278.4.1 Instructions for replacing the battery 27

8.4.2 Post modification tests 27

8.4.3 Battery disposal 27

8.5 Cleaning 27


��

FIGURES

FIGURE 1 : REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 20TE CASE 8

TABLE 1 : WATCHDOG CONTACT STATUS 9

TABLE 2 : OPERATIONAL RANGE OF AUXILIARY SUPPLY 10

TABLE 3 : OPTO-ISOLATED INPUT TERMINALS 11

TABLE 4 : RELAY OUTPUT TERMINALS 12

TABLE 5 : RS485 TERMINALS 13

TABLE 6 : VOLTAGE INPUT TERMINALS 14

FIGURE 2 : (V>) AND (V>>) STAGE TEST 16


Page 4/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

BLANK PAGE


��

1. INTRODUCTION

The MiCOM P921-P922-P923 protection relays are fully numerical in their design,implementing many protection and non-protection functions. The relays periodicallyconduct self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will trigger an alarm. Asa result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.

To commission numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware isfunctioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been appliedto the relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if thesettings have been verified by one of the following methods:

� Extracting the settings applied to the MiCOM relay using appropriate settingsoftware (Preferred method)

� Via the operator interface

To confirm that the product is operating correctly once the application-specificsettings have been applied, a test should be performed on a single protectionelement.

Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible fordetermining the application-specific settings to be applied to the relay.

Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided in chapterP92x/EN RS for completion as required.

The commissioning tests must always be performed in conformity with the rules andregulations of the country of use.

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BEFAMILIAR WITH THE "SAFETY SECTION� AND THE PREVIOUS CHAPTER (P92x/EN IN)OF THIS TECHNICAL GUIDE.


Page 6/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

2. SETTING FAMILIARISATION

When commissioning a MiCOM P921, P922 or P923 relay for the first time, sufficienttime should be allowed to become familiar with various menus containing thesettings.

The �User Guide� section (Chapter P92x/EN FT) of this technical guide gives adetailed description of the menu structures for the MiCOM P921, P922 and P923relays.

With the plastic front cover in place all keys except the � key are accessible. Allmenu cells can be read. LEDs and alarms can be reset. However, no protection orconfiguration settings can be changed.

Removing the cover allows access to all keys so that settings can be changed.However, certain settings with protected access will require the appropriate passwordto be entered before changes can be made.

Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (suchas MiCOM S1), the settings can be viewed a page at a time and printed. Thissoftware also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk forfuture reference or printed to produce a setting record.

3. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

3.1 Minimum equipment required

Voltmeter test set with chronometer (range: 0 to 240 VAC).

Supply voltage of 48-125 VDC or 220 VAC.

Multimeter with suitable AC current range, and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0 - 250Vrespectively.

Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter)

Phasemeter.

Indicates the order of succession of phases.

NOTE: Modern test equipment may contain many of the above featuresin one unit.

3.2 Optional equipment

Multi-finger test plug type MMLB01 (if test block type MMLG installed).

An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V (forinsulation resistance testing when required).

A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications portto be tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time duringcommissioning).

KITZ K-Bus to RS232 protocol converter (if RS485 K-Bus port is being tested and oneis not already installed).

RS485 to RS232 converter (if RS485 Modbus port is being tested). Part numbers RS-CONV1 or RS-CONV32 (please contact us for more information).

A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).


��

4. PRODUCT CHECKS

These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked toensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioningcorrectly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.

If the application-specific settings have been downloaded to the relay prior tocommissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow theirrestoration later. To do this use one of the methods described below:

� Obtain a setting file on a diskette from the customer (this requires a portable PCwith appropriate setting software, e.g. MiCOM S1).

� Extract the settings from the relay itself (this again requires a portable PC withappropriate setting software).

� Manually create a setting record. This can be done using a copy of the settingrecord located in chapter P92x/EN RS to record the settings as the relay�s menu issequentially stepped through via the front panel user interface.

If password protection is enabled and the customer has changed the password toprevent changes to some of the settings, either the revised password should beprovided, or the customer should restore the original password prior tocommencement of testing.

NOTE: In the event that the password has been lost, a recoverypassword can be obtained from AREVA by quoting the serialnumber of the relay.

4.1 With the relay de-energised

THE FOLLOWING GROUP OF TESTS SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT WITHOUT THEAUXILIARY SUPPLY BEING APPLIED TO THE RELAY AND WITH THE TRIP CIRCUITISOLATED.

The voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for these checks.If an MMLG test block is provided, the required isolation can easily be achieved byinserting test plug type MMLB01 which effectively open-circuits all wiring routedthrough the test block.

Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring)diagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard.

If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relay should beisolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks. Where means of isolatingthe auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links, fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided,these should be used. If this is not possible, the wiring to these circuits will have to bedisconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent them from being asafety hazard.


Page 8/10 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

6. RELAY WIRING

This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector typefor each terminal on the MiCOM relay.

6.1 Medium and Heavy Duty Terminal Block Connections

Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rearmounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of tworing terminals per relay terminal.

If required, AREVA can supply M4 90° crimp ring terminals in five different sizesdepending on wire size (see Table 3 and Table 4). Each type is available in bags of100.

Part number Wire Size Insulation Colour

ZB9124 901 0.25 � 1.65 mm2 (22-16AWG)

P0404XXa

Red

ZB9124 900 1.04 � 2.63 mm2 (16-14AWG)

P0405XXa

Blue

ZB9124 904 2.53 - 6.64 mm2 (12-10AWG) Uninsulated*

TABLE 3 : M4 90° CRIMP RING TERMINALS

Part number Wire Size

ZB9128 015 0.75 � 1.5 mm2

P0406XXa

ZB9128 016 1.5 �2.5 mm2

P0407XXa

TABLE 4 : M4 CRIMP RING TERMINALS

* To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulatingsleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.

The following minimum wire sizes are recommended:

� Auxiliary Supply, Vx 1.5 mm2

� RS485 port See separate section

� Other circuits 1.0 mm2

Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be usedfor any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0 mm2 using ring terminals thatare not pre-insulated. Where it required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, themaximum wire size that can be used is reduced to 2.63 mm2 per ring terminal. If alarger wire size is required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in aseparate ring terminal at the relay.

The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks,except the RS485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.


Page 8/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

4.1.1 Visual inspection

Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred sinceinstallation.

The rating information given under the top cover on the front of the relay should bechecked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.

Ensure that the case earthing connections, upper right-hand corner at the rear of therelay case, are used to connect the relay to a local earth bar using an adequateconductor.

P0386XXa

FIGURE 1 : REAR TERMINAL BLOCKS ON SIZE 20TE CASE


��

4.1.2 Insulation

Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required forthem to be done and they haven�t been performed during installation.

Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic insulationtester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the same circuits should betemporarily connected together.

The main groups of relay terminals are:

a) Voltage transformer circuits.

b) Auxiliary voltage supply.

c) External voltage output and opto-isolated inputs.

d) Relay contacts.

e) RS485 communication port.

f) Case earth.

The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M� at 500V.

4.1.3 On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctlyreconnected to the relay.

4.1.4 External wiring

Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant connection diagram orscheme diagram.

If an MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked against thescheme (wiring) diagram. It is recommended that the supply connections are to thelive side of the test block (coloured orange with the odd numbered terminals (1, 3, 5,7 etc.)). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13 (supply positive) and15 (supply negative), with terminals 14 and 16 connected to the relay�s positive andnegative auxiliary supply terminals respectively. However, check the wiring against theschematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the customer�snormal practice.

4.1.5 Watchdog contacts

Using a continuity tester, check that the normally closed watchdog contacts are in thestates given in Table 1 for a de-energised relay.

Terminals Watchdog contacts

Relay de-energised Relay energised

35-36 Closed Open

36-37 Open Closed

TABLE 1 : WATCHDOG CONTACT STATUS


Page 10/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

4.1.6 Auxiliary supply

The relay can be operated from either a DC only or an AC/DC auxiliary supplydepending on the relay�s nominal supply rating. The voltage must be within theoperating range specified in Table 2.

Without energising the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within theoperating range.

Nominal supply rating

DC [AC RMS]

DC operatingrange

AC operatingrange

24-60V [-] 19 to 72V -

48-150V 38 to 180V -

130-250V [100/250V] 104 to 300V 88 to 300V

TABLE 2 : OPERATIONAL RANGE OF AUXILIARY SUPPLY

It should be noted that the relay can withstand an AC ripple of up to 12 % of theupper rated voltage on the DC auxiliary supply.

DO NOT ENERGISE THE RELAY USING THE BATTERY CHARGER WITH THE BATTERYDISCONNECTED AS THIS CAN IRREPARABLY DAMAGE THE RELAY'S POWER SUPPLYCIRCUITRY

ENERGISE THE RELAY IF THE AUXILIARY SUPPLY IS WITHIN THE OPERATING RANGE.IF AN MMLG TEST BLOCK IS PROVIDED, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO LINK ACROSSTHE FRONT OF THE TEST PLUG TO CONNECT THE AUXILIARY SUPPLY TO THE RELAY.

4.2 With the relay energised

THE FOLLOWING GROUP OF TESTS VERIFY THAT THE RELAY HARDWARE ANDSOFTWARE IS FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY AND SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT WITHTHE AUXILIARY SUPPLY APPLIED TO THE RELAY.

THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTIONS MUST REMAIN ISOLATED FROM THERELAY FOR THESE CHECKS.

4.2.1 Watchdog contacts

Using a continuity tester, check the watchdog contacts are in the states given in Table1 for an energised relay.

4.2.2 Date and time

Set the date and time to the correct values. Refer to Chapter P92x/EN FT of theTechnical guide.


��

4.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating thatthe relay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state(on or off) of the alarm and trip LEDs when the relay was last energised from anauxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliarysupply is applied.

If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before proceeding with furthertesting. If the LEDs successfully reset (the LED goes out), there is no testing requiredfor that LED because it is known to be operational.

4.2.3.1 Testing the alarm LED

To do this, activate the "Undervoltage" function, 1st stage.

If there is no voltage across the VT inputs, the "alarm" LED begins to flash and amessage appears on the front panel.

4.2.3.2 Testing the trip LED

Repeat the previous test and allocate the time-delayed information (tV<) to the triprelay. Check that the trip LED has illuminated.

4.2.3.3 Testing the user-programmable LEDs

Repeat the previous test and allocate the instantaneous information (V<) to LED 5,then to LEDs 6, 7 and 8. Check that each LED has illuminated.

4.2.4 Opto-isolated inputs

This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs on the relay are functioning correctly.(2 opto-isolated inputs for the P921 and 5 opto-isolated inputs for the P922 andP923).

The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time. Ensuring correct polarity,connect the auxiliary voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested.The opto-isolated input terminal allocations are given in Table 3.

The line "INPUTS" in the "OP. PARAMETERS" menu gives the state of each input, a '1'indicating an energised input and a '0' indicating a de-energised input. When eachinput is energised one of the digits on the bottom line of the display will change to thevalue shown in Table 3 to indicate the new state of the inputs.

Apply a continuousvoltage across terminalsInputs

negative positive

Inputs

Opto input 1 24 22 0 0 0 0 1

Opto input 2 28 26 0 0 0 1 0

Opto input 3 19 17 0 0 1 0 0

Opto input 4 23 21 0 1 0 0 0

P922

-P92

3

Opto input 5 27 25 1 0 0 0 0

TABLE 3 : OPTO-ISOLATED INPUT TERMINALS


Page 12/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

4.2.5 Output relays

This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. (4 output relays forthe P921 and 8 output relays for the P922-P923).

The output relays should be energised one at a time.

Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 givenin Table 4.

To actuate each output relay, activate the "Undervoltage" function, 1st stage.

Allocate the instantaneous information (V<) to the relay to be tested; for example,enter the following settings in the "OUTPUTS" sub-menu of the "CONTROL SYSTEMS"menu:

V< 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 1

to control relay no. 2.

Repeat the test for each relay, modifying the allocation of the instantaneousinformation (V<).

To validate relay RL1 (trip relay), allocate the time-delayed information (tV<) to therelay in the "CONF DEC" sub-menu of the "CONTROL SYSTEMS" menu.

Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester operating for a normally opencontact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact.

NOTE: It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connectedto the output relays during the test procedure is not exceeded bythe associated output relay being operated for too long. It istherefore advised that the time between application and removalof relay testing is kept to the minimum.

Monitor terminals Output relays statesOutput relays

N/C N/O 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Relay 1 2-4 2-6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Relay 2 8-10 8-12 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Relay 3 - 14-16 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

Relay 4 - 18-20 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

Relay 5 - 1-3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Relay 6 - 5-7 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Relay 7 - 9-11 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

P922

-P92

3

Relay 8 - 13-15 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TABLE 4 : RELAY OUTPUT TERMINALS


��

4.2.6 Rear communications port

This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remotelocation and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.

It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from therelay to the remote control centre, just the relay's rear communications port and anyprotocol converter necessary.

The protocol available for remote communication appears on the label on the relayfront panel (under the top cover).

4.2.6.1 Courier communications

If a K-Bus to RS232 KITZ protocol converter is installed, connect a portable PCrunning the appropriate software to the incoming (remote from relay) side of theprotocol converter.

If a KITZ protocol converter is not installed, it may not be possible to connect the PCto the type installed. In this case a KITZ protocol converter and portable PC runningappropriate software should be temporarily connected to the relay�s K-Bus port. Theterminal numbers for the relay�s K-Bus port are given in Table 5. However, as theinstalled protocol converter is not being used in the test, only the correct operation ofthe relay�s K-Bus port will be confirmed.

Connection Terminal

KBUS Modbus or VDEW

Screen Screen 30

1 positive 31

2 negative 32

TABLE 5 : RS485 TERMINALS

The relay's Courier address in the "COMMUNICATIONS" menu must be set to a valuebetween 1 and 255.

Check that communications can be established with this relay using the portable PC.

4.2.6.2 Modbus communications

Connect a portable PC (�master station�) running the appropriate Modbus MasterStation software to the relay�s RS485 port via a RS485 to RS232 interface converter.The terminal numbers for the relay�s RS485 port are given in Table 5.

Ensure that the relay address, baud rate and parity settings in the Modbus softwareare set the same as on the MiCOM relay (see "COMMUNICATIONS" menu).

Check that communications with this relay can be established.

4.2.6.3 IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications

IEC60870-5-103/VDEW communication systems are designed to have a local MasterStation. This should be used to verify that the relay's fibre optic or RS485 port, asappropriate, is working.

Ensure that the relay address, baud rate and parity settings in the Master Stationsoftware are set the same as on the MiCOM relay (see "COMMUNICATIONS" menu).

Check that, using the Master Station, communications with the relay can beestablished.


Page 14/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

4.2.7 Voltage inputs

This test verifies the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptabletolerances.

4 types of connection are possible for the MiCOM P921, P922 and P923 relays: 3VT(phase-neutral), 3VT (phase-phase) + residual VT, 3VT (phase-neutral) + residual VT,2VT (phase-phase) + residual VT.

THE FOLLOWING TESTS ARE PERFORMED WITH A 3VT CONNECTION(PHASE-PHASE) CORRESPONDING TO THE MOST FREQUENTCONFIGURATION.

Apply the rated voltage to each voltage input. Check its magnitude using amultimeter. Refer to Table 6 for the corresponding reading in the relay's"MEASUREMENTS" menu and record the value displayed.

MEASUREMENTS menu Voltage applied to

VA (RMS value) 41-42

VB (RMS value) 43-44

VC (RMS value) 45-46

TABLE 6 : VOLTAGE INPUT TERMINALS

The measured voltage values on the relay will be in primary volts.

The measurement accuracy of the relay is ±1%. Nevertheless, additional allowancemust be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.


��

5. SETTING CHECKS

The setting checks ensure that all of the relay settings (i.e. the relay�s protection andcontrol settings and programmable logic equations) for the particular installationhave been correctly applied to the relay.

5.1 Applying the settings to the relay

There are two methods of applying the settings:

� Transfer them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PCrunning the appropriate software via the relay�s front RS232 port, located underthe bottom cover, or via the rear communications port.This method is preferred for transferring function settings as it is much faster andthere is less margin for error.

NOTE: If a setting file has been created for the particular applicationand provided on a diskette, this will further reduce thecommissioning time.

� Enter them manually via the relay�s operator interface.

5.2 Checking the relay settings

The settings applied to the relay should be carefully checked to ensure they havebeen entered correctly.

There are two methods of checking the settings:

� Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running the appropriatesoftware via the front RS232 port, located under the bottom cover, or via the rearcommunications port:

� with a KITZ protocol converter connected if the rear protocol is Kbus,

� with a standard RS232/RS485 converter if the rear protocol is Modbus.

� Compare the settings taken from the relay with the original application-specificsettings (for cases where the customer has only provided a printed copy of therequired settings but a portable PC is available).

� Step through the settings using the relay's operator interface and compare themwith the original settings.


Page 16/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

5.3 Testing the "Phase overvoltage protection" and "Phase undervoltageprotection" functions

5.3.1 Wiring diagram

33

34

+

_

+_

Notes :(1) Supplementary hardware for MiCOM P922-P923 relay(2) Supplementary hardware for MiCOM P922-P923 relay(3) 3VT assembly, Phase-Neutral

41A

B

C

N

4243

4445

4649

50

22

2426

28

19

17

21

23

27

25

WD

373536

RL1

642

RL2

12108

29

31

32

-30*

+

_

EL1

Auxiliary power supply

Auxiliary power supply

Watchdog

RL31614

RL42018

RL531

RL675

RL79

11

RL81315

4 programmableLEDs

Case earth

RS 485 communication port (Modbus, Courier,CEI60870-5-103)

*

(* For the last relay of the RS 485 link,

connect terminal 30 to terminal 32)

LEDs

See note 2

See note 1

See note 3

MiCOM P92*

RL1

RL2

RL3

EL2

EL3

EL4

EL5

RL4

RL5

RL6

RL7

RL8

P0408ENa

Stopchrono

Voltage source

FIGURE 2 : (V>) AND (V>>) STAGE TEST


��

5.3.2 MiCOM P921-P922-P923 relay parameters

Note the settings of the MiCOM P921-P922-P923 relays in the tables below.

Settings[59] OVERVOLTAGE Default values

Group 1 Group 2 (P922-P923)

1st stage activated No No / AND / OR * No / AND / OR *

1st overvoltage stage 130.0V if H1**480.0V if H2

V V

Time delay type DMT DMT/IDMT * DMT/IDMT *

TMS 1.0

tRESET V> 0.01s Secs Secs

tV>= 0.04s Secs Secs

2nd stage activated No No / AND / OR * No / AND / OR *

2nd overvoltage stage 130.0V if H1**480.0V if H2

V V

tV>>= 0.01s Secs Secs

3rd stage activated No No / AND / OR * No / AND / OR *

3rd overvoltage stage 130.0V if H1**480.0V if H2

V V

tV>>>= 0.01s Secs Secs

Hysteresis 0.98

Settings[27] UNDERVOLTAGE Default values



1st undervoltage stage 5.00V if H1**20.0V if H2

V V


TMS 1.0

tRESET V< 0.01s Secs Secs

tV<= 0.04s Secs Secs


2nd undervoltage stage 5.00V if H1**20.0V if H2

V V

tV<<= 0.01s Secs Secs


3rd undervoltage stage 5.00V if H1**20.0V if H2

V V

tV<<<= 0.01s Secs Secs

Hysteresis 1.02

* Delete as appropriate** H1 = 57-130V voltage range H1 = 220-480V voltage range


Page 18/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

5.3.3 Configuration with 3 single voltages (�3Vpn�) and �AND� detection logic

Do not exceed a maximum voltage of 2xVn in the following tests.

In view of the detection logic (�AND�), the voltages must be injected into the 3 phaseinputs to cause tripping to occur.

5.3.3.1 Stages (V>) or (V<) with definite time delay

Values to be measured:

1. stage (V>) or (V<)

2. time delay (tV>) or (tV<)

Stage (V>) check:

1. If time delay (tV>) is short, gradually inject the voltage into the 3 phases up tothe stage value: tripping should occur for a voltage equal to the stage (V>) towithin �2%

2. If time delay (tV>) is long, inject a voltage equal to 0.98x(V>) into the 3 phasesand check that tripping does not occur. Then inject 1.2x(V>) and check thattripping occurs.

3. Gradually reduce the voltage on one of the phases and measure the value ofthe drop-off stage (V>) : the function must reset for a voltage less than or equalto the programmed hysteresis.

Stage (V<) check:

1. If time delay (tV<) is short, gradually reduce the voltage on the 3 phases fromthe rated voltage to the stage value: tripping should occur for a voltage equalto the stage (V<) to within �2%

2. If time delay (tV<) is long, inject a voltage equal to 1.02x(V<) into the 3 phasesand check that tripping does not occur. Then inject 0.8x(V<) and check thattripping occurs.

3. Gradually increase the voltage on one of the phases and measure the value ofthe drop-off stage (V<) : the function must reset for a voltage greater than orequal to 1.02x(V<).

Action check:

1. appearance of an alarm message on the display

2. flashing of the �Alarm� LED

3. illumination of the �Trip� LED if tripping is programmed

4. illumination of the LEDs associated with instantaneous information (V>) and(V<) and time-delayed information (tV>) and (tV<) if programmed

5. trip relay operation (RL1) if programmed

6. operation of output relay associated with stages (V>) and (V<) if programmed


��

Time delay (tV>) check:

1. Preset the injection voltage to a value equal to 2x(V>).

2. Inject the voltage into the 3 phases simultaneously.

3. Measure the time delay (tV>): it must be equal to the parametered value �2%(or a minimum of �20ms).

Time delay (tV<) check:

1. Disconnect the previously injected voltage.

2. Measure the time delay (tV<): it must be equal to the parametered value �2%(or a minimum of �20ms).

5.3.3.2 Stages (V>) or (V<) with inverse time delay

Values to be measured: time delays (tV>) and (tV<)

Action check: see above.

Time delays (tV>) and (tV<) check:

The time delay is measured for two injected voltages, for example at 1.1x(V>) and1.4x(V>).

Injected voltage Rated trip time for TMS=1(in seconds)

1.2x(U>) 5

1.4x(U>) 2.5

The time delay measured must be equal to the parametered value �5% (or aminimum of �40ms).

The time delay is measured for two injected voltages, for example at 0.9x(V<) and0.6x(V<).

Injected voltage Rated trip time for TMS=1(in seconds)

0.9x(V<) 10

0.6x(U<) 2.5

The time delay measured must be equal to the parametered value �5% (or aminimum of �40ms).

5.3.4 Configuration with 3 single voltages (�3Vpn�) and �OR� detection logic

Repeat the tests described in paragraph 5.3.3, injecting the voltage into one phaseonly. In view of the detection logic (�OR�), tripping should occur in these conditions.


Page 20/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

5.4 "Under/overfrequency" function tests


Refer to the diagram used for the "Phase over/undervoltage protection� function tests.

5.4.2 MiCOM P922-P923 relay parameters

Only configure the frequency for one of the six stages available.

Settings[81] FREQUENCY Default values

Group 1 Group 2

1st stage activated No No / 81< / 81> � No / 81< / 81> *

1st frequency stage 50 Hz Hz Hz

1st stage time delay 0.04s Secs Secs

2nd stage activated No No / 81< / 81> * No / 81< / 81> *

2nd frequency stage 50 Hz Hz Hz

2nd stage time delay 0.04s Secs Secs

3rd stage activated No No / 81< / 81> * No / 81< / 81> *

3rd frequency stage 50 Hz Hz Hz

3rd stage time delay 0.04s Secs Secs

4th stage activated No No / 81< / 81> * No / 81< / 81> *

4th frequency stage 50 Hz Hz Hz

4th stage time delay 0.04s Secs Secs







5.4.3 Test example: stage (f1>) or (f1<)

First program the 1st frequency stage at (81>) (overfrequency), then configure it at(81<) (underfrequency). Then measure the values given below.

Values to be measured:

1. stage (f1>) or (f1<)

2. time delay (tf1>) or (tf1<)

� Delete as appropriate


��

Stage (f1>) check:

1. If time delay (tf1>) is short, gradually increase the frequency from the nominalfrequency fn to the value of the stage (f1>): tripping should occur for afrequency in the range [(f1>) � 10mHz, (f1>) + 10mHz].

2. If time delay (tf1>) is long, adjust the frequency to [(f1>) � 50mHz] and checkthat tripping does not occur. Increase the frequency to 1.2x(f1>) and check thattripping occurs.

3. Gradually reduce the frequency and measure the value of the drop-off stage(f1>): the function must reset for a frequency less than or equal to [(f1>) �50mHz].

Stage (f1<) check:

1. If time delay (tf1<) is short, gradually reduce the frequency from the nominalfrequency fn to the value of the stage (f1<): tripping should occur for afrequency in the range [(f1<) � 10mHz, (f1<) + 10mHz].

2. If time delay (tf1<) is long, adjust the frequency to [(f1<) + 50mHz] and checkthat tripping does not occur. Reduce the frequency to 0.8x(f1<) and check thattripping occurs.

3. Gradually increase the frequency and measure the value of the drop-off stage(f1<): the function must reset for a frequency greater than or equal to [(f1<)+50mHz].

Action check:

1. appearance of an alarm message on the display

2. flashing of the �Alarm� LED

3. illumination of the �Trip� LED if tripping is programmed

4. illumination of the LEDs associated with instantaneous information (f1>) and(f1<) and time-delayed information (tf1>) and (tf1<) if programmed

5. trip relay operation (RL1) if programmed

6. operation of output relay associated with stages (f1>) and (f1<) if programmed

5.5 "Rate of change of frequency" function tests


Refer to the diagram used for "Phase over/under voltage protection" functions tests.

5.5.2 MiCOM P923 relay parameters

Only configure the rate of change of frequency for 2 of the 6 stages available (onewith positive sign and the other with negative sign).


Page 22/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

Settings[81R] Rate of change offrequency

Default values

Group 1/2

1st stage activated No No/Yes

1st stage 1.0 Hz/s Hz/s

2nd stage activated No No/Yes

2nd stage 1.0 Hz/s Hz/s

3rd stage activated No No/Yes

3rd stage 1.0 Hz/s Hz/s

4th stage activated No No/Yes

4th stage 1.0 Hz/s Hz/s





5.5.3 Test example : stage df/dt1 & df/dt2

First program the first stage of df/dt at +0.5 Hz/s and the second stage at �0.5 Hz/s.

NOTE : the setting of the �t should be low as mush as it is possible thanthe period in order to detect the small variation within the time.

Select for example a range of frequency from 50 Hz to 51 Hz with a variation of1 mHz every 1 ms. The result is shown in the table (1st line). If you assign the 1st

threshold to the tripping relay (RL1), so tripping will occur.

Repeat the test with a range of (50 � 49 Hz), now the 2nd threshold will operate.

Also you can assign these threshold to output relays and LEDs and verify thefunctioning of these elements.

Nominal frequencyselected

Frequency df dt df/dt

50 51 Hz 1 mHz 1 ms 1 Hz/s

50 49 Hz �1 mHz 1 ms �1 Hz/s

Action check : (if output relays and LEDs are associated)

1. Appearance of an Alarm message on the display

2. Flashing of the "Alarm" LED

3. Illumination of the "TRIP" LED if tripping is programmed

4. Illumination of the LEDs associated with the stages df/dt1 & df/dt2

5. Trip relay operation RL1 if programmed

6. Operation of output relay associated with the stages df/dt1 & df/dt2


��

6. ON-LOAD CHECKS - VOLTAGE INPUT CONNECTIONS

The following on-load measuring checks ensure the external wiring to the voltageinputs is correct but can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing theenergisation of the plant being protected.

REMOVE ALL TEST LEADS, TEMPORARY SHORTING LEADS, ETC. ANDREPLACE ANY EXTERNAL WIRING THAT HAS BEEN REMOVED TO ALLOWTESTING.

IF IT HAS BEEN NECESSARY TO DISCONNECT ANY OF THE EXTERNALWIRING FROM THE RELAY IN ORDER TO PERFORM ANY OF THE FOREGOINGTESTS, IT SHOULD BE ENSURED THAT ALL CONNECTIONS ARE REPLACED INACCORDANCE WITH THE RELEVANT EXTERNAL CONNECTION OR SCHEMEDIAGRAM.

USING A MULTIMETER, MEASURE THE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERSECONDARY VOLTAGES TO ENSURE THEY ARE CORRECTLY RATED. CHECKTHAT THE SYSTEM PHASE ORDER IS CORRECT USING A PHASE METER.

COMPARE THE VALUES OF THE SECONDARY PHASE VOLTAGES WITH THERELAY'S MEASURED VALUES, WHICH CAN BE FOUND IN THEMEASUREMENTS MENU.

The values measured by the MiCOM relay should be within 1% of the appliedprimary voltages. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracyof the test equipment being used.


Page 24/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

7. FINAL CHECKS

The tests are now complete.

REMOVE ALL TEST OR TEMPORARY SHORTING LEADS, ETC. IF IT HAS BEENNECESSARY TO DISCONNECT ANY OF THE EXTERNAL WIRING FROM THERELAY IN ORDER TO PERFORM THE WIRING VERIFICATION TESTS, ITSHOULD BE ENSURED THAT ALL CONNECTIONS ARE REPLACED INACCORDANCE WITH THE RELEVANT EXTERNAL CONNECTION OR SCHEMEDIAGRAM.

If the relay is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, thecircuit breaker maintenance counters should be reset to zero. To do this, go to the"CB DATA" menu (P922-P923).

If an MMLG test block is installed, remove the MMLB01 test plug and replace theMMLG cover so that the protection is put into service.

Ensure that all event records (P922-P923), fault records (P922-P923), disturbancerecords (P922-P923), alarms and LEDs have been reset before leaving the relay.

If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the relay.


��

8. PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE

8.1 Maintenance period

It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA receive periodic monitoringafter installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. Inview of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it isdesirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals.

AREVA protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.

The MiCOM P921-P922-P923 protection relays are self-checking. They thus requireless maintenance than models using earlier technologies. Most problems will result inan alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests shouldbe done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring isintact.

If a preventative maintenance policy exists within the customer�s organisation then therecommended product checks should be included in the regular programme.Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as:

� the operating environment

� accessibility of the site

� amount of available manpower

� importance of the installation in the power system

� consequences of failure

8.2 Maintenance checks

Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location byutilising the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted tochecking that the relay is measuring the applied voltages accurately, and checkingthe circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended thatmaintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the substation itself).

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BEFAMILIAR WITH THE �SAFETY� SECTION IN THE �P92x/EN IN� CHAPTER OF THISMANUAL.

8.2.1 Alarms

The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist.If so, press the read key � repeatedly to display the alarms individually. Clear thealarms (key �) to extinguish the LED.


The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to theirenergisation by repeating the commissioning test detailed in Section 4.2.4 of thischapter.

8.2.3 Output relays

The output relays can be checked to ensure that they operate by repeating thecommissioning test detailed in Section 4.2.5 of this chapter.


Page 26/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

8.2.4 Measurement accuracy

If the power system is energised, the values measured by the relay can be comparedwith known system values to check that they are in the approximate range expected. Ifthey are then the analogue/digital conversion and calculations are being performedcorrectly by the relay. Suitable test methods can be found in Section 6 of this chapter.

Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known valuesinjected into the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relayterminals. Suitable test methods can be found in Section 7 of this chapter. These testswill prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.

8.3 Method of repair

If the relay should develop a fault while energised, depending on the nature of thefault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm will be generated. Due tothe use of surface-mount components, faulty PCBs should be replaced as it is notpossible to perform repairs on damaged circuits. Thus either the complete relay orjust the faulty PCB, identified by the relay�s diagnostic software, can be replaced.Refer to Chapter P92x/EN FT of this Technical Guide for more information on alarms.

The preferred method is to replace the complete relay as it ensures that the internalcircuitry is protected against electrostatic discharge and physical damage at all timesand overcomes the possibility of incompatibility between replacement PCBs. However,it may be difficult to remove an installed relay due to limited access in the back of thecubicle and rigidity of the scheme wiring: to avoid such difficulties, the MiCOM P921-P922-P923 relays are designed to be removed while energised for fast replacementof the live part of the relay, thus minimising the absence of protection.

BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BEFAMILIAR WITH THE �SAFETY� SECTION OF CHAPTER �P92x/EN IN�, OF THISMANUAL. THIS SHOULD ENSURE THAT NO DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY INCORRECTHANDLING OF THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.

8.3.1 Replacing the complete relay

The MiCOM P921-P922-P923 relays can be removed and replaced if necessarywithout having to disconnect the rear terminals.

This is possible while the relay is energised. It is however recommended that allauxiliary supplies are isolated before working on the relay.


��

8.4 Changing the battery

Each relay has a battery to maintain records (P922-P923) and the correct time in casethe auxiliary supply fails. The data maintained in a P922-P923 relay thus includesevent, fault and disturbance records at the time of failure.

This battery will periodically need changing, although an alarm will be given as partof the relay's periodic self-monitoring in the event of a low battery condition.

8.4.1 Instructions for replacing the battery

Open the bottom cover on the front of the relay.

Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to prizethe battery free.

Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, greaseand dust.

The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into thebattery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agreewith those adjacent to the socket.

NOTE: Only use a type ½AA lithium battery with a nominal voltage of3.7V.

ENSURE THAT THE BATTERY IS SECURELY HELD IN ITS SOCKET AND THAT THEBATTERY TERMINALS ARE MAKING GOOD CONTACT WITH THE METAL TERMINALSOF THE SOCKET.

Close the bottom cover on the front of the relay.

8.4.2 Post modification tests

To ensure that the replacement battery will maintain the date and time if the auxiliarysupply fails, change the date and time on the relay, then disconnect and reconnectthe auxiliary supply. The date and time should be maintained.

8.4.3 Battery disposal

The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with thedisposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.

8.5 Cleaning

Before cleaning the equipment ensure that all inputs (auxiliary supply, current,voltage) are isolated to prevent any risk of electric shock.

The equipment may be cleaned using a clean, damp cloth. Do not use detergents,solvents or abrasive cleaners as they may damage the relay's surface and leave aconductive residue.


Page 28/28 MiCOM P921-P922-P923��

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide P92x/EN RS/E11


Test Report

Technical Guide P92x/EN RS/E11Test ReportMiCOM P921-P922-P923 Page 1/22

CONTENTS

1. COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD 3

2. PRODUCT CHECKS 4

2.1 Relay de-energised 4

2.2 Relay energised 5

3. SETTING CHECKS 7

4. ON-LOAD CHECKS 8

5. RELAY SETTINGS INFORMATION 9

6. INPUT/OUTPUT AND LED CONFIGURATION 11

6.1 Configuration of logic inputs 11

6.2 Timer delays used in logic equations 11

6.3 Configuration of LEDS, output relays and associated control systems, andlogic equations 13

7. PROTECTION ELEMENT SETTINGS 17

7.1 Setting group used (P922-P923) 17

7.2 �Phase undervoltage protection� function 17

7.3 �Phase overvoltage protection� function 18

7.4 �Residual (zero sequence) overvoltage protection� function 18

7.5 �Negative sequence overvoltage protection� function (P922-P923) 19

7.6 �Positive sequence undervoltage protection� function (P922-P923) 19

7.7 �Under/overfrequency protection� function (P922-P923) 20

7.8 �Rate of change of frequency� function (P923) 20

8. CHECKS AND SUPERVISION 21

9. DISTURBANCE RECORDS AND MEASUREMENTS 21

10. COMMUNICATIONS 22

P92x/EN RS/E11 Technical GuideTest Report


BLANK PAGE


* Delete as appropriate

1. COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Date Operator name

Substationname

Circuit

Nominal networkfrequency

Front plate information

Protection relay P92

Model number

Serial number

Nominal voltage Vn

Auxiliary supply Vaux

Communication protocol

*Delete asappropriate

Have you followed all of the safety instructions? Yes/No*




2. PRODUCT CHECKS

2.1 Relay de-energised

2.1.1 Visual inspection

Relay damaged? Yes/No*

Rating information in conformity with installation? Yes/No*

Earth terminals on case connected? Yes/No*

2.1.2 External wiring

Wiring checked against diagram? Yes/No*

Test unit connections checked? Yes/No/Not used*

2.1.3 Insulation resistance >100M� at 500V DC Yes/No/Not tested*

2.1.4 Watchdog contacts (auxiliary supply disconnected)

Terminals 35 and 36 Contact closed? Yes/No*

Contact resistance ____�/Not measured*

Terminals 36 and 37 Contact open? Yes/No*

2.1.6 Auxiliary supply measured ______V AC/DC*



2.2 Relay energised

2.2.1 Watchdog contacts (auxiliary supply connected)

Terminals 35 and 36 Contact open? Yes/No*

Terminals 36 and 37 Contact closed? Yes/No*


2.2.2 Date and Time

Clock set to local time? Yes/No*

Information stored with auxiliary supply cut off? Yes/No*

2.2.3 Indicator LEDs

Relay operation OK indicator LED (green) on? Yes/No*

Alarm indicator LED (yellow) on? Yes/No*

Relay hardware fault indicator LED (yellow) on? Yes/No*

Trip indicator LED (red) on? Yes/No*

Operation of the 4 programmable LEDs OK? Yes/No*


Operation of opto-isolated input 1 OK? Yes/No*

Operation of opto-isolated input 2 OK? Yes/No*

Operation of opto-isolated input 3 (P922-P923)OK?

Yes/No*


Yes/No*


Yes/No*

2.2.5 Output relays

Relay 1 Operation OK? Yes/No*

Contact resistance (N/C) ____�/Not measured*

(N/O) ____�/Not measured*


Contact resistance (N/C) ____�/Not measured*

(N/O) ____�/Not measured*





Relay 5 (P922- Operation OK? Yes/No*




P923)


Relay 6 (P922-P923)

Operation OK? Yes/No*


Relay 7 (P922-P923)



Relay 8 (P922-P923)



2.2.6 Rear communications port

Communication standard K-Bus/Modbus/ IEC60870-5-103*

Communication established? Yes/No*

Protocol converter tested? Yes/No/Not used*

2.2.7 Phase voltage inputs

Type of wiring parametered in the relay 3Vpn3Vpn+Vr3Vpp+Vr2Vpp+Vr *

Main VT ratio ��

��

�

principal] TP Sec. [principal] TP Primaire [ _______V/Not used*

Input voltage Measured value Displayed value

Va _______V _______V

Vb _______V _______V

Vc _______V _______V

2.2.8 Residual input voltage

Residual VT ratio ��

��

�

résiduel] TP Sec. [résiduel] TP Primaire [ _______V/Not used*

Input voltage Measured value Displayed value

Vr _______V _______V



3. SETTING CHECKS

3.1 Application-specific settings? Yes/No*

Programmable application-specific logic equations? Yes/No/Not used*

If settings made using a portable PC, which software(and version) was used?

___________________

Programmable application-specific logic equationsvalidated?

Yes/No/Not used*

3.2 Application-specific settings verified? Yes/No/Not used*

3.3 Protection function time delay test? Yes/No*

Overvoltage protection type

Applied voltage ______V/Not applicable*

Expected operating time _________s

Measured operating time _________s




4. ON-LOAD CHECKS

4.1 Test cables disconnected? Yes/No/Not used*

Wiring modified by client re-checked? Yes/No/Not used*

On-load tests performed? Yes/No*

4.2 �Voltage� input wiring checked? Yes/No/Not used*

Type of wiring parametered in the relay? 3Vpn3Vpn+Vr3Vpp+Vr2Vpp+Vr *

Phase order OK? Yes/No*

Voltage display values Primary/Secondary*

Main VT ratio ��

��

�

principal] TP Sec. [principal] TP Primaire [ _______V/Not used*

Voltages: Measured value Displayed value

Va _______V _______V

Vb _______V _______V

Vc _______V _______V

Residual VT ratio ��

��

�

résiduel] TP Sec. [résiduel] TP Primaire [ _______V/Not used*

Voltage: Measured value Displayed value

Vr _______V _______V



5. RELAY SETTINGS INFORMATION

OPERATION Default values Settings

Password AAAA

Model MiCOM P92-

Part number ALST

Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz/60 Hz*

DATE ANDTIME(P922-P923)

Default values Settings

Date 01 Jan 1994

Time 00 :00 :00

CONFIGURATION Default values Settings

GENERAL

Wiring 3Vpn 3Vpn3Vpn+Vr3Vpp+Vr2Vpp+Vr *

Protection PROT P-N PROT P-PPROT P-N*

Default display RMS VA VA, VB, VC

Vo

Vab, Vbc, Vca

V1 (P922-P923)V2 (P922-P923)Frequency* (P922-P923)

VT RATIO

Prim Phase Vnp= 20.00 kV

Sec Phase Vns= 100 V

Prim Earth Vnp= 20.00 kV

Sec Earth Vns= 100 V

CONFIG SELECT

Change group input Edge Edge/Level

Setting group 1 1/2*



Page 10/22 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


CONFIGURATION Default values Settings

df/dt : CYCLE NB 1 1/200*

df/dt : Validat. NB 2 2 or 4*

PROTECTION BLOCK 5 if H120 if H2

5-13020-480

ALARMS

Inst. Self-reset No Yes/No*

Alarm battery No Yes/No*

CONFIGURATIONINPUT

Inputs : 5 4 3 2 1 1 1/0*

Voltage input DC DC/AC*

H1 & H2 : see §7



6. INPUT/OUTPUT AND LED CONFIGURATION

6.1 Configuration of logic inputs

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3(P922/P923)

Input 4(P922/P923)

Input 5(P922/P923)

Functions/logicinputs

YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO

NONE

UNLATCH

52a

52b

CB FAIL

AUX1

AUX2

BLK LOG1

BLK LOG2

CHANG SET(P922/P923)

DIST TRIG(P922/P923)

6.2 Timer delays used in logic equations

Delay on rising edge Delay on falling edgeEquations

Default value Settings Default value Settings

A 0.0 secs Secs 0.0 secs Secs

B 0.0 secs Secs 0.0 secs Secs

C 0.0 secs Secs 0.0 secs Secs

D 0.0 secs Secs 0.0 secs Secs


Page 12/22 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


BLANK PAGE

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N R

S/E1

1Te

st R

epor

tM

iCO

M P

921-

P922

-P92

3Pa

ge 1

3/22

6.3

C

on

fig

ura

tion

of

LED

S, o

utp

ut re

lays

an

d a

sso

ciate

d c

on

trol s

yste

ms,

an

d lo

gic

equ

atio

ns

Latc

hBlo

ck(B

lock

LOG

1)

Blo

ck(B

lock

LOG

2)

RL1

(DEC

)R

L2R

L3R

L4R

L5(P

922-

P92

3)

RL6

(P92

2-P

923)

RL7

(P92

2-P

923)

RL8

(P92

2-P

923)

LED

5LE

D 6

LED

7LE

D 8

Log

ic e

qua

tio

ns

Fun

ctio

ns

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

AB

CD

Trip

(cop

y RL

1to

oth

er r

elay

s)

CB

clos

ed (v

iaC

omm

)

V<=

tV<

=

V<<

=

tV<

<=

V<<

<=

tV<

<<

=

V>=

tV>

=

V>>

=

tV>

>=

V>>

>=

tV>

>>

=

V0>

=

tV0>

=

V0>

>=

tV0>

>=

V0>

>>

=

tV0>

>>

=

tAU

X1

P92x

/EN

RS/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deTe

st R

epor

tPa

ge 1

4/22

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Latc

hBlo

ck(B

lock

LOG

1)

Blo

ck(B

lock

LOG

2)

RL1

(DEC

)R

L2R

L3R

L4R

L5(P

922-

P92

3)

RL6

(P92

2-P

923)

RL7

(P92

2-P

923)

RL8

(P92

2-P

923)

LED

5LE

D 6

LED

7LE

D 8

Log

ic e

qua

tio

ns

Fun

ctio

ns

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

AB

CD

tAU

X2

CB

FAIL

tEQ

U A

tEQ

U B

tEQ

U C

tEQ

U D

Tech

nica

l Gui

deP9

2x/E

N R

S/E1

1Te

st R

epor

tM

iCO

M P

921-

P922

-P92

3Pa

ge 1

5/22

Info

rmat

ion

spec

ific

to M

iCO

M P

922-

P923

rel

ay:

Latc

hBlo

ck(B

lock

LOG

1)

Blo

ck(B

lock

LOG

2)

RL1

(DEC

)R

L2R

L3R

L4R

L5(P

922-

P92

3)

RL6

(P92

2-P

923)

RL7

(P92

2-P

923)

RL8

(P92

2-P

923)

LED

5LE

D 6

LED

7LE

D 8

Log

ic e

qua

tio

ns

Fun

ctio

ns

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

AB

CD

V2>

=

tV2>

=

V2>

>=

tV2>

>=

V1<

=

tV1<

=

V1<

<=

tV1<

<=

F1 tF1

F2 tF2

F3 tF3

F4 tF4

F5 tF5

F6 tF6

CB

ALA

RM

Freq

. out

of

rang

e

P92x

/EN

RS/

E11

Tech

nica

l Gui

deTe

st R

epor

tPa

ge 1

6/22

MiC

OM

P92

1-P9

22-P

923

Info

rmat

ion

spec

ific

to M

iCO

M P

923

rela

y:

Latc

hBlo

ck(B

lock

LOG

1)

Blo

ck(B

lock

LOG

2)

RL1

(DEC

)R

L2R

L3R

L4R

L5(P

922-

P92

3)

RL6

(P92

2-P

923)

RL7

(P92

2-P

923)

RL8

(P92

2-P

923)

LED

5LE

D 6

LED

7LE

D 8

Log

ic e

qua

tio

ns

Fun

ctio

ns

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

AB

CD

df/d

t1

df/d

t2

df/d

t3

df/d

t4

df/d

t5

df/d

t6



7. PROTECTION ELEMENT SETTINGS

The following notations are used in all of the tables below:

H1 = type 1 hardware corresponding to the 57-130V range of inputs

H2 = type 2 hardware corresponding to the 220-480V range of inputs

7.1 Setting group used (P922-P923)

Group 1 Yes/No*

Group 2 Yes/No*

7.2 �Phase undervoltage protection� function

Settings[27]UNDERVOLTAGE

Default values



1st undervoltage stage 5.00V if H120.0V if H2

V V


TMS 1.0

tRESET V< 0.01s Secs Secs

tV<= 0.04s Secs Secs


2nd undervoltagestage

5.00V if H120.0V if H2

V V

tV<<= 0.01s Secs Secs


3rd undervoltage stage 5.00V if H120.0V if H2

V V

tV<<<= 0.01s Secs Secs

Hysteresis 1.02


Page 18/22 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


7.3 �Phase overvoltage protection� function

Settings[59] OVERVOLTAGE Default values



1st overvoltage stage 130.0V if H1480.0V if H2

V V


TMS 1.0

tRESET V> 0.01s Secs Secs

tV>= 0.04s Secs Secs


2nd overvoltage stage 130.0V if H1480.0V if H2

V V

tV>>= 0.01s Secs Secs


3rd overvoltage stage 130.0V if H1480.0V if H2

V V

tV>>>= 0.01s Secs Secs

Hysteresis 0.98

7.4 �Residual (zero sequence) overvoltage protection� function

Settings[59N] Residual O/V Default values


1st stage activated No No/Yes * No/Yes *

1st residual O/V stage 5.00V if H120.0V if H2

V V


TMS 1.0

TRESET V0> 0.01s Secs Secs

tV0>= 0.04s Secs Secs

2nd stage activated No No/Yes * No/Yes *

2nd residual O/V stage 5.00V if H120.0V if H2

V V

tV0>>= 0.04s Secs Secs

3rd stage activated No No/Yes * No/Yes *

3rd residual O/V stage 5.00V if H120.0V if H2

V V

tV0>>>= 0.04s Secs Secs



7.5 �Negative sequence overvoltage protection� function (P922-P923)

Settings[47] Neg. seq. O/V Default values



1st neg. seq. O/Vstage

130.0V if H1480.0V if H2

V V


TMS 1.0

TRESET V2> 0.01s Secs Secs

tV2>= 0.04s Secs Secs


2nd neg. seq. O/Vstage

130.0V if H1480.0V if H2

V V

tV2>>= 0.04s Secs Secs

7.6 �Positive sequence undervoltage protection� function (P922-P923)

Settings[27D] Pos. seq. U/V Default values



1st pos. seq. U/Vstage

5.00V if H120.0V if H2

V V


TMS 1.0

TRESET V1< 0.01s Secs Secs

tV1<= 0.04s Secs Secs


2nd pos. seq. U/Vstage

5.00V if H120.0V if H2

V V

tV1<<= 0.04s Secs Secs


Page 20/22 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


7.7 �Under/overfrequency protection� function (P922-P923)

Settings[81] FREQUENCY Default values

Group 1 Group 2

1st stage activated No No / 81< / 81> * No / 81< / 81> *

1st frequency stage 50 Hz Hz Hz

1st stage time delay 0.04s Secs Secs

2nd stage activated No No / 81< / 81> * No / 81< / 81> *

2nd frequency stage 50 Hz Hz Hz

2nd stage time delay 0.04s Secs Secs

3rd stage activated No No / 81< / 81> * No / 81< / 81> *

3rd frequency stage 50 Hz Hz Hz

3rd stage time delay 0.04s Secs Secs










7.8 �Rate of change of frequency� function (P923)

Default values Settings[81R] Rate ofchange of frequency Group 1and 2

1st stage activated No No/Yes*

1st stage df/dt1 1.0 Hzs Hzs













8. CHECKS AND SUPERVISION

Information common to MiCOM P921-P922-P923 relays:

CB SUPERVISION Default values Settings

TCLOSE= 0.1 secs Secs

TTRIP= 0.1 secs Secs

Information specific to MiCOM P922-P923 relay:

CB SUPERVISION Default values Settings

CB OPEN S�vision No No/Yes *

CB OPENING TIME 0.1 secs Secs

CB CLOSE S�vision No No/Yes *

CB CLOSING TIME 0.1 secs Secs

NB OPER. ALARM ? No No/Yes *

NB OPERATIONS 0

9. DISTURBANCE RECORDS AND MEASUREMENTS

DISTURB RECORDER Default values Settings

Pre-time 0.01 secs Secs

Post-time 0.01 secs Secs

Disturb rec trig On INST ON INST / ON TRIP*

Setting the integration period for calculating average and maximum values:

TIME PEAK VALUE Default values Settings

Time window 5 mins Mins


Page 22/22 MiCOM P921-P922-P923


10. COMMUNICATIONS

If the relay has the Modbus protocol installed for remote communication, thefollowing parameters are required:

COMMUNICATION Default values Settings

COM Present No No/Yes *

Baud rate 19200 Bauds 300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 /9600 / 19200 / 38400 Bauds*

Parity None Odd/Even/None*

Stop bits 1 1/2 *

Relay address 1

If the relay protocol is the Kbus/Courier or IEC60870-5-103 type, only the relayaddress is required.

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

Pu

blic

atio

n:

P

92

x/E

N T

/E1

1

micom voltage&frequency relay p92x technical guide

Documents